Haldimann Structural Use of Glass Book PDF

IABSE Structural Engineering Document
Matthias Haldimann
Andreas Luible
Mauro Overend
Structural use of Glass
DRAFT
November 11, 2007
Contents
Contents i
Foreword v
1 Material 1
1.1 Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1.1 Production of flat glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1.2 Production of cast glass and glass profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1.3 Relevant standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Material properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2.1 Composition and chemical properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2.2 Physical properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.3 Processing and glass products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3.2 Tempering of glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3.3 Laminated glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.3.4 Insulating glass units (IGU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.3.5 Curved glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3.6 Decorative surface modification processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3.7 Functional coatings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.3.8 Switchable glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.3.9 Other recent glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.3.10 Relevant standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2 General Design Guidelines 27

2.1 The design process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.1.1 Particularities of glass structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.1.2 Risk analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
i
2.1.3 Post-breakage behaviour and robustness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.2 Actions on glass structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.2.1 Particularities of glass structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.2.2 Wind loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.2.3 Correlation of wind load and material temperature . . . . . . . . . 33
2.2.4 Seismic loads and movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.2.5 Impact loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.2.6 Bomb blast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.2.7 Internal pressure loads on insulated glass units . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.2.8 Thermal stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.2.9 Surface damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.3 Structural analysis and modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.3.1 Geometric non-linearity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.3.2 Finite element analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.3.3 Simplified approaches and aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.4 Requirements for application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.4.1 Vertical glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.4.2 Overhead glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.4.3 Accessible glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.4.4 Railings and balustrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3 Fracture Strength of Glass Elements 49

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.2 Stress corrosion and subcritical crack growth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.2.1 Relationship between crack velocity and stress intensity . . . . . . 50
3.2.2 Crack healing, crack growth threshold and hysteresis effect . . . . 52
3.2.3 Influences on the relationship between stress intensity and crack
growth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.3 Quasi-static fracture mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.3.1 Stress intensity and fracture toughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.3.2 Heat treated glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.3.3 Inert strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.3.4 Lifetime of a single flaw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.3.5 Lifetime of a glass element with a random surface flaw population 62
3.3.6 Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.4 Dynamic fracture mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.5 Laboratory testing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.5.1 Testing procedures for crack velocity parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.5.2 Testing procedures for strength data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.6 Quantitative considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.6.2 Geometry factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.6.3 Ambient strength and surface condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.6.4 Residual surface stress due to thermal tempering . . . . . . . . . . . 81
ii
4 Current Standards, Guidelines and Design Methods 85
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.2 Rules of thumb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.2.1 Allowable stress based design methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.2.2 Recommended span / thickness ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.3 European standards and design methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.3.1 DELR design method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.3.2 European draft standard prEN 13474 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.3.3 Shen’s design method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4.3.4 Siebert’s design method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.4 North American standards and design methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.4.1 Glass failure prediction model (GFPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.4.2 American National Standard ASTM E 1300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4.4.3 Canadian National Standard CAN/CGSB 12.20 . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
4.5 Analysis and comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4.6 Conclusion and Outlook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5 Design for Compressive In-plane Loads 107

5.1 In-plane loading and stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.2 Parameters having an influence on the buckling behaviour . . . . . . . 108
5.2.1 Glass thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.2.2 Initial deformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.2.3 Interlayer material behaviour in laminated glass . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.2.4 Boundary conditions and glass fixings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.3 Column buckling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.3.1 Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.3.2 Load carrying behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
5.3.3 Structural design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.3.4 Intermediate lateral supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.3.5 Influence of the load introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.4 Lateral torsional buckling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.4.1 Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.5 Plate buckling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5.5.1 Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6 Design Methods for Improved Accuracy and Flexibility 131

6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6.2 Surface condition modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6.2.1 Single surface flaw model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
iii
6.2.2 Random surface flaw population model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6.3 Recommendations for design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.4 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6.4.2 Determination of surface condition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.4.3 Obtaining strength data for design flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
6.5 Overview of mathematical relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
7 Glass Connections 141

7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
7.2 Mechanical fixings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
7.2.1 Linearly supported glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
7.2.2 Clamped and friction-grip fixings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
7.2.3 Bolted supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
7.3 Glued connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.3.2 Structural silicone sealant connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
7.3.3 Rigid adhesive connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
7.4 Recent developments and trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7.4.1 Increasing the post-breakage structural capacity with fabric embeds 162
7.4.2 Increasing the post-breakage structural capacity with new geome-
tries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7.4.3 High capacity adhesive connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
8 Special Topics 167

8.1 Design assisted by testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.1.2 Post-breakage structural capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8.1.3 Impact testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8.1.4 Testing connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8.2 Diagnostic interpretation of glass failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8.2.1 Qualitative analysis of failed architectural glass . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.2.2 Quantitative analysis of failed architectural glass . . . . . . . . . . . 172
A Notation, Abbreviations 175
B Glossary of Terms 181
C Statistical Fundamentals 192
References 197
Index 209
iv
Foreword
// todo //
The contents of this book have been greatly enriched by the contributions of several
glass experts who have provided input and advice on specific sections of this book. Their
names are listed below and are also shown alongside the headings of the sections they
contributed in.
Benjamin BEER Werner Sobek Engineering & Design, Stuttgart, Ger-

many
Lucio BLANDINI, Dr. Universität Stuttgart, Germany
Mick EEKHOUT, Prof. Dr. Octatube, Delft, The Netherlands
Christoph HAAS Ernst Basler + Partner AG, Zürich, Switzerland
Iris MANIATIS, Dr. Whitbybird Engineers, London, United Kingdom
Jürgen NEUGEBAUER, Dr. NEMA Glastechnik und Entwicklungs GmbH, St.
Marein/Mürztal, Austria
Jens SCHNEIDER, Dr. Goldschmidt Fischer und Partner, Heusenstamm, Ger-
many
Werner Sobek, Prof. Dr.-Ing. Werner Sobek Engineering & Design, Stuttgart, Ger-
many
Geralt SIEBERT, Prof. Dr. Universität der Bundeswehr München, Germany
Ronald VISSER Octatube, Delft, The Netherlands
Frank WELLERSHOFF, Dr. Permasteelisa Central Europe GmbH, Würzburg, Ger-
many
Berne, Basel and Nottingham / November 2007 Dr. Matthias Haldimann

Dr. Andreas Luible
Dr. Mauro Overend
v
Chapter
1
Material
This text has been compiled in collaboration with the following experts:
Dr. Jens Schneider
1.1 Production
1.1.1 Production of flat glass

Figure 1.1 gives an overview of the most common glass production processes, processing
methods and glass products. The main production steps are always similar: melting at
1600 − 1800 ◦ C, forming at 800 − 1600 ◦ C and cooling at 100 − 800 ◦ C.
Natural
Cullet
ingredients Melting
(20%)
(80%)
Casting, Extraction,
Production
Drawing Blowing Pressing Floating

rolling defibration
Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling
Grinding,
Grinding, Grinding, drilling, coating,
drilling, coating drilling, coating, printing,
Processing
Grinding,
polishing, polishing, bending, Hardening,
drilling, coating,
Printing colouring, acid colouring, acid laminating, compressing,
printing,
etching, etching, tempering, shaping
bending
melting, melting, sand blasting,
engraving engraving mirroring, acid
etching
Hollow glass Window and

Flat glass, cast Glass wool,
Products
Glass tubes, ware, drinking Glasses, facade glasses,

glass, glass textile glass
optical glass glasses, lamps, lenses, glass structural
blocks, cooking fibres, stone
fibre laboratory blocks, screens glass, mirrors,
fields wool
glasses furniture
Figure 1.1: Glass production processes and products overview.
1
2 CHAPTER 1. MATERIAL
Currently the float process is the most popular primary manufacturing process and
accounts for about 90% of today’s flat glass production worldwide. The major advantages
of this production process, introduced commercially by the Pilkington Brothers in 1959, is
its low cost, its wide availability, the superior optical quality of the glass and the large size
of panes that can be reliably produced. The mass production process together with many
post-processing and refinement technologies invented or improved over the last 50 years
(see Section 1.3) have made glass cheap enough to allow it to be used extensively in the
construction industry and arguably to become ‘the most important material in architecture’
(Le Corbusier). Within the last two decades, further progress in the field of refinement
technologies (tempering, laminating) aided by structural analysis methods (e. g. finite
element method) have enabled glass to be used for structural building elements.
Float glass is made in large manufacturing plants that operate continuously 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The production process is shown schematically in Figure 1.2. The
raw materials are melted in a furnace at temperatures of up to 1550 ◦ C. The molten glass
is then poured continuously at approximately 1000 ◦ C on to a shallow pool of molten
tin whose oxidation is prevented by an inert atmosphere consisting of hydrogen and
nitrogen. Tin is used because of the large temperature range of its liquid physical state
(232 ◦ C − 2270 ◦ C) and its high specific weight in comparison with glass. The glass floats
on the tin and spreads outwards forming a smooth flat surface at an equilibrium thickness
of 6 mm to 7 mm, which is gradually cooled and drawn on to rollers, before entering a
long oven, called a lehr, at around 600 ◦ C. The glass thickness can be controlled within
a range of 2 mm to 25 mm by adjusting the speed of the rollers. Reducing the speed
increases glass thickness and vice versa. The annealing lehr slowly cools the glass to
prevent residual stresses being induced within the glass. After annealing, the float glass is
inspected by automated machines to ensure that obvious visual defects and imperfections
are removed during cutting. The glass is cut to a typical size of 3.12 m × 6.00 m before
being stored. Any unwanted or broken glass is collected and fed back into the furnace
to reduce waste. At some float plants, so called on-line coatings (hard coatings) can be
applied to the hot glass surface during manufacture.
Figure 1.2: raw material

Production process for float
1550°C 1000°C 600°C 500°C 100°C
glass.
melter tin bath annealing lehr
As a consequence of this production process, the two faces of glass sheets are not
completely identical. On the tin side, some diffusion of tin atoms into the glass surface
occurs. This may have an influence on the behaviour of the surface when it is glued [239].
The mechanical strength of the tin side has been found to be marginally lower than that
of the air side. This is not attributed to the diffused tin atoms but to the contact of the
tin side with the transport rollers in the cooling area. These rollers cause some surface
flaws that reduce the strength [297]. This interpretation is supported by the fact that the
strength of intentionally damaged glass specimens has been found to be independent of
the glass side [182]. The tin side can be detected thanks to its bluish fluorescence when
exposed to ultraviolet radiation.
SED ‘Structural use of Glass’ DRAFT (November 11, 2007)

1.1. PRODUCTION 3
1.1.2 Production of cast glass and glass profiles

The cast process is an older production process for flat glass. The molten glass is poured
continuously between metal rollers to produce glass with a controlled thickness (Fig-
ure 1.3). The rollers may be engraved to give the glass a surface design or texture and
produce patterned glass. In a simple modification of the process, a steel wire mesh can
be sandwiched between two separate ribbons of glass to produce wired glass. Cast glass
(also called rolled glass) was first produced in 1870, wired glass in 1898 [223]. Annealing
is performed in a way similar to the float process.
raw material Figure 1.3:

1500°C
Production process for cast glass
and glass profiles.
melter cooling (annealing) area
Cast glass is usually not transparent, but translucent. Flat surfaces must be polished
to obtain a truly clear glass. Wired glass was formerly known as ‘safety glass’ and fire
protection glass as the wire mesh keeps most of the glass pieces together after breakage.
But the risk of injuries by sharp splinters remains high. Today, laminated glasses and
special fire protection glasses with a much better safety performance are preferred to
wired glass.
The production of glass profiles is currently limited to U-shaped profiles (or channel
shaped glass) and circular hollow sections (tubes). U-profiles are produced on the basis of
the cast process, using additional rollers to bend the edges of the glass. U-profiles can also
be formed using wired glass. While glass profiles have traditionally been mainly used as a
substitute of windows in industrial structures, they have been rediscovered for modern
façades in recent years.
Traditionally, glass tubes have mainly been produced for the chemical industry. The
most common production process is the Danner process, named after the American
engineer Edward Danner, who developed this process in 1912. In the Danner process, the
glass flow falls onto a rotating, slightly downward pointing mandrel. Air is blown down a
shaft through the middle of the mandrel, thus creating a hollow space in the glass as it is
drawn off the end of the mandrel by a tractor mechanism. The diameter and thickness of
the glass tubing can be controlled by regulating the strength of the air flow through the
mandrel and the speed of the drawing machine. The process allows for wall thicknesses
of up to 10 mm only. The more recent centrifuging process allows the production of large
sections and non-rotationally symmetrical items by spinning, but is expensive [343]. In
this process, molten glass is fed into a steel mould which rotates at the required speed. At
high speeds, the glass can assume almost cylindrical shapes. When the glass has cooled
sufficiently, rotation stops and the glass is removed.
1.1.3 Relevant standards

Table 1.4 gives an overview of important European and US standards for basic glass
products. For standards on processed glass products, see Table 1.26.
DRAFT (November 11, 2007) SED ‘Structural use of Glass’

Table 1.4: Important standards for basic glass products (shortened titles).
EN 572-1:2004 [146] Basic soda lime silicate glass products – Part 1: Definitions and general physical
and mechanical properties
EN 572-2:2004 [147] Basic soda lime silicate glass products – Part 2: Float glass
EN 572-3:2004 [148] Basic soda lime silicate glass products – Part 3: Polished wire glass
EN 572-4:2004 [149] Basic soda lime silicate glass products – Part 4: Drawn sheet glass
EN 572-5:2004 [150] Basic soda lime silicate glass products – Part 5: Patterned glass
EN 572-6:2004 [151] Basic soda lime silicate glass products – Part 6: Wired patterned glass
EN 572-7:2004 [152] Basic soda lime silicate glass products – Part 7: Wired or unwired channel
shaped glass
EN 572-8:2004 [153] Basic soda lime silicate glass products – Part 8: Supplied and final cut sizes
EN 572-9:2004 [154] Basic soda lime silicate glass products – Part 9: Evaluation of conformity /
Product standard
ASTM C 1036-2001 [10] Standard Specification for Flat Glass
EN 1748-1-1:2004 [127] Special basic products – Borosilicate glasses – Part 1-1: Definitions and general
physical and mechanical properties
EN 1748-1-2:2004 [128] Special basic products – Borosilicate glasses – Part 1-2: Evaluation of confor-
mity / Product standard
EN 1748-2-1:2004 [129] Special basic products – Glass ceramics – Part 2-1 Definitions and general
physical and mechanical properties
EN 1748-2-2:2004 [130] Special basic products – Glass ceramics – Part 2-2: Evaluation of conformity /
Product standard.
EN 1051-1:2003 [91] Glass blocks and glass paver units – Part 1: Definitions and description
EN 1051-2:2003 [92] Glass blocks and glass paver units – Part 2: Evaluation of conformity
EN 14178-1:2004 [119] Basic alkaline earth silicate glass products – Part 1: Float glass
EN 14178-2:2004 [120] Basic alkaline earth silicate glass products – Part 2: Evaluation of conformity /
Product standard
1.2 Material properties
1.2.1 Composition and chemical properties

A glass is an inorganic product of fusion which has been cooled to a rigid condition without
crystallization. The term therefore applies to all noncrystalline solids showing a glass
transition. Most of the glass used in construction is soda lime silica glass (SLSG). For some
special applications (e. g. fire protection glazing, heat resistant glazing), borosilicate glass
(BSG) is used. The latter offers a very high resistance to temperature changes as well
as a very high hydrolytic and acid resistance. Table 1.5 gives the chemical composition
of these two glass types according to current European standards. In contrast to most
other materials, glasses do not consist of a geometrically regular network of crystals,
but of an irregular network of silicon and oxygen atoms with alkaline parts in between
(Figure 1.6). The chemical composition has an important influence on the viscosity, the
melting temperature TS and the thermal expansion coefficient αT of glass. While the
melting temperature is about 1 710 ◦ C for pure silica oxide, it drops to 1 300 ◦ C − 1 600 ◦ C
through the addition of alkali. The thermal expansion coefficient is about 0.5 · 10−6 K−1
for pure silica glass and 9 · 10−6 K−1 for soda lime silica glass.
During the cooling of the liquid glass, its viscosity increases constantly until solid-
ification at about 1014 Pa s. The temperature at solidification is called transformation
temperature Tg and is about 530 ◦ C for SLSG. In contrast to crystalline materials, the
transition between liquid and solid state does not take place at one precise temperature
but over a certain temperature range (Figure 1.7, Table 1.8).

1.2. MATERIAL PROPERTIES 5
Table 1.5:
Soda lime Borosilicate
Chemical composition of
silica glass glass
soda lime silica glass and
Silica sand SiO2 69 – 74% 70 – 87% borosilicate glass; indicatory
Lime (calcium oxide) CaO 5 – 14% – values (mass %) according to
Soda Na2 O 10 – 16% 0 – 8% [146] and [127].
Boron-oxide B 2 O3 – 7 – 15%
Potassium oxide K2 O – 0 – 8%
Magnesia MgO 0 – 6%
Alumina Al2 O3 0 – 3% 0 – 8%
others 0 – 5% 0 – 8%
Figure 1.6:
Na
Schematic view of the irregular network of a soda
oxygen (O) lime silica glass.
silicone (Si)
Na sodium (Na) Ca
Ca calcium (Ca)
Ca
Figure 1.7:
Schematic comparison of the volume’s de-
melt
pendence on temperature for a glass and a
crystalline material.
Volume
undercooled
melt
glass
crystal
Temperature Tg TS
Table 1.8:
Viscosity State Temperature
Typical viscosities and
SLSG BSG
corresponding tempera-
(Pa s) (◦ C) (◦ C) tures for soda lime silica
105 working point 1040 1280 glass (SLSG) and borosil-
108.6 softening point 720 830 icate glass (BSG).
1014 annealing point 540 570
1014.3 transformation temperature Tg 530 560
1015.5 strain point 506 530

The glass is actually ‘freezing’ and no crystallization takes place. The ‘super-cooled
liquid’ nature of glass means that, unlike most solids, the electrons in glass molecules are
strictly confined to particular energy levels. Since this means that the molecules cannot
alternate between different states of excitement by absorbing radiation in the bandwidths
of visible and near infrared, they do not absorb or dissipate those forms of radiant energy.
Instead, the energy passes straight through the molecules as if they were not there.
However, due to unavoidable impurities in the soda-lime-silica mix, typical window glass
does absorb some radiation that might otherwise pass through (cf. Section 1.2.2). Small
amounts of iron oxides are responsible for the characteristic greenish colour of soda lime
silica glass (e. g. Fe2+ : blue-green; Fe3+ : yellow-brown). Extra clear glass, so-called low
iron glass, which has a reduced iron oxide content in order to lessen the green tinge, is
commercially available.
One of the most important properties of glass is its excellent chemical resistance to
many aggressive substances, which explains its popularity in the chemical industry and
makes glass one of the most durable materials in construction (Table 1.9).
Table 1.9:
Substance Resistance
Qualitative overview of
the chemical resistance Non oxidant and oxidant acids +
of soda lime silica glass. SiO2 -solving acids 0/–
Salt +
Water +
Non oxidant and oxidant alkalis 0/–
Aliphatic, aromatic and chlorinated hydrocarbons +
Alcohol +
Ester +
Ketones +
Oil and Fat +
+: resistant, 0: partly resistant, –: not resistant
1.2.2 Physical properties

The most important physical properties of soda lime silica and borosilicate glass are
summarized in Table 1.10. Optical properties depend on the glass thickness, the chemical
composition and the applied coatings. The most evident property is the very high trans-
parency within the visible range of wavelengths (λ ≈ 380 nm − 750 nm). Whilst the exact
profiles of the non-transmitted (i. e. absorbed and reflected) radiation spectrum varies
between different types of glass, they are usually in the wavelengths outside the visible
and near infrared band (Figure 1.11). Due to interaction with O2 -ions in the glass, a large
percentage of UV radiation is absorbed. Long-wave infrared radiation (λ > 5 000 nm) is
blocked because it is absorbed by Si-O-groups. This is at the origin of the greenhouse
effect: visual light passes through the glass and heats up the interior, while emitted
long-wave thermal radiation is unable to escape. With its refractive index of about 1.5,
the reflection of visual light by common soda lime silica glass is 4% per surface which
gives a total of 8% for a glass pane. This reduces transparency but can be avoided by
applying special coatings.

1.2. MATERIAL PROPERTIES 7
Table 1.10: Physical properties of soda lime silica glass (SLSG) and borosilicate glass (BSG)
[127, 146].
Soda lime Borosilicate

silica glass glass
Density ρ kg/m3 2 500 2 200 − 2 500
Knoop hardness HK0,1/20 GPa 6 4.5 − 6
Young’s modulus E MPa 70 000 60 000 − 70 000
Poisson’s ratio ν – 0.23∗ 0.2
Coefficient of thermal expansion† αT 10−6 K−1 9 Class 1: 3.1 − 4.0
Class 2: 4.1 − 5.0
Class 3: 5.1 − 6.0
Specific thermal capacity cp J kg−1 K−1 720 800
Thermal conductivity λ W m−1 K−1 1 1
Average refractive index within the n – 1.52§ 1.5
visible spectrum‡
Emissivity (corrected¶ ) " – 0.837 0.837
∗
EN 572-1:2004 [146] gives 0.2. In research and application, values between 0.22 and 0.24 are commonly
used.
†
Mean between 20 ◦ C and 300 ◦ C.
‡
The refractive index is a constant for a given glazing material, but depends on the wavelength. The variation
being small within the visible spectrum, a single value provides sufficient accuracy.
§
EN 572-1:2004 [146] gives a rounded value of 1.50.
¶
For detailed information on the determination of this value see EN 673:1997 [155].
100% Figure 1.11:

4 mm standard soda
lime silicate float glass Transmittance as a function of
4 mm low iron oxide wavelength for a typical soda
Ultraviolet (200 nm - 380 nm)
75% soda lime silicate float lime silica glass and a low-iron
Visible (380 nm - 780 nm)
glass with an anti- glass.

Transmittance
reflective coating
Infrared (> 780 nm)
50%
25%
0%
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
Wavelength (nm)
At room temperature, the dynamic viscosity of glass is about 1020 Pa s. (For comparison,
the viscosity of water is 10−1 Pa s and of honey, 105 Pa s.) Given this extremely high
viscosity at room temperature, it would take more than the earth’s age for ‘flow’ effects to
become visible to the naked eye. Although the notion of flowing glass has been repeatedly
propagated, ‘flow’ of the glass is therefore very unlikely to be the cause of window glasses
in old churches being thicker at the bottom than at the top. More realistic reasons are
the poor production quality of these old glasses and surface corrosion effects caused by
condensed water accumulating at the bottom of glass panes and leading to an increase in
volume.

Glass shows an almost perfectly elastic, isotropic behaviour and exhibits brittle fracture.
It does not yield plastically, which is why local stress concentrations are not reduced
through stress redistribution as it is the case for other construction materials like steel.
The theoretical tensile strength (based on molecular forces) of glass is exceptionally high
and may reach 32 GPa. It is, however, of no practical relevance for structural applications.
The actual tensile strength, the relevant property for engineering, is much lower. The
reason is that as with all brittle materials, the tensile strength of glass depends very much
on mechanical flaws on the surface. Such flaws are not necessarily visible to the naked eye.
While the surface of glass panes generally contains a large number of relatively severe
flaws, the surface of glass fibres contains less and less deep surface flaws. This explains
the much higher strength of glass fibres when compared to glass panes. Figure 1.12 gives
a rough overview of typical strength values for various flaw depths.
Figure 1.12:
Typical short-term strengths 3·104
as a function of the flaw depth molecular strength
104
(adapted from [269]). 104
3
5·10
Tensile strength (MPa)
glass fibres
103
103
250
2
10
flat glass after processing
50
micro-cracks
sub-micro-cracks
from micro-cracks visual flaws
in the material structure
processing
101
10–6 10–5 10–4 10–3 10–2 10–1
Effective flaw depth (mm)
A glass element fails as soon as the stress intensity due to tensile stress at the tip of one
flaw reaches its critical value. Flaws grow with time when loaded, the crack velocity being
a function of several parameters and extremely variable. This is discussed in detail in
Chapter 3. For the moment, it shall only be pointed out that the tensile strength of glass is
not a material constant, but it depends on many aspects, in particular on the condition of
the surface, the size of the glass element, the action history (intensity and duration), the
residual stress and the environmental conditions. The higher the load, the longer the load
duration and the deeper the initial surface flaw, the lower the effective tensile strength.
As surface flaws do not grow or fail when in compression, the compressive strength
of glass is much larger than the tensile strength. Nevertheless, the compressive strength
is irrelevant for virtually all structural applications. Tensile stresses develop because of
buckling in the case of stability problems and because of the Poisson’s ratio effect at load
introduction points. In both cases, an element’s tensile strength is exceeded long before a
critical compressive stress is reached.

1.3. PROCESSING AND GLASS PRODUCTS 9
1.3 Processing and glass products
1.3.1 Introduction
Once manufactured, flat glass is often processed further to produce glass products of the
shape, performance and appearance that are required to meet particular needs. This
secondary processing may include:
u cutting to remove edge damage and to produce the desired pane shape and size
u edge working (arrissing, grinding, polishing)
u hole drilling
u curving
u application of coatings
u thermal treatment to get heat strengthened or fully tempered glass (tempering)
u heat soaking to reduce the potential for nickel sulfide-induced breakages in use
u laminating for enhanced post-breakage performance, safety on impact, bullet resis-
tance, fire resistance or acoustic insulation

u surface modification processes for decoration, shading or privacy
u insulating glass unit assembly to reduce heat loss and, if suitably configured, to
reduce solar gain and enhance acoustic performance.

The term glass pane will hereinafter be used to refer to a single pane of sheet glass. A
glass pane may be used as a monolithic glass or it may be part of an insulating glass unit,
a laminated glass or some other glass assembly (Figure 1.13). Glass unit is a generic term
for any of these.
monolithic insulating glass laminated fire protection Figure 1.13:
glass unit (IGU) (safety) glass glass Basic types of glass units.
PVB-foil or resin
edge sealing
intumescent
interlayers
air or gas
The following sections give detailed information on the most important glass products
and processing methods used in construction.
1.3.2 Tempering of glass

Principle and main effects
For structural glass applications, tempering (heat treatment) is the most important pro-
cessing method. The idea is to create a favourable residual stress field featuring tensile
stresses in the core of the glass and compressive stresses on and near the surfaces. The
glass core does not contain flaws and therefore offers good resistance to tensile stress. The
unavoidable flaws on the glass surface can only grow if they are exposed to an effective
tensile stress. As long as the tensile surface stress due to actions is smaller than the
residual compressive stress, there is no such effective tensile stress and consequently no
crack growth (Figure 1.14).

ANNEALED GLASS TEMPERED GLASS

compressive residual stress
open flaws (surface damage) prevents opening of flaws
flawless material tensile stress

in the core
flaws are closed flaws are closed

by compressive stress by compressive stress
M M M M
flaws open and grow due to tensile stress residual stress prevents opening of flaws
high compressive strength, no failure
M M M M
breakage no tensile (flaw opening) stress on the surface
Figure 1.14: The principle of glass tempering (adapted from [297]).
The fracture pattern is a function of the energy stored in the glass, i. e. of the residual
stress and the stress due to loads. As an example, Figure 1.15 shows the fracture pattern
of specimens loaded in a coaxial double ring test setup. Fully tempered glass has the
highest residual stress level and usually breaks into small, relatively harmless dice of
about 1 cm2 . This fracture pattern is why fully tempered glass is also called ‘safety glass’.
The term may, however, be misleading. When falling from a height of several meters,
even small glass dice can cause serious injury. While fully tempered glass has the highest
structural capacity of all glass types, its post-failure performance is poor due to the tiny
fragments. Heat strengthened glass provides an interesting compromise between fairly
good structural performance and a sufficiently large fragmentation pattern for good
post-failure performance. Annealed glass is standard float glass without any tempering.
It normally breaks into large fragments. If, however, it is exposed to high (especially
in-plane) loads, the elastic energy stored in the material due to elastic deformation can
lead to a fracture pattern similar to heat treated glass.
Figure 1.15: Comparison of the fracture pattern: annealed glass (left), heat strengthened glass
(middle), fully tempered glass (right).

On an international level, no specific terminology for the different glass types has
to date gained universal acceptance. In the present document, the terms from ASTM E
1300-04 [21] are used (Table 1.16). They are widely used and tend, in the opinion of the
authors, to be less susceptible to misunderstandings than others.
Table 1.16: Glass type terminology overview.
Level of residual Terminology in Other frequently

surface compression the present document used terms
(almost) none annealed glass (ANG) float glass
medium heat strengthened glass (HSG) partly toughened glass;
high fully tempered glass (FTG) tempered glass;
(thermally) toughened glass
unspecified (HSG or FTG) heat treated glass
Fully tempered glass
During the thermal tempering process (Figure 1.17), float glass is heated to approximately
620 − 675 ◦ C (approximately 100 ◦ C above the transformation temperature) in a furnace
and then quenched (cooled rapidly) by jets of cold air. This has the effect of cooling and
solidifying first the surface and then the interior of the glass (Figure 1.18). Within the
first seconds, the cooling process results in tensile stresses on the surface and compressive
stresses in the interior. As the glass is viscous in this temperature range, the tensile stresses
can relax rapidly. If the starting temperature is too low, the relaxation cannot take place
and the tensile stresses may cause the glass to shatter in the furnace. As soon as the
temperature on the glass surface falls below Tg (approx. 525 ◦ C), the glass solidifies and
relaxation stops immediately. The temperature distribution is approximately parabolic,
the interior being hotter at this stage. Finally, the interior cools as well. As its thermal
shrinkage is resisted by the already solid surface, the cooling leads to the characteristic
residual stress field with the surfaces being in compression and the interior in tension.
To obtain an optimal result with maximum temper stress, the process has to be managed
so that the surface solidifies exactly at the moment when the maximum temperature
difference occurs and the initial tensile stress has relaxed. Borosilicate glass is difficult to
temper by high air pressure or even by quenching in liquids because of its low thermal
expansion coefficient.
Figure 1.17:
Tempering process.
cleaning heating quenching
glass Figure 1.18:

thickness Transient stress field during
compression tension the tempering process.
0 1 5 10 15 20 time (s)

The typical residual compressive surface stress varies between 80 MPa and 170 MPa
for fully tempered soda lime silica glass. In ASTM C 1048-04 [11], it is required to have
either a minimum surface compression of 69 MPa (10 000 psi) or an edge compression of
not less than 67 MPa (9 700 psi). In European standards, the fragmentation count, the
maximum fragment size and the minimum fracture strength in four point bending tests is
specified [97, 98].
Fairly accurate numerical modelling of the tempering process is possible [41, 60–
63, 235, 292]. This is especially helpful to estimate tempering stresses for more complex
geometries like boreholes. The most important parameters of the tempering process are
the glass thickness, the thermal expansion coefficient of the glass and the heat transfer
coefficient between glass and air. In particular the heat transfer coefficient is often difficult
to estimate. It depends on the quenching (jet geometry, roller influence, air pressure, air
temperature, etc.) and is therefore quite variable for different glass manufacturers.
Heat strengthened glass
Heat strengthened glass is produced using the same process as for fully tempered glass,
but with a lower cooling rate. The residual stress and therefore the tensile strength is
lower. The fracture pattern of heat strengthened glass is similar to annealed glass, with
much bigger fragments than for fully tempered glass. Used in laminated glass elements,
this large fracture pattern results in a significant remaining load-bearing capacity after
failure.
As the stress gradient depends on the glass thickness and the glass must be cooled
down slowly, thick glasses (> 12 mm) cannot be heat strengthened using the normal
tempering process.
The typical residual compressive surface stress varies between 40 MPa and 80 MPa for
heat strengthened glass. ASTM C 1048-04 [11] requires that heat strengthened glass has a
residual compressive surface stress between 24 MPa (3 500 psi) and 52 MPa (7 500 psi). In
European standards, the fragmentation count and the maximum fragment size is specified
[131, 132].
Chemical tempering
Chemical tempering is an alternative tempering process that does not involve thermic
effects and produces a different residual stress profile. Cutting or drilling remains possible,
even after tempering. In structural applications, chemical tempering is extremely rare. It
is used for special geometries where usual tempering processes cannot be applied, e. g.
glasses with narrow bending angles. The process is based on the exchange of sodium
ions in the glass surface by potassium ions, which are about 30% bigger. Only a very thin
zone at the glass surface is affected (Figure 1.19). The actual depth of the compression
zone is time-dependent (about 20 µm in 24 h) [343]. If surface flaws are deeper than
the compression zone, their tip is in the zone of tensile stress and subcritical crack
growth occurs without external load. This phenomenon, known as self-fatigue, can cause
spontaneous failure, even of glass elements that have never been exposed to external
loads. For a fracture mechanics investigation, see [26]. An improved chemical tempering
process is currently being developed, see e. g. [2, 299, 300]. While the scatter of the
strength can be reduced, the problem of self fatigue persists and the process is expensive.

compressive stress tensile stress Figure 1.19:

Comparison of the stress profiles obtained by
stress profile
thickness
from thermal thermal and chemical tempering.
stress profile
glass
from chemical tempering

tempering
Tolerances and practical aspects
An attempt to work heat treated glass usually causes it to shatter immediately. Any cutting,
drilling or grinding must therefore be carried out before the glass is tempered.
The heating of the glass to more than the transformation temperature and the fixing in
the furnace causes some deformation. It depends on the furnace and the glass thickness,
but generally increases with increasing aspect ratio of a glass element. This can limit the
feasible slenderness of glass beams. Furthermore, geometric tolerances are considerably
higher than those of annealed glass. In particular, edges and holes in laminated glass
elements made of heat treated glass are generally not flush. This cannot be corrected by
grinding (see above) and must therefore be accounted for by well thought-out details and
connections. Finally, the deformation often reduces the optical quality of heat treated
glass.
Specialized glass processing firms are able to temper bent glasses, but various limita-
tions on radii and dimensions may apply.
Nickel sulfide-induced spontaneous failure
Fully tempered glass elements have a small but not negligible risk of breaking sponta-
neously within a few years of production. At the origin of such spontaneous failures are
nickel sulfide (NiS) inclusions (Figure 1.20) that cannot be avoided completely during
production. Under the influence of temperature, such NiS particles can increase in volume
by about 4% due to a phase change. This expansion in combination with the high tensile
stresses in the glass core due to thermal tempering can cause spontaneous failure.
Figure 1.20:
Microscopic image of a nickel-sulfide inclusion in
fully tempered glass (courtesy of MPA Darmstadt,
Germany).

The risk of spontaneous failure due to inclusions can be significantly reduced, but
not totally eliminated1 , by the heat-soak test. This test consists in slowly heating up
the glass and maintaining a certain temperature for several hours. This accelerates the
phase change, and glass elements containing dangerous inclusions fail during the test.
Depending on the location, client and glass processor involved, the heat-soak test is
performed according to DIN 18516-4:1990 [79], EN 14179-1:2005 [121] or the German
building regulation BRL-A 2005 [45]. All three regulations specify a holding temperature
of 290 ± 10 ◦ C. The duration of the holding period is 8 h according to DIN 18516-4:1990
[79], 4 h according to BRL-A 2005 [45] and 2 h according to EN 14179-1:2005 [121].
1.3.3 Laminated glass

Laminated glass consists of two or more panes of glass bonded together by some trans-
parent plastic interlayer. The glass panes may be equal or unequal in thickness and may
be the same or different in heat treatment. The most common lamination process is
autoclaving at approx. 140 ◦ C. The heat and the pressure of up to 14 bar ensure that there
are no air inclusions between the glass and the interlayer.
Laminated glass is of major interest in structural applications. Even though tempering
reduces the time dependence of the strength and improves the structural capacity of glass,
it is still a brittle material. Lamination of a transparent plastic film between two or more
flat glass panes enables a significant improvement of the post breakage behaviour: after
breakage, the glass fragments adhere to the film so that a certain remaining structural
capacity is obtained as the glass fragments ‘arch’ or lock in place. This capacity depends on
the fragmentation of the glass and increases with increasing fragment size (Figure 1.21).
Therefore, laminated glass elements achieve a particularly high remaining structural
capacity when made from annealed or heat strengthened glass that breaks into large
fragments. The post-breakage behaviour furthermore depends on the interlayer material.
Figure 1.21:
Post breakage behaviour of
annealed glass
better structural performance
laminated glass made of dif- (ANG)

and impact resistance
ferent glass types (adapted

better remaining structural
from [297]).
capacity after breakage
heat strengthened glass

(HSG)
fully tempered glass

(FTG)
The most common interlayer material is polyvinyl butyral (PVB). Because PVB blocks
UV radiation almost completely, PVB foils are sometimes also called UV-protection-foils.
The nominal thickness of a single PVB foil is 0.38 mm. Normally, two (0.76 mm) or four
1
According to EN 14179-1:2005 [121], there is at most one failure in 400 t of heat soaked glass.

(1.52 mm) foils form one PVB interlayer. For heat treated or curved glasses, up to six may
be appropriate to compensate for the unevenness of the glass panels due to tempering (see
Section 1.3.2). PVB is a viscoelastic material, i. e. its physical properties depend strongly
on the temperature and the load duration. At room temperature, PVB is comparatively
soft with an elongation at breakage of more than 200%. At temperatures well below 0 ◦ C
and for short loading times, PVB is in general able to transfer the full shear stress from
one pane of glass to another. For higher temperatures and long loading times, the shear
transfer is greatly reduced.
Table 1.22 gives typical properties of PVB. For more detailed information, the reader
should refer to documentation from PVB manufacturers.
Table 1.22:
Density ρ kg/m3 1 070
Typical material properties of
Shear modulus G GPa 0−4
PVB.
Poisson’s ratio ν – ≈ 0.50
Coefficient of thermal expansion aT K−1 80 · 10−6
Tensile strength ft MPa ≥ 20
Elongation at failure "t % ≥ 300
Alternative transparent interlayer materials have recently been developed with the
aim of achieving higher stiffness, temperature resistance, tensile strength or resistance to
tearing. A well known example is DuPont’s SentryGlass® Plus [39, 89, 271]. However
the high stiffness can make the lamination of such interlayers difficult.
In addition to the transparent interlayers, coloured or printed ones are also available.
Other materials, i. e. transparent ’cold poured’ resins with 1 mm to 4 mm layer thickness,
are sometimes used to achieve special properties like sound insulation or to include
functional components like solar cells or light emitting diodes (LEDs).
Fire protection glass is laminated glass with one or more special transparent intumes-
cent interlayer(s). When exposed to fire, the pane facing the flames fractures but remains
in place and the interlayers foam up to form an opaque insulating shield that blocks the
heat of the blaze.
Bullet-resistant and blast-resistant glasses are laminated glasses using various impact
energy absorbing interlayers. In some applications one or more of the sandwiched glass
panes may be replaced by a polycarbonate pane.
1.3.4 Insulating glass units (IGU)

An insulating glass unit (IGU) is a multi-glass combination consisting of two or more panes
enclosing a hermetically-sealed air space (Figure 1.23). The most important function of
IGUs is to reduce thermal losses. Besides the advantage of energy savings, this can also
improve transparency by reducing condensation on the warm air side. The hermetically-
sealed space is filled with dehydrated air or gas. The panes are connected by a spacer, using
sealants to reduce water vapour penetration. The whole unit is hermetically assembled by
a secondary edge seal (polysulfidpolymer or silicone) which gives structural robustness
to the insulating glass. The spacer contains a desiccant which absorbs humidity from
within the air space. The insulating glass unit (IGU) is made manually or by automated
machinery.

In combination with special coatings (see Section 1.3.7), modern IGUs achieve overall
heat transfer coefficients (U-values) of 1.1 W/m2 K for double glazed units and 0.7 W/m2 K
for triple glazed units. All types of annealed, heat strengthened or fully tempered
monolithic or laminated glasses can be used in IGUs. The space between the glasses may
contain interior muntins.
Figure 1.23:
Double-glazed insulating
glass unit, principle build- 100
% glass pane
up. trans
miss
absorbtion
ion
ction
refle
total energy cavity
transmission spacer
desiccant
primary seal
outside inside
secondary seal
1.3.5 Curved glass

Curved glass, formerly known as ‘bent glass’, is glass which has been heated past its
softening point and formed into a curved shape, usually by draping the softened glass
over or into a mould. A mold release agent prevents direct contact between the mold and
the glass. While curved glass is commonly used for automotive glazing, it is not often
found in architectural applications. The main reasons are the high manufacturing costs
and the tolerance related difficulties encountered with the production of curved insulating
or laminated glass units.
Glass may be curved along one or both axes. Uniaxial curving is generally achieved by
sag bending which simply allows the heated glass take on the form of the mold by its own
weight. For doubly curved shapes, the glass must be pressed into the mould. Using special
tempering equipment with individually adjustable rollers, curved glass can be thermally
tempered as long as the radius is not too small and if the bending angle does not exceed
90 degrees. If small radii or larger bending angles are required, chemical tempering may
be an alternative.
A geometric method proposed by Schober transforms the curved surfaces into a planar
quadrangular mesh thus avoiding the need for expensive curved glass in the construction
of complex free-form shells. The method is based on the translation of one spacial curve
against another [294].
1.3.6 Decorative surface modification processes

The following are the most common modification processes used to obtain decorative
effects:
u Acid etching is a process where the glass surface is treated with hydrofluoric acid.
Acid-etched glass has a distinctive, uniformly smooth and satin-like appearance.

Sandblasting produces a similar effect, but with a rougher texture. Glass treated
with one of these processes, also referred to as frosted glass, is translucent, obscuring
the view while allowing light transmission. Acid etched and sand blasted patterns
are very durable and not subject to degradation due to weathering.

u To produce enamelled or screen printed glass, a ceramic frit colour, consisting of glass
powder (70–95%) and pigments (5–30%), is sprayed onto the cooled annealed glass
and then burned into the surface during the tempering process. The surface may be
covered totally or partially. Any pattern or image can be obtained by spraying the
colour through a screen. Enamel coatings have a thickness of about 10 µm – 100 µm
and are usually applied to the gas side of float glass. The colour does not prevent
the production of laminated glass using PVB or resin, but it reduces the mean value
of the bending strength by about 25–40%. The scatter of the strength is reduced,
too. Dark coatings are somewhat problematic because they may trigger thermal
breakage. Ceramic coatings should not be applied to surfaces exposed to weathering
in order to degradation.
u Ink-jet printing on glass surfaces is possible today, using special colours. No data
for the fastness to light is available yet, however the durability is expected to be
inferior to that of enamelled glass
u Body-tinted glass is produced by adding metal oxides (iron oxide, cobalt oxide,
titanium oxide and others) to the constituent materials during the production
of float glass. These metal oxides produce a consistent colour throughout the
glass thickness. Various bluish, greenish, brownish, greyish and reddish tones
are available. As the colour is very sensitive even to little changes of the glass
composition, an exact colour match between different production lots is difficult to
obtain.
u Patterned glass is glass with an embossed pattern on one or both surfaces. It is
mostly produced using the cast process (see Section 1.1.2) by means of patterned
rollers. The strength of patterned glass is usually much lower compared to flat glass.
u Abrasion is a method of shallow, decoration grinding using a diamond wheel.
Figure 1.24: Examples of decorative surface modification processes: patterned glass (left), ceramic
frit (middle), acid etched pattern (right).

1.3.7 Functional coatings

Coating processes
Hard coatings Hard coatings are commonly applied using a chemical vapour deposition
process. In this process, also known as pyrolytic coating, a gaseous chemical mixture
is brought in contact with the hot glass substrate (600–650 ◦ C) and a pyrolytic reaction
occurs at the surface of the substrate leading to the deposition of a coating which bonds
to the glass. Because of the high temperatures required, the coating process is integrated
in the float process or the annealing lehr, which is why it is also called on-line coating. A
variety of materials ranging from pure metals and oxides to mixed oxide/nitrides can be
commercially deposited. An alternative method of applying hard coatings is dip coating.
In this process, the glass is dipped into the coating solution and then heated up to 650 ◦ C.
Pyrolytic coatings are very hard. They are scratch resistant, temperable and bendable
and can even be applied to exterior faces of glass lites. On the other hand, they are not
as flexible as off-line coatings. Only a maximum number of two layers can be applied at
once. An example of a popular pyrolytic coating is reflective glass [174, 273].
Soft coatings Soft coatings can be applied to the glass surface by various processes such
as dip coating, chemical or physical vapour deposition. The predominant soft coating
technique is Magnetron sputtering in which sputtering is performed in a vacuum process
by applying a high voltage across a low-pressure gas (usually argon) to create a plasma
of electrons and gas ions in a high-energy state. During sputtering, energized plasma
ions strike a target, composed of the desired coating material, and cause atoms from that
target to be ejected with enough energy to travel to, and bond with, the glass surface. By
the use of a planar magnetron, the plasma is confined to the region closest to the target
plate, which vastly improves the deposition rate. The coating is carried out in several
vacuum chambers with different targets.
Magnetron sputtering allows for the production of high performance, multi-layer
coatings using different materials. The process is very precise, flexible and gives very
constant coating quality. It makes it even possible to exactly reproduce some specific
coating after many years.
The disadvantage of soft coatings is their susceptibility to aggressive environments (e. g.
polluted air) and mechanical damage. This makes it necessary to protect soft coatings
with a protective layer or assemble them on the cavity oriented surfaces of double-glazed
units. A popular application of soft coatings is in the manufacture of low-emissivity glass.
[8, 174, 273]
Common coatings
Solar radiation that reaches the earth’s surface consists of about 3% short-wave ultraviolet
(UV) radiation, 42% visible light (wavelengths from about 380 nm to 780 nm) and 55%
long-wave infrared radiation (IR). Most energy is contained in the invisible infrared
radiation. The strategy for solar protection is, therefore, to block as much infrared
radiation as possible without reducing the transmittance in the visible spectrum. Solar
control coatings achieve this by a combination of absorbtion and reflection.
Low-emissivity (low-e) coatings are sputtered or pyrolytic, transparent metallic or
metallic oxidic coatings that safe energy and increase comfort inside a building by reducing

heat loss towards the environment. This heat loss affects both energy consumption
and the comfort levels of people working close to glazed surfaces. Low-e coatings are
predominantly transparent for visible light, but reflective in the long-wave infrared range
and able to reduce the emissivity of glass (see Section 1.2.2) from 0.84 to about 0.05.
They are soft coatings and are normally used in IGU’s (cf. Section 1.3.4) and applied to
the cavity surface of the innermost glass pane.
There is a vast choice of coatings for various purposes available on the market.
Combining several properties, e. g. low-e and solar control, within a single coating becomes
increasingly popular. Manufacturers are always eager to provide up-to-date information.
1.3.8 Switchable glazing

The extensive use of large area glazing particularly in façades poses major challenges
in terms of user comfort and the conservation of energy in buildings. This challenge is
expected to increase further as building regulations become more stringent in terms of
energy conservation in an attempt to reduce carbon emissions.
Glazed façades are often required to meet transient and often conflicting performance
requirements such as the need to mitigate energy loss, unwanted energy gain and visual
discomfort from glare as well as to provide the desirable levels of visual transparency.
One approach is to provide a smart and truly responsive façade where the properties
of the glass change to actively control solar gain, daylight and glare. The emerging
technologies of ‘smart glass’ or ‘chromogenic switchable glazing’ offer variable thermal
and light transmittance characteristics by responding dynamically to external references
such as temperature and light. Such products have the potential to control the amount of
visible and infrared radiation that enters the building and thus optimize energy efficiency
and comfort levels for any given external climatic condition.
The operation of chromogenic switchable glazing is based on the incorporation of
materials or devices that allow the optical properties of the glass to change in function
of an external stimulus. A change in the reflectance, absorptance or scattering manifests
itself in a colour-change. It can affect only a part or the whole range of radiation in the
solar spectrum, and it can occur passively or actively.
Passive or ‘self-adjusting’ chromogenics are environmentally driven systems that di-
rectly respond to changes in ambient light conditions or temperature and include the
photochromic, thermochromic and thermotropic materials. Active or ‘externally activated’
systems require an external electrical current to drive the change in properties and include
the electrochromic, liquid crystal, suspended particle and gasochromic devices. The fun-
damental difference between these two types of chromogenic glazing is that self-adjusting
systems are not linked to any external devices whereas externally activated systems are
regulated through a transducer that may be controlled by the user or by a set of sensors
that is linked to the building management system. More detailed information on the range
of chromogenic glazing available is found in [6, 70, 263, 341], however a brief overview
of the specific systems is provided below.
Self-adjusting systems
Photochromic glazing Photochromic glass reduces light transmittance by darkening

when exposed to ultraviolet radiation. This darkening phenomenon derives from the

chemical composition of the glass itself that includes photosensitive silver halide crystals.
The energy delivered by wavelengths between 300 and 400 nm break down the crystals,
therefore causing increased absorption of the visible wavelengths and thus darkening of
the glass. This process is reversed when the source of ultraviolet radiation is removed
[340]. Photochromic glass is durable and has a long service life. The visible radiation
transmission ranges from about 85% to about 25% in the two states, however, the
complexity of the manufacturing process, the high cost of its components and the rather
slow reaction times have limited its production to small non-architectural quantities and
sizes (e. g. photochromic eyeglasses).
Thermochromic glazing Thermochromic glass alters its optical properties in response

to changes in temperature. This is caused by a thin layer of thermochromic material that
is applied on the glass surface. When the temperature of the thermochromic material rises
to a set temperature, a reversible chemical reaction (phase transformation) is induced that
causes a change in the material’s transmission properties. Transition metal oxides such
as vanadium dioxide (VO2 ), for example, change from a semiconductor state with low
absorption in the infrared range to a metallic state exhibiting infrared reflectivity when
they absorb a certain amount of heat energy [70]. In the metallic state the thermochromic
layer operates as a low emissivity coating. Thermochromic glass can thus control both
transmittance and infrared emissivity of a glazed façade.
Issues that still need to be addressed before the commercialization of thermochromic
glass is made possible include durability, low light transmittance, setting of the transition
temperature and the yellow colouration of the darkened state.
Thermotropic glazing Thermotropic materials respond to changes in temperature by

altering their optical properties, similar to thermochromics. However, a difference in
the internal mechanism of the property change gives thermotropics the potential to go
through a radical transformation from a clear, light-transmitting semiconductor state to
an opaque, light-scattering insulator state. When thermotropic materials are heated, both
their reflective properties and their thermal conductivity are altered. Thermotropics are
the only chromogenic materials to date that are able to control heat transfer not only
through radiation but also through conduction [6]. However, they do so at the expense of
transparency and view. The principle of the operation of thermotropic materials is the
combination of at least two materials with different refractive indices such as water and
a polymer (hydrogel), or two different polymers (polymer blend). In its original state,
the mixture is homogeneous. As the temperature rises, the molecular structure of the
polymers changes from stretched chains to clumps that diffuse light, such that most solar
radiation is reflected [279]. For a typical thermotropic layer, the solar energy transmission
ranges from 80%–90% to between 10% and 50%, depending on the composition of the
specific material. Light transmission values follow a similar range.
Several technical problems with hydrogels, such as inhomogeneity during switching,
UV stability, cycle lifetime and the requirement for tight edge seals, have complicated
the development of thermotropic glazing units. A low-E glazing unit that incorporates
a thermotropic film and a layer of transparent insulation is at present available, but the
manufacturer warns that visual changes or changes with regards to switching behaviour
may occur over its lifetime.

Externally activated systems
Liquid crystal glazing Liquid crystal (LC) technology is already used in buildings and
there are several liquid crystal glass products available. LC glazing is a laminated glass
comprising two sheets of glass and a liquid crystal film. The LC film consists of two outer
layers of polyester that are coated with a transparent conductor and of a polymer matrix
that contains the liquid crystals. When no voltage is applied, the liquid crystal molecule
chains are randomly scattered and the LC system is translucent opal white. When a
voltage is applied, the molecules align with the lines of the electric field and the film
appears almost transparent. Open circuit memory is not possible, i. e. the device remains
transparent only for as long as the electric field is maintained.
Large LC panels of up to 1000 mm by 3000 mm have already been produced. Switching
between the clear and diffuse state is literally instantaneous. However, LC panels cannot
control the light and heat flow through the glazing. They do not actually exhibit variable
transmission characteristics since they only affect the way light is transferred and not the
quantity of radiation that is allowed to pass through. Furthermore their high production
cost, their instability when exposed to ultraviolet radiation and the obstruction of view
in the obscure state explain why their use in architecture is usually restricted to internal
applications, such as privacy partitions.
Suspended particle glazing Suspended particle devices (SPDs) are similar in character
to liquid crystal devices. They incorporate an active layer that contains needle-shaped
dipole particles that are uniformly distributed in an organic fluid or film. The active layer is
laminated or filled between two transparent conductors on polyester. In the ‘off’ condition,
the particles are randomly orientated and absorb a large part of incident radiation. When
a voltage is applied, the particles align with the electric field and radiation transmission is
increased. The device changes from a coloured state, when it appears dark blue, to a clear
state; the degree of the tint can be varied depending on how much current is applied and
the change is almost instant. An SPD does not scatter light when it is in the darkened state
and thus view is not obstructed at any stage of colouration. Suspended particle panels
up to 1000 mm by 2800 mm for architectural applications are at present commercially
available. Light transmission values for such panels range from about 0.5–12% in the dark
state to 22–57% in the clear state. Shading coefficient range from 47 –57% to 64–80%
respectively. This means that although visible radiation can be remarkably reduced by
darkening the device, the shading coefficient values remain relatively high. The heat gains
thus remain considerable even in the dark state. Therefore, the light to heat gain ratio
cannot be considered favourable for solar radiation control.
Electrochromic glazing Electrochromic glazing is the most popular and most complex
all switching glazing technologies. Various electrochromic devices have so far been devel-
oped; the ones intended for architectural applications incorporate solid electrochromic
films and they consist of a thin multilayer assembly that is typically sandwiched between
two panes of glass. They rely on the colouration of solid anodic or cathodic electrochromic
films to modulate their optical properties. Anodic films colour upon electrochemical
oxidation whereas cathodic films rely on electrochemical reduction for colouration. These
reactions involve the transfer of ions into and out of the electrochromic films and thus,
electrochromic devices require a component where ions can be stored when removed

from the electrochromic film. This requirement is usually met either by incorporating an
ion storage layer or by coupling an anodic and a cathodic electrochromic film.
The most widely used electrochromic cathodic film consists of tungsten oxide because
it has the greatest variation between the clear and the dark state. Electrochromic devices
remain specular at all stages of colouration and blue colour is the most common result
of the darkening process. The visible radiation transmission of typical electrochromic
devices ranges from 70–50% in the clear state to 25%–1% in the fully coloured state. The
shading coefficient ranges from 67% – 60% to 30% – 1%. As the electrochromic device
colours, transmission is kept at higher levels in the visible part of the solar spectrum than
in the infrared part, resulting in a high light to heat gain ratio. The voltage required
for the operation is small and it only needs to be applied during switching [233]. The
switching times depend on the type of the device and the size of the window; typically
full colouration is achieved in 5 to 10 minutes.
Common problems faced in the quest for a reliable, large-scale electrochromic device
are long term degradation, sensitivity to environmental conditions and the relatively long
switching times which rise with increasing device size. These issues have been addressed
and partially solved and at present there are a few electrochromic glazing products for
architectural applications available in the market.
Gasochromic glazing Gasochromic systems produce a similar effect to electrochromic

systems. Their operation is based on the principle that thin films of tungsten oxide colour
in the presence of hydrogen gas. Gasochromic devices consist of two panes of glass, which
are coated with a layer of tungsten oxide a catalyst respectively. When diluted hydrogen
is introduced in the cavity between the two glass panes, the tungsten oxide reacts with
hydrogen and colours. To return to its original transparent state, the cavity is purged with
another gas, usually oxygen. The desired mix of hydrogen and oxygen is diffused in the
cavity by a pump connected to a small electrolysis unit that decomposes water. The gas
circulates in a closed cycle and is reconstituted as water, in the presence of a catalyst,
when the pump is switched off [172]. Visible transmittance of 75% to 18% and total solar
energy transmission of 74% to 14% have been obtained [233].
The main advantages of gasochromic devices are their simple coating structure, the
high transmission levels in the clear state and the short switching times. The main
technical difficulties in the construction lie on the gas injection system, the plumbing of
the gas tubes and the avoidance of water build-up when hydrogen atoms are added [70].
Gasochromic glazing is not commercially available at the moment.
Most of the chromogenic glazing systems described above are currently being re-
searched and developed. It is therefore difficult to determine the best system at this stage.
Table 1.25 provides a brief overview of the main advantages and disadvantages of these
systems. An important distinguishing factor is that between self-adjusting (passive) and
externally activated (active) systems. Although the idea of incorporating a self-adjustable
light filter in glazed façades may appear attractive, the lack of external control may
compromise the performance of environmentally driven systems in two main ways. Firstly,
in order to achieve optimum performance of a glazed façade, the proportion of light, heat
and view provided by it must be able to change and adapt to varying and often conflicting
requirements. The optimization of only one of these three factors is unlikely to result
in the ideal response for the other two factors throughout the year. Secondly, at least a

certain degree of local user control on the system is preferred as this has a significant
effect on comfort which is in turn the major influence on productivity and the economics
of commercial buildings.
Table 1.25: Comparison of switchable glazing types.
Type Advantages Disadvantages

Self adjusting systems
Photochromic Long life High cost, small panels
Thermochromic Low emissivity Poor durability, low light transmit-
tance, yellowish colour
Thermotropic Excellent thermal performance Degrades with on exposure to
ultra violet radiation
Externally activated systems
Liquid Crystal Established technology Very poor thermal performance
Suspended Particle Established technology High heat to light transmittance
Electrochromic High light to heat transmittance, Slow switching times for large
relatively low cost panels, insufficient durability
Gasochromic Very rapid switching times Complex due to gas injection
1.3.9 Other recent glasses

Self cleaning glass
Self cleaning glass is made by applying a microscopically-thin (approx. 40 nm thick)

titanium oxide based coating onto float glass by chemical vapour deposition (see Sec-
tion 1.3.7).
The titanium oxide based coating has both semiconductor and hydrophilic properties.
It therefore performs two functions: firstly, it absorbs UV light to promote oxidation and
reduction of organic materials and to reduce the adherence of inorganic dirt; secondly,
it reduces the contact angle of water with glass and thus induces the raindrops to be
dispersed over a wide surface, rather than forming droplets, and run off in a ‘sheet’ to
wash the loosened dirt away.
For further details of the physical and chemical characteristics of self-cleaning glass,
readers may refer to [289].
Embedded LEDs
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) may be embedded into a laminated glass unit by using a
2 mm thick cold poured interlayer. The power supply to the LEDs is provided by a standard
low voltage supply via a virtually invisible conductor plate on the internal surface of one
of the glass plates. Standard float glass sizes may be used and the LEDs may also provide
special effects such as flashing indicators and running lights.

Dichroic glass
Dichroic glass changes colour in different environments. Colours vary depending on the
intensity of natural light, the angle of view and the background lighting conditions. This
effect is achieved by the application of selective metal oxide coatings in a thickness of less
than 100 nm to a range of base glasses. Light is reflected from the junction of these layers
to different intensities, the reflection increasing as the refractive indices of the layers are
further apart. By selecting the number, sequence, thickness and optical properties of the
layers, certain wavelengths reflect strongly and others are transmitted through the glass.
Photovoltaic glass (PV)
The direct conversion of light into electricity known as the photovoltaic effect was discov-
ered in 1839 by Edmund Becquerel. However the real breakthrough in solar research did
not come until the 1960’s with the development of solar sails used in space travel. The
first mass produced applications began with small solar cells used in solar-powered pocket
calculators. The recent emphasis on renewable energy sources and the simultaneous
industrial production of efficient PVs have provided a further boost for building integrated
PVs. Several governments provide subsidies for the use of PVs and typical pay back
periods are currently between 3 and 7 years.
Photovoltaic glass consists of laminated glass with integrated solar cells to convert
solar energy into electricity. The solar cells are embedded between two glass panes by
means of an EVA (ethylene vinyl acetate copolymer) interlayer. The EVA interlayer is
preferred to the traditional PVB used in standard laminated glass (cf. Section 1.3.3) as the
former does not require autoclaving, which would damage the solar cells. Each individual
cell has two electrical connections, which are linked to other cells in the module, to form
a system which generates a direct electrical current.
There are a wide range of solar cells available, though the bulk of the material in use
today is semi-conductor grade silicon. The PVs embedded in glass are generally known
as thick crystalline silicone cells which are between 200 and 300 microns thick. Current
commercial modules achieve around 15% efficiency whereas research cells are at 24%
efficiency.
Various cell sizes are produced by different manufacturers and spacing between the
cells can be varied in each direction, thus allowing a degree of transparency through the
PV panel. The front pane of glass is generally a heat strengthened low iron glass. The
inner pane of glass can be of any type and may include a low-e coating to improve thermal
performance. PV panels may form part of insulating glass units (cf. Section 1.3.4) and
panel sizes in excess of 3000 mm × 2000 mm are available.
1.3.10 Relevant standards

Table 1.4 gives an overview of important standards for processed glass products. For
standards on basic glass products, see Table 1.26.

Table 1.26: Important standards for processed glass products (shortened titles).
EN 1863-1:2000 [131] Heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass – Part 1: Definition and description
EN 1863-2:2004 [132] Heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass – Part 2: Evaluation of conformity /
Product standard
EN 12150-1:2000 [97] Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass – Part 1: Definition and
description
EN 12150-2:2004 [98] Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass – Part 2: Evaluation of
conformity / Product standard
EN 14179-1:2005 [121] Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass – Part 1: Defi-
nition and description
EN 14179-2:2005 [122] Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass – Part 2: Evalu-
ation of conformity / Product standard
EN 13024-1:2002 [113] Thermally toughened borosilicate safety glass – Part 1: Definition and descrip-
tion
EN 13024-2:2004 [114] Thermally toughened borosilicate safety glass – Part 2: Evaluation of conformity
/ Product standard
EN 14321-1:2005 [123] Thermally toughened alkaline earth silicate safety glass – Part 1: Definition and
description
EN 14321-2:2005 [124] Thermally toughened alkaline earth silicate safety glass – Part 2: Evaluation of
conformity / Product standard
EN 12337-1:2000 [99] Chemically strengthened soda lime silicate glass – Part 1: Definition and de-
scription
EN 12337-2:2004 [100] Chemically strengthened soda lime silicate glass – Part 2: Evaluation of confor-
mity / Product standard
EN 1096-1:1998 [93] Coated glass – Part 1: Definitions and classification
EN 1096-2:2001 [94] Coated glass – Part 2: Requirements and test methods for class A, B and S
coatings
EN 1096-3:2001 [95] Coated glass – Part 3: Requirements and test methods for class C and D coatings
EN 1096-4:2004 [96] Coated glass – Part 4: Evaluation of conformity / Product standard
ISO 12543-1:1998 [203] Laminated glass and laminated safety glass – Part 1: Definitions and description
of component parts
ISO 12543-2:2004 [204] Laminated glass and laminated safety glass – Part 2: Laminated safety glass
ISO 12543-3:1998 [205] Laminated glass and laminated safety glass – Part 3: Laminated glass
ISO 12543-4:1998 [206] Laminated glass and laminated safety glass – Part 4: Test methods for durability
ISO 12543-5:1998 [207] Laminated glass and laminated safety glass – Part 5: Dimensions and edge
finishing
ISO 12543-6:1998 [208] Laminated glass and laminated safety glass – Part 6: Appearance
EN 14449:2005 [125] Laminated glass and laminated safety glass – Evaluation of conformity / Product
standard
EN 1279-1:2004 [103] Insulating glass units – Part 1: Generalities, dimensional tolerances and rules
for the system description
EN 1279-2:2002 [104] Insulating glass units – Part 2: Long term test method and requirements for
moisture penetration
EN 1279-3:2002 [105] Insulating glass units – Part 3: Long term test method and requirements for gas
leakage rate and for gas concentration tolerances
EN 1279-4:2002 [106] Insulating glass units – Part 4: Methods of test for the physical attributes of
edge seals
EN 1279-5:2005 [107] Insulating glass units – Part 5: Evaluation of conformity
EN 1279-6:2002 [108] Insulating glass units – Part 6: Factory production control and periodic tests
ASTM C 1048-04 [11] Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass – Kind HS, Kind FT Coated
and Uncoated
ASTM C 1172-03 [12] Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass
ASTM C 1376-03 [13] Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat
Glass
ASTM C 1422-99 [15] Standard Specification for Chemically Strengthened Flat Glass
ASTM C 1464-06 [16] Standard Specification for Bent Glass
ASTM C 1503-01 [17] Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror

Chapter
2
General Design Guidelines
2.1 The design process

Christoph HAAS
2.1.1 Particularities of glass structures

The overall design procedure for structural glass elements is not unlike other structural
materials i. e. it is essentially an iterative process that relies on a combination of rules
of thumb, more accurate analytical methods and prototype testing. The use of these
three techniques varies throughout the design process. Quick, approximate methods are
primarily used at early design stage to test alternative schemes and at a later stage for
verifying the more accurate calculations; more accurate methods are employed during
detailed design stages; prototype testing is used to verify the design prior to construction.
As with any structure, the designer should establish the fundamental performance
requirements before starting any calculations. These requirements include the ultimate
limit state that ensures adequate strength to withstand the anticipated actions, namely,
material strength, overall structural stability (i. e. the structure is not a mechanism) and
elastic stability (i. e. no flexural or lateral torsional buckling). Additional ultimate limit
state performance requirements that are particularly relevant to glass deal with fail-safe
concepts, ranging from criteria for overall structural robustness to requirements for the
post-breakage structural behaviour of individual glass elements. Serviceability limit
state requirements normally include limiting deflections and / or vibrations, movement
tolerances and aesthetic criteria. It is understood that all the ultimate and serviceability
limit states should be satisfied in order to ensure structural adequacy.
The standard elastic design method used with most construction materials is known as
the maximum stress approach. In this approach the engineer sizes a structural element by
ensuring that the maximum stresses caused by an action does not exceed the strength of
a material at any position on that element. Most engineers therefore carry out structural
design from a few fundamental constants, the strength of the material being one of them.
27
28 CHAPTER 2. GENERAL DESIGN GUIDELINES
However, the strength of glass depends on a number of factors (cf. Chapters 1 and 3).
This explains the lack of a single accurate value for the design strength of glass and
why the maximum stress approach is unsuited for designing structural glass elements.
Furthermore, glass shows an almost perfectly elastic, isotropic behaviour and exhibits
brittle fracture. This inability to yield plastically means that glass cannot redistribute
local stress concentrations by local yielding. Structural glass elements are, therefore,
extremely susceptible to stress concentrations and failure occurs without warning. This
‘unforgiving’ brittle nature is crucial in the design of glass elements and connections,
require a greater attention to detailing and much tighter fabrication / construction
tolerances than connections in steel or timber structures. In order to avoid unexpected
stress concentrations, the design model must account for all relevant aspects and be
analysed thoroughly. A good structural model of a glass structure should account for
conventional actions due to load, temperature differences, imposed deformations and
constraints, as well as the detailed geometry, the stiffness of all components including
support bracketry and fixings as well as fabrication / installation tolerances including out
of plane distortions and closeness of fit.
Consequently, in order to undertake structural glass design the engineer must have an
in-depth knowledge of the specific properties of glass (and the other materials employed in
the glass structure), select the appropriate design method that faithfully models the glass
structure in question and carry out sensible detailing.
2.1.2 Risk analysis

Safety considerations are at the interface between the intended use of a structure and
its design and sizing. Although it is impossible to provide sufficient resistance for every
conceivable threat, any structure should perform satisfactorily under foreseeable circum-
stances. A set of design situations (sometimes referred to as design cases) should be
established from relevant hazard scenarios and corresponding service situations. De-
sign and sizing is then based on these design situations and on the assumption that the
structure will be built as planned. Appropriate safety factors have to be taken into account.
The resistance of a glass element is very sensitive to the flaws on its surface. In addition
to standard hazard scenarios including loads and constraint stresses, surface damage
hazard scenarios should, therefore, be considered for design. Such hazard scenarios
represent factors that cause severe surface damage without instantaneous failure such as
accidental impact, vandalism, or heavy wind-borne debris.
A structure can be in danger for two fundamentally different reasons: It may be
subjected to actions that it was not designed for or the structure may not have been
planned or built properly. Both threats can be countered in a number of ways (Figure 2.1):
u The structure can be designed to withstand the threat.
u Measures to reduce the likelihood of the threat can be taken.
u The threat can be accepted as an unmitigated risk.
If the structure is to be designed to withstand particular threats, corresponding design
situations must be defined. Typically, these are accidental design situations which may
require lower safety factors than non-accidental design situations and can be considered
in parallel with the latter for the sizing of the structure. This approach is generally
unsuitable for most glass structures as it would entail a ‘no-break’ scenario that often

2.1. THE DESIGN PROCESS 29
Figure 2.1:
Hazards
Hazards and countermea-
Countermeasures sures.
Hazard Structural design which

prevention accounts for the hazards
Accepted
risks Best practise detailing,
Quality assurance
measures, Definition of
Maintenance instructions, design situations
Operation instructions,
Organizational measures
Service criteria agreement

Structural
Construction inspection plan
concept
Maintenance plan
results in very thick glass elements and visually obtrusive sub-frames and connections
Alternatively, measures to avoid a threat may involve
u design modifications (e. g. improved redundancy and alternative load paths),
u proper quality assurance during planning and construction stages,
u proper maintenance,
u adjustments in the way the structure will be used,
u permanent additional safety measures (e. g. protection against car impact),
u temporary additional safety measures during certain service situations (e. g. protec-
tion of glass edges during delivery of bulky goods).
From the viewpoint of reliability, it is preferable to mitigate a risk by incorporating the
appropriate measures in the first instance rather than relying on measures which must
be taken during the whole lifetime of a structure. This is because measures can be
implemented more reliably during the design and construction phases rather than being
enforced during the entire service life of a structure.
The third possible approach is to accept a threat as an unmitigated risk . This may
be appropriate if a risk is deemed sufficiently improbable to occur, if its consequences
are considered sufficiently small or if a combination thereof justifies such a decision.
Systematic approaches to assess whether a risk is acceptable or not are e. g. given in EN
1991-1-7:2006 [135]. Acceptable levels of risk are generally high if the person at risk can
influence the risk and is taking it voluntarily (e. g. a mountain climber). The opposite
is typically true for building structures: Acceptable risk levels are very low because the
people at risk have little or no influence on the risk and are not even aware of taking a
risk. Furthermore, the potential consequences of a structural failure are often very severe
in terms of the number of affected people and potential economic losses.
Clearly, the intended use, maintenance procedures, permanent and temporary safety
measures as well as accepted risks must be discussed in detail with the owner and if
possible also with the users of the structure. All decisions must be documented and
the key issues must be made available to all involved parties by including them in the
operations and maintenance manuals.

2.1.3 Post-breakage behaviour and robustness

Post-breakage structural capacity can be made available either on the level of an individual
structural element or on the level of the structural system. In the former case, an element
should fail only partially or at least in a ductile manner. In the latter case, brittle failure
of an individual element may occur, but the structure must be able to redistribute loads
to other elements, thereby providing redundancy. While redundancy may prevent the
failure of large parts of a structure, the failing element itself may pose a considerable
local threat (e. g. overhead glazing). Glass does not possess any inherent ductility and
disintegrates after failure. Any remaining load bearing capacity must, therefore, be
achieved by additional means. Laminated glass with a PVB interlayer is often able to
provide an adequate level of post-breakage performance by interaction of the PVB film
and the glass fragments (cf. Section 1.3.3). Contrary to popular belief, however, laminated
glass units with a PVB interlayer do not always guarantee post-breakage stability. In the
case of laminated glass composed of fully tempered glass plates, the highly fragmented
panels are often unable to mobilize an arching or locking action that is essential for a
degree of post-breakage stability, particularly if the broken tempered glass is subjected to
high levels of compression. Consequently such laminated glass panel will normally sag
like a wet towel (Figure 2.2). In these cases, post-breakage structural capacity relies solely
on the tensile strength of the PVB interlayer, which has a tendency to tear. Furthermore,
the panel often slides from its supports or out of clamps as a consequence of the large
deformation.
Three stages of flexural behaviour in laminated glass are shown in Figure 2.3: Stage
1, where both sheets of glass are intact; Stage 2, where the bottom sheet has fractured
and the top sheet is carrying all the loads; and Stage 3 where the top sheet has also
fractured but the fragments in the top sheet lock together in compression and combine
with a tensile stress in the interlayer to provide some further post-breakage resistance.
The extent of the flexural post-breakage resistance provided by Stage 3 depends on the
stiffness and tensile strength of the interlayer and on the type of glass used in the top
layer of glass. If the laminated glass is composed of annealed or heat strengthened glass,
which break into large shards, the PVB interlayer is able to hold the glass fragments in
place thus enabling some compressive forces to be transmitted through the broken glass
and providing a limited amount of ductility. However fully tempered glass is unable to
transmit an effective amount of compressive stresses due to the small size of the fragments
[230].
A similar post-breakage performance can be achieved by using a combination of
Figure 2.2:
Fully tempered laminated glass after
breakage.

2.2. ACTIONS ON GLASS STRUCTURES 31
Figure 2.3:
C C C Three stages of flexural be-
T T T
C haviour in laminated glass
T
showing the post-breakage
Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3
stress distribution.
annealed or heat strengthened glass panes with fully tempered panes, as long as the
tempered glass panes are located on the tension side of the laminated unit. An alternative
way of increasing the post-breakage structural capacity of an individual element is the
use of steel or carbon fibre elements to act compositely with the glass elements. An
adequate connection between such elements and the glass is crucial to achieve the desired
post-breakage performance [264, 266].
If post-breakage structural capacity is to be achieved by load redistribution, the
prevention of progressive failure is a key factor. Alternative load paths must be in place
so that elements neighbouring a failed element must be able to withstand the additional
loads caused by load redistribution. If this is not properly accounted for in their design,
progressive failure leading to a partial or even total collapse of the structure is unavoidable.
It is important to think in terms of actual threats. Some threats, e. g. an impact, may
be singular, local events that affect only one particular structural element at a random
point in time. Such threats are improbable to coincide with the maximum intensities of
other actions like wind or snow. Although load redistribution will increase the load on
neighbouring elements, this load may still be well below their maximum design loads.
This assumption does not hold true in the case of a threat that is correlated with other
actions. The threat of falling trees, for instance, is correlated with strong winds. The
load redistribution requirements in such cases are more onerous and the resistance of all
elements involved may need to be increased in order to prevent progressive failure.
For threats that affect large parts of the glass structure, e. g. explosions, load redis-
tribution may not be feasible. The simultaneous failure of multiple structural elements
can lead to spans that are impossible to bridge without unreasonable aesthetic, technical
or economic consequences. In such cases, the design approach is often to mitigate the
risk by providing protective glazing design which involves measures to reduce injuries
from broken glass. This approach is similar in nature to glazing design for blast loading
(cf. Section 2.2.6).
Project specific post-breakage tests are often the only way to ensure sufficient post-
breakage performance, see Section 8.1.
2.2 Actions on glass structures

Dr. Frank WELLERSHOFF
2.2.1 Particularities of glass structures

The actions on glass structures are largely similar to the actions on most other building
structures and include self weight, dead loads, life loads, wind loads, snow loads, thermal
stresses, pressure differences, impact loads, blast loads and seismic loads. However the
resistance of glass elements is very sensitive to flaws on their surface, therefore damage

caused by accidental impact, vandalism, heavy wind-borne debris and the like may also
be important actions to be considered for design, see Section 2.1.2.
Another particularity of glass is that the entire stress history (caused by load fluctu-
ations, load durations etc.) has a major influence on on subcritical crack growth and
therefore on the inherent strength (cf. Section 1.2.2. Consequently, complete action
history models are required in order to design glass elements in an accurate manner. This
is a fundamental difference from other materials such as steel or concrete, for which only
extreme values or extreme value distributions of actions are normally used for design
(except for fatigue considerations). However, most of the current glass-related codes,
specifications and guidelines provide information on extreme values only. If the inherent
strength of glass is neglected and only the residual surface stress is considered for design
(e. g. in the case of HSG or FTG) extreme value models are sufficiently accurate and the
stress history may be ignored (cf. Chapter 6).
Design action intensities, reference time periods, partial safety factors and the like
vary across countries and standards. Since such quantities are interrelated, it is essential
that only compatible data is used. Characteristic action values from European standards,
for instance, cannot be combined with partial safety factors of some other standard family
and vice versa.
The main European standard on actions is EN 1991-1-7:2006 [135]. It covers standard
actions such as dead loads, life loads, wind loads and snow loads. The self weight of glass
is given in EN 572-1:2004 [146] (see Table 1.10). Partial factors as well as guidelines on
the design cases are generally given in the material-specific standards or guidelines (see
Chapter 4).
Section 2.2.2 to Section 2.2.9 below provide additional information related to glass-
specific actions which are only partially covered in current standards.
2.2.2 Wind loads

Wind induced pressures give rise to dynamic actions which are normally described by
two simplified parameters, the mean wind speed and the turbulence intensity. These
parameters are normally used to define an equivalent static wind load on glazing. Such an
approach is acceptable in most design situations since the natural frequency of a façade is
normally significantly higher than the periodic occurrence of localized gusts. However,
load amplification can occur in slender, large span façades such a suspended glazing and
cable stayed structures where the natural frequency of the local structure may be below
1 Hz.
An accurate mathematical prediction of the lifetime of a glass panel subjected to wind
loading is still elusive due to the complexities and various parameters involved. In essence,
each gust is equivalent to a load cycle on the glass which may cause subcritical crack
growth. This complex load history and the resulting stress history will affect material
strength (cf. Section 3.2 and Section 3.3). Furthermore sharp edges and obstructions
on glass façades give rise to flow separation and vortices. The statistical variation of the
negative pressures that arise from this turbulence do not fit a normal distribution. The
effect of this phenomenon on the strength of glass is discussed in [228].
In practice approximate methods for predicting wind loading on glass façades broadly
include the use of national codes of practice and international wind loading standards
[135], wind tunnel testing and more recently computational fluid dynamics. A basic

review of the accuracy and applicability of each of these different methods is provided
in [265]. The designer should be well aware of the limitations of the prediction method
used, as unsafe results may be derived if these are not observed. Other design issues
related to wind actions on glass include the calculation of internal pressures in buildings,
pressure distributions and pressure losses in double façades and load sharing between the
individual panes of Insulated Glazing Units (IGUs). Guidance on the first two issues is
provided in the wind loading Eurocode EN 1991-1-7:2006 [135] whereas prEN 13474-
2:2000 [276] gives guidance on the distribution of wind loads in IGUs.
2.2.3 Correlation of wind load and material temperature

PVB-foils in laminated safety glass and adhesives in glued connections are polymers with
viscoelastic properties. The mechanical behaviour of these materials depends on the three
dimensional spectrum of time, temperature and load. Polymers become weaker with
rising temperature and they tend to creep under high forces and long load durations. In
the event of sustained loads it is therefore common practice to assume that interlayers
creep and thereby ignore any shear transfer that occurs from one glass panel to another.
However when dealing with short duration loads (e. g. wind loading) it is sensible to
account for some shear interaction by superposing the variations in material temperature,
load and design lifetime. However, it is unrealistic to assume that the highest wind
load coincides with highest temperature and doing so would lead to uneconomic glass
thicknesses for resisting wind loads. Figure 2.4 shows the typical correlation between the
gust wind speed and the air temperature in Germany. This figure shows that higher wind
speeds occur during storms with air temperatures of 10 ◦ C to 15 ◦ C which are well below
the maximum recorded temperatures that are in the order of 30 ◦ C.
The second effect during storms is that the sky is overcast and the amount of solar
reaching the glass is substantially reduced. The wind speed and temperature effects may
be correlated as shown in Figure 2.5. This figure is based on daily measurements of the
relative gust wind load and temperature from eight weather stations in Germany for the
period between 1970 to 1998. The related material temperature due to absorbtion has
been determined during one year with measurements on laminated safety glass with a
40 Figure 2.4:
Wind gust speed and air temperature
in Aachen, Germany, daily maximum
30
values in 28 years [333].
Air temperature, daily max. (°C)
20
10
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
-10
Gust wind speed, daily max. (m/s)
-20

Figure 2.5: 80
Correlation of wind load and material tempera- 70
Max. material temperature (°C)

ture, Germany, 100 years [333].
60
50
40 3d
30
10 d 100 d
20 300 d
500 d 1000 d
10 1400 d
50 d 700 d 1700 d
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
-10
-20 Relative gust wind load q/qmax (–)
Figure 2.6: wind load q/qmax material temperature T=20°C

Correlation of 1.0
wind load and
material temper-
ature on façades
in Mid-Europe, 0.5
design load cases 0.25
[333].
time
wind load q/qmax material temperature T=50°C
0.5
0.25
0.125
time
wind load q/qmax material temperature T=80°C
0.32
0.16
0.08 time
3s
10 min
96 h
black enamel coating. The contour lines indicate the expected number of days in a period
of 100 years that exceed the correlated gust wind load and material temperature.
Wellershoff [333] suggests the use of Figure 2.6 for Germany and all countries in
central continental Europe where the extreme wind situations only occur during storms
and cyclones. With a maximum duration of four days for cyclones, the figure can be used
for the design of viscoelastic materials in façades. In this case three load cases (20◦ C,
50◦ C and 80◦ C) have to be considered. For each load case the load portions have to be
superimposed, taking into account the corresponding load duration.
Further investigations in [333], based on the correlation between maximum wind
speed and material temperature, have shown that a simplified single value of GPVB =
0.4 N/mm2 may be used to describe the shear modulus of PVB for maximum wind loading.

2.2.4 Seismic loads and movements

Despite recent intensive research activity on the performance of glass in extreme events
such as severe windstorms, there is little information in international building codes
regarding the seismic design of architectural glass systems. This lack of information is
disturbing when one considers the hazards from falling glass and the high costs associated
with the loss of building enclosure.
A relatively small but focused research programme carried out in the United States
has shown that there are significant differences in performances of various glass types
subjected to simulated racking movements. Annealed and heat strengthened laminated
glass tend to perform much better in terms of glass fall out when compared to monolithic
glass or monolithic glass with unanchored adhesive film. Furthermore silicone bonding of
the glass to the frame was found to offer substantial improvements over the alternative
dry-glazing details. [33].
2.2.5 Impact loads

Glazing balustrades, glass doors or wall elements should be designed to resist dynamic
human impact. As a first approach human impact loads may be applied on the glass
element as a static load, e. g. 1.5 kN at railing height. The loads and the method of appli-
cation varies between different countries [53, 135]. For non standard glass elements (e. g.
point supported balustrades) and load bearing partitions (e. g. railings and balustrades) a
dynamic analysis or impact tests are often required. The tests specified in this case are
either of the impact pendulum type or of the drop ball type and are described in Section
2.4.3 and Section 2.4.4).
2.2.6 Bomb blast

Glass fragments are the primary source of injury in urban explosive events. In the urban
environment glass fragments are responsible for 80% of total injuries, and up to 55%
of the injuries at 120 m from the blast are glass-related [295, 314]. The increasing
occurrence and severity of crime and terrorist activities in recent years have therefore
significantly increased the need for protective glazing design, i. e. glass façades with
enhanced blast performance. The primary purpose of glazing protection is to minimize
the number of injuries caused by sharp edged fragments that are propelled from glazed
openings when glass is subjected to blast. The two other aims of glazing protection are to
minimize damage to equipment within the building (minimize loss of property) and to
allow re-occupation of the building within the shortest period of time (minimize loss of
business).
When an explosion occurs, gaseous products of the reaction are formed at very high
temperature and pressure at the source. These high pressures expand rapidly into the
surrounding medium thus forming a shock wave of compressed air. The shock wave
travels radially away from the burst point, gradually reducing its peak pressure, but with
increasing duration. The shock wave’s leading edge is a near instantaneous rise from
ambient pressure to peak pressure, with a decaying after-edge peak to ambient pressure
known as the positive phase. This is followed by a negative pressure period known as
the suction phase (Figure 2.7). Explosive charges situated extremely close to a building

Figure 2.7: 1200

Peak pressure
1000
Typical free-air blast wave profile.
800
Pressure (kPa)
600
400 Positive impulse
200
Negative impulse
0
Arrival
time Positive p. d. Negative phase duration
-200
0.0 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 2.8 3.2
Time (s)
impose highly impulsive, high intensity pressures over a localized region of the structure
whereas charges situated further away produce a lower intensity, longer duration pressure
distribution over the entire structure. The latter does not normally lead to major structural
damage but often causes widespread damage to light cladding and glazing.
The response of a structure to a blast shock wave is greatly influenced by the ratio
of the positive phase duration and the natural period of vibration of the structure under
consideration. When this ratio is less than 0.2, the effect is considered to be impulsive,
Where it is higher than 10 it may be considered as a quasi-static load. If the ratio is
between 0.2 and 10 the response of the structure is dynamic and dynamic augmentation
of the load may take place. [217].
In addition to the shock wave described above, explosion damage is also caused by
the associated movement of air molecules causing a dynamic pressure, often referred to
as the ‘blast wind’. However, in unconfined explosions the effects of dynamic pressure
is much lower than the shock wave pressure and diminishes rapidly with distance from
the source. Ground surface and surrounding buildings may also amplify the blast and
therefore have a significant influence on the determination of the design blast load. This
third component of the blast load is often referred to as the ‘reflected pressure’. Details on
blast wave characteristics and types of confined and unconfined explosions are outside the
scope of this document. Further information is available in [176, 216, 249]. In practice,
the positive exponential pressure-time history of blast waves can be approximated using
a triangular impulse load with an equivalent impulse to the exponential pressure-time
history, zero or minimal rise time, and linear decay. The impulse parameters may be
determined by means of existing computer software [268] or approximate methods shown
in [176]. In the past, building owners, employers and designers were obliged to adopt
‘reasonable duty of care’ by considering the possible effects of blast loading on their
buildings. More recently, many countries have adopted legally enforceable regulations to
ensure that the building provides adequate safety to occupants when there is a threat of a
terrorist act.
The blast loading evaluation should start with a risk analysis of the likelihood of an
attack on a building and the identification of consequences due to an explosion [76]. In
such an evaluation, the following factors should be taken in account:
u political stability
u value of the building, its function and the nature of business
u vulnerability and accessibility of the area

u the building location and the closeness to possible targets
In general it is difficult to define a typical explosion scenario as it depends on the type

of explosion, the size of the explosive and the location of the attack. Professional advice
can be sought from public agencies such as the Police and government departments
responsible for national security. A publication by the UK’s Security Service [296], for
instance, provides additional guidelines on threat assessment.
The response of glass to a given blasts load depends on:
u the glass panel characteristics (size, thickness, glass type and composition)
u the stiffness and robustness of the frame or support structure

u the type of connection between the glass panel and the frame
For the design of façades, two different approaches exist: The first consists of the design
for a ‘no break’ scenario, where glass panels are designed to resist the blast load without
breaking. This generally results in very thick and expensive glass configurations set in
very stiff and heavy frames. A more common approach is to design the glass for a safe
breakage. The latter may be achieved in a number of ways including the combined use
of anti-shatter film and bomb blast net curtains or the combined use of fully tempered
glass and anti-shatter film. However the most effective approach is to use laminated
safety glass (with a PVB interlayer). In this case the blast energy is partially absorbed
by the glass breakage and the remaining blast energy is taken by a further deformation
of the viscoelastic interlayer. The minimum thickness of laminated glass used for these
applications is 7.5 mm including a minimum 1.5 mm thick PVB interlayer. Furthermore
the glass should be fixed in a robust frame with a bearing in the order of 30 mm. Bonding
with structural silicone tends to improve the overall blast performance. The thickness of
glass and the size of the bearing will vary depending on the size of the glass pane. Some
initial sizing recommendations are given in [176]. A very effective form of protection can
also be provided by a double-glazed unit where a tempered outer glass pane is combined
with a laminated inner pane.
Unfortunately, commonly available glass software is unable to simulate the behaviour
of broken laminated glass. Consequently, a reliable design without prototype testing is
difficult. Blast testing is normally carried out by means of arena testing in a secure range
testing site which involves the glazing prototype mounted onto a test cubicle and located
at a standard stand-off distance from a live explosive charge. The explosive charges
are measured in TNT equivalent and include 20 kg TNT to simulate hand held bombs
and 100 kg TNT to simulate car bombs. The aim of these tests is to assess the hazard
consequences by measuring the distance that the glass fragments are projected into the
test cubicle (Figure 2.8). The hazard levels range from ‘A – no break’ to ‘F – high hazard’.
An alternative form of testing is by employing a shock tube to simulate the blast wave
loading on glass panels. This is often used for simulating small and large vehicle bombs.
Current standards related to bomb blast design and testing of windows and façades are
EN 13541 [118], EN 13123 [115], and EN 13124 [116, 117], the European code drafts
DIS 16934 [215] and DIS 16933 [214] and the US GSA standard [181]. For a review of
these and other exiting blast testing standards, readers should refer to [221].
Some government agencies, particularly those in the UK and US, have commissioned
numerous arena and shock tube tests of PVB laminated glass panes with fully supported
edges. These data are generally classified or restricted, however some guideline docu-
ments with restricted availability may be provided to bona-fide designers [196]. Most of

Figure 2.8:
Cross-section through blast
test cubicle showing hazard
F High
BLAST
ratings. A No Break
hazard
B No Hazard
C Min. Hazard
E
0.5m
D
1m 2m
Very low Low
hazard hazard
the existing guidelines and design charts in these guidelines relate to glass panel sizes
measuring 1.0 m by 0.8 m and with the four edges fully supported by a clamping frame.
There is very little advice or guidelines available for bespoke façade systems or bolted
glass. In such cases, full prototype testing is often required.
2.2.7 Internal pressure loads on insulated glass units

Insulated glass units (IGU) are subjected to internal pressure loads due to pressure
difference between the enclosed air cavity and the environment. The pressure difference
depends on:
u atmospheric pressure
u altitude difference between place of fabrication and place of installation
u variation in temperature
u the bending stiffness of the glass layers
Internal pressure loads are particularly critical for small glass dimensions in a façade.
The smallest glasses provide the highest lateral plate stiffness and therefore an expansion
of the enclosed air results in very high tensile stresses on the plate surface. Similarly high
stresses may be generated in curved IGUs where the curvature in the glass results in an
increased lateral stiffness that translates into higher surface stresses. Design guidelines
for IGUs are provided in prEN 13474-2:2000 [276] and ASTM E 1300-04 [21].
2.2.8 Thermal stress

Thermally induced stresses in glass are generally caused by the presence of a temperature
gradient across the glass surface. The source of the heating energy may either be the sun
or local heating devices. Glass plates exposed to sunlight are subjected to solar irradiance.
A percentage of the incident energy is reflected, some energy is absorbed by the glass and
the remaining energy is transmitted through the glass (Figure 1.23). The absorbed energy
increases the temperature of the glass. In the case of a framed glass or partial shading,
only the unshaded areas are exposed to solar energy. The warmer areas expand relative
to the cooler ones and generate a tensile stress in the cooler regions of the glass. If the
temperature difference between the cooler and the warmer regions is sufficiently high, the
stress causes breakage of the glass. In general the risk of thermal breakage is much higher
for annealed glass than for HSG or FTG. A common severe condition is on a bright sunny
morning after a clear cold night. In this scenario the whole glass is in a cool state when

the exposed glass areas are heated rapidly by the solar radiation while the shaded areas
(i. e. glass edge behind the glazing bead or frames) remain cool. The heated areas expand
and impose a tensile strain on the the unheated edges of the plate that acts parallel to the
glass edge. The temperature distribution in glass panels is mainly influenced by:
u Solar energy absorption of the glass
u Solar radiation intensity
u Heat transfer coefficient
u Heating energy from other energy source i. e. radiators
u Diurnal temperature range
u Internal temperature rise
u Blinds (internal, external)
u Shadows
The strength of glass against thermal stress failure is usually given as an allowable
maximum temperature difference. If the calculated temperature difference is less than
the allowable temperature difference ∆Tadm the panel is thermally safe. There are
several existing calculation methods. Table 2.9 gives an example of maximum allowable
temperature differences for different glass types and edge qualities. The values are based
on tests carried out by Pilkington in a cooling frame and are derived for an assumed load
duration of 3.5 h per day [69].
The French code [87] additionally provides a calculation method for determining the
existing maximum temperature difference by taking into account the parameters listed
above. These are compared to the maximum allowable temperature differences that are
provided as a function of the glass type, the edge quality and the inclination of the glass
panel.
Table 2.9:
As-cut or Smooth Polished
Maximum
arrised glass
allowable
(◦ C) (◦ C) (◦ C)
temperature
Float or sheet glass, h < 12 mm 35 40 45 difference
Float glass, h = 15 mm or 19 mm 30 35 40 ∆Tadm .
Float glass, h = 25 mm 26 30 35
Patterned glass 26 26 26
Wired glass 22 22 22
Heat strengthened glass (all types) 100 100 100
Fully tempered glass (all types) 200 200 200
Laminated glass Smallest value of the component panes

2.2.9 Surface damage
For non-structural glass elements and for structural elements in which the surfaces are
permanently and safely protected, so that they do not undergo any surface damage from
external influences, the amount of surface damage acceptable is often controlled by optical
acceptance levels such as in EN 572-2:2004 [147] and ISO 12543-6:1998 [208].
However, many structural glass elements may potentially be exposed to accidental
impact, vandalism, heavy wind-borne debris or other factors that result in surface flaws
that are substantially deeper than the ‘natural’ flaws caused by production and handling.
Such elements will be called ‘exposed glass elements’ and the deep flaws ‘severe damage’
hereafter.
At the instant of damaging the glass surface, the glass is subjected to an elastic stress
intensity. If this stress intensity exceeds the fracture toughness, instantaneous failure
will occur (see Section 3.3.1). Predicting the crack path or fracture pattern in glass is a
complex issue involving dynamic fracture mechanics. A review of the current knowledge
in this area is provided in Section 3.4 and [262].
If the instantaneous stress intensity is less than the fracture toughness, some local
surface damage may still occur. This damage reduces the strength of the glass element
significantly (cf. Figure 3.7). When sizing exposed glass elements , the engineer should
ideally make a sensible assumption of the potential damage caused by various surface
damage hazards (cf. Section 2.1.2). However, there is currently a lack of information
on how this qualitative assessment may be translated into quantitative design values. 1
Project specific testing and a considerable amount of engineering judgement are, therefore,
generally required. Future research in this field should be conducted in order to establish
a relationship between common hazard scenarios and the surface damage that they cause.
2.3 Structural analysis and modelling
In addition to the complex nature of the material strength discussed in Chapter 3, the
engineer is also faced with the task of stress and deflection analysis. This adds another
layer of complexity to the design, particularly when ‘unconventional’ support conditions
and large deflections are involved. The ensuing sections provide some general guidelines
and key references in this regard.
2.3.1 Geometric non-linearity
In contrast to most other building components, glass elements commonly experience

large deflections (i. e. in excess of their thickness) prior to failure. In situations where
the glass plate is loaded laterally and has translational restrains along its edges, the
large displacements will cause the mid-plane to stretch thus developing in-plane or
membrane stresses that increase the plate stiffness. An increase in plate stiffness may also
observed when the ends of the glass element are not restrained, e. g. when circumferential
membrane stresses are set up as the plate is constrained to deform into a non-developable
surface.
1
Some experimental data on the depth of scratches created with a sharp diamond tip are provided in [187].

2.3. STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND MODELLING 41
In these large deflection situations, the assumptions of Kirchhoff’s plate theory are
violated. Therefore a geometrically non-linear approach which is able to take membrane
stresses into account must be used. A mathematical description for the non-linear be-
haviour is provided by von Karman’s partial differential equations (which in the interest
of brevity are not reproduced here), however the analytical solution of these equations is
complex and unsuitable for manual calculation. Further information the equations and
decoupling solutions are available in specialized literature such as [318]. In practice, it is
common to use approximate computational methods, such as the finite difference method
or the finite element method, to solve geometrically non-linear problems.
Failure to perform a geometrically non-linear analysis for large deflection situations
will result in an overestimation of the lateral deformations. Therefore the actual tensile
stresses for a given load are less and the actual tensile stresses for a given deflection
are generally greater than those indicated by a linear analysis. An illustration of this
non-linear behaviour is provided in Figure 2.10, which shows the uniform lateral load vs.
maximum deformation of a 1676.4 × 1676.4 × 5.66 mm thick fully tempered glass plate.
Figure 2.10 shows that the non-linear finite element analysis provides a reasonably good
prediction of this behaviour, however a linear analysis results in gross errors particulary
at higher loads.
60 Figure 2.10:
Experimental data Load vs. displacement relationship for a
50 (Norville et al., 1991)
Non-linear model predictions
1676.4 × 1676.4 × 5.66 mm thick fully
40 Linear model predictions tempered glass plate.
Load (kN)
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Lateral displacement (mm)
2.3.2 Finite element analysis

For common geometries and loading conditions (e. g. a glass panel with simple supports
along its edges and subjected to a uniform lateral load), hand calculations based on the
tables and graphs in common design standards are usually sufficient for determining
maximum stresses and maximum deflections. Unusual glass geometries and support
conditions (e. g. curved glass, glass with re-entrant corners, point fixings, non-unform
loading etc.) normally require a more detailed computational analysis.
Various software applications with finite element capabilities are now available and
may run on single processor personal computers at relatively little cost. This accessibility
and versatility of the finite element method means that virtually every engineering design
office has the means to carry out some form of finite element analysis.
Incorrect modelling or misinterpretation of computer-generated results may result in
an unsafe estimation of stresses and must therefore be avoided. Detailed advice on the
correct use of the finite element method is beyond the scope of this publication and the

reader should refer to specialized publications on the subject (e. g. [72]). However, some
general rules for the modelling of glass elements are given in the following:
u The mesh density should endeavour to match the expected stress concentrations,
i. e. a finer mesh should be adopted around bolt holes and other geometric disconti-
nuities in the glass.
u The results for any given mesh density should be verified by carrying out conver-
gence tests to ensure that any further mesh refinement does not affect the magnitude
of the stresses obtained from the analysis.
u Contact between glass and hard materials, such as steel, is normally prevented by
using a liner, gasket or bushing that has a lower modulus of elasticity than that of
glass (e. g. Nylon, POM, aluminium, EPDM). One important consideration when
modelling a fixing region is, therefore, to ensure that the contact surfaces and
releases are modelled such that forces are transmitted in compression only and that
no tension is transmitted through the gap. This can normally be achieved by using
contact elements or by prescribing contact and non-contact surfaces. This approach
requires a non-linear analysis.
Details must be modelled with care. In a point fixing, for instance, the rotational
u
stiffness assigned to the model should match that of the specified bolt, i. e. whether
the bolt is free to rotate as in fully articulated bolts or allows only partial rotation
as in spring-plate type fixings.
Further advice on the buckling behaviour of glass structures is available in [34, 36, 241]
and for the finite element modelling of point fixings in [310].
2.3.3 Simplified approaches and aids

Approximate solutions from tables or graphs provide a quick way to perform maximum
stress and deflection calculations for glass panels in flexure [345] and stress concentrations
around point supports [270]. These approximate analytical solutions also provide the
means for verifying more complex finite element analyses.
Glass selection charts provided in ASTM E 1300-04 [21] and prEN 13474-2:2000
[276] cater for a range of rectangular, circular and triangular flat plates and a variety of
support conditions. In the case of a non-rectangular polygonal shape, an approximation
of the stresses may be obtained by exercising some engineering judgement as suggested
by Vallabhan et al. [328]. This method involves representing the polygonal glass element
with an equivalent circular pane that circumscribes the polygonal plate. The maximum
stresses and deflections for the equivalent circular plate may be obtained from [345].
2.4 Requirements for application

Dr. Iris MANIATIS, Prof. Dr. Geralt SIEBERT
Besides the fundamental issues of load carrying capacity and deflections limits, there are
often additional performance requirements for structural glass elements in façades, roofs
or floors. Many of these additional requirements are not fully covered by standards and
are often too complex to verify numerically. Therefore these performance requirements,
such as the post-breakage structural capacity and the impact resistance, often require

2.4. REQUIREMENTS FOR APPLICATION 43
full-scale testing. This section provides an overview of the more important considerations
and current regulations on this subject.
Most building codes require that a building and its elements must be designed and
built so as to reduce the risk to public health and safety to societally acceptable levels.
This requirement can in general be guaranteed in three different ways:
u For standard applications by applying technical rules and design codes.
u For frequent applications by applying European technical approvals (ETA) or national
general approvals.
u For individual applications by obtaining special permits given by some authorities
and in some countries by engineering judgement of the responsible designer.
Where structural elements are regarded as being safe or harmless, no special requirements
apply.
2.4.1 Vertical glazing

Any glazing with an inclination of less than 10 or 15 degrees to the vertical (depending on
the country) is considered as ‘vertical glazing’.If vertical glazing acts as an anti-drop-device,
it has to fulfill additional requirements that are discussed in ‘Railings and balustrades’.
The present paragraph concentrates on building façades and sound-screens.
For façades, ensuring structural safety is often sufficient. For structural sealant glazing
systems (SSGS), the requirements in the European Technical Approval Guideline (ETAG)
No. 002 [161] must be met. In some countries, additional national regulations may apply
(e. g. additional tests for hurricane resistance are required some states in the USA). There
are usually no specific requirements for the post-breakage resistance of vertical glazing
and consequently there is no restriction on the type of glass that may be used in practice:
u Europe — prEN 13474. New European standards are currently developed and are
meant to take the current state of knowledge into account. Design is based on the
partial factor approach as it is used in other European codes. In its final version, it
should provide the basis for almost all glass applications and provide detailed sizing
guidelines for glass with simply supported edges.
u Germany.
DIN 18008. National standard under development. Aims and scope are very
similar to the above-mentioned European standard prEN 13474.
TRLV 1998 [323]. This document contains regulations for linearly supported
overhead and vertical glazing. Special cases like railings or accessible surfaces
are not covered. In addition to design rules, allowable tensile stress and
deflection limits, a method for calculation of climatic loads in insulating glass
units is also provided.
ZTV-Lsw 88 [348]. These are regulations for sound screens that were published
by the German Federal Ministry for Traffic and cater for sound screens along
roads constructed of any material. The main requirement concerning the
application of glass, is a minimum thickness of 12 mm for fully tempered glass
and 16 mm for laminated glass elements.

u USA — ASTM E 1300. The American National Standard ASTM E 1300 [21] applies
to vertical and sloped (overhead) glazing in buildings exposed to a uniform lateral
load> The types of glass covered by this standard include monolithic, laminated,
or insulating glass of rectangular shape with simple supports along two, three or
four edges. The specified design loads may consist of wind load, snow load and
self-weight with a total combined magnitude less than or equal to 10 kPa. It does
not apply to other applications such as balustrades, glass floor panels and point-
supported structural glass members. Useful deflections limits are also provided.
u United Kingdom — BS 6262. Part 3 of this British standard [50] provides glass
thickness selection charts for a range of lateral wind loads and caters for annealed,
fully tempered, insulated glass units. The support conditions are limited to rectangu-
lar glass panels that are simply supported along the four edges and panels. Part 6 of
this standard [52] gives good practice detailing and basic sizing recommendations
on special applications such as glass fins and simple bolted glass barriers and glass
partitions.
2.4.2 Overhead glazing

Glazing with an inclination of more than 10 or 15 degrees to the vertical is considered as
overhead glazing, because people might step under it. If the glazing is used as a walking
surface for either regular access or occasional maintenance, it is often referred to as
‘accessible glazing’ and is discussed in (cf. Section 2.4.3). Overhead glazing elements must
stay in position for a certain amount of time after breakage to minimize the likelihood
of injury (cf. Section 2.1.3). Design of overhead glazing involves structural safety and
sufficient post-breakage resistance. The latter can be proven by testing (cf. Section 8.1)
or ensured by additional features that prevent broken glass from falling down (e. g. steel
ropes or nets under the glass elements). If the glazing is accessible for maintenance, more
onerous requirements come into effect, namely that the broken glass is able to support
the weight of a person for a specific amount of time after failure.
Monolithic fully tempered glass elements should not be used for overhead applications
as they do not provide any residual integrity or resistance after breakage. For laminated
safety glass made of fully tempered glass sheets, the residual resistance has to be proved
by testing (cf. Section 8.1). Laminated glass made of annealed or heat strengthened
glass is generally able to satisfy normal post-breakage requirements as long as the glass
panel is within a given set of spans and support conditions (e. g. the span of a glass panel
with two linear supports along its opposite edges should not exceed 1200 mm). In case
of point supported glass elements, the residual resistance is strongly influenced by the
type of point fixing. Countersunk point fixings usually show a poor residual resistance
whereas point fixings that exert some clamping force on the glass and the interlayer (e. g.
laminated glass with two sided raised heads) perform better. The following regulations
are often used in practice:
u Germany — TRLV. TRLV 1998 [323] applies only to linearly supported glazing.
It does not cover glued façade panels, glazing acting as bracing elements or bent
overhead glazing. Railings or accessible glazing have to comply with additional
requirements. Greenhouses and dormer windows up to a size of 1.6 m2 in private
dwellings do not need to conform to TRLV. The glass types that may be used are:

annealed glass, cast glass, fully tempered glass and laminated safety glass built up
from the above mentioned glass types and a PVB interlayer, or an alternative foil or
cold poured resin.
Deflection of bearing elements must be limited to 1/200 of the span and 15 mm.
They have to support the glass panes for loads and wind suction. For single glazing
elements and the lower pane of insulating glass elements, only wired glass or
laminated safety glass made of annealed glass is allowed. Single panes or laminated
glasses made of tempered glass are not allowed.
Glass elements with a span exceeding 1.20 m have to be supported on all edges. It
is important to note that if the aspect ratio exceeds 3:1, the glass pane is considered
to be supported along the two longer edges only. The minimum thickness of PVB is
generally 0.76 mm; 0.38 mm is allowed for glass elements with spans not exceeding
0.8 m and that are supported along all four edges. No notches or holes are allowed
in overhead glazing. Positive effects due to shear transmission by the PVB interlayers
of laminated glass elements or due to edge sealing of insulating glass units may not
be taken into account.
Structural verification is based on maximum allowable stresses and deflections, see
Table 4.1.
u USA — ASTM E 1300. See ‘Vertical glazing’.
u United Kingdom. There are no mandatory requirements in the United Kingdom
for overhead glazing as long as the glass is not used as a walking surface including
for maintenance and cleaning. Common practice in this case is to provide some
form of safety glass, preferably laminated glass. In cases where objects may fall
onto the glass surface, hard body impact tests should be performed as specified in
EN 356:1999 [144].
2.4.3 Accessible glazing

Floors, roofs and other horizontal glazing are often either accessible to the public or at
least accessible for cleaning and maintenance. Resistance against impact caused by a
hard or soft body as well as the post-breakage behaviour must therefore be examined
as well as slip resistance of the glass surface. In order to satisfy these conditions full
scale tests are often required. Currently, there is no European standard for the design of
accessible glazing. The following sections therefore discuss some available and useful
recommendations and rules.
u Germany. A recommendation by the German Institute for Building Technology
[77] is commonly used.

For glazing with public access, it contains the following requirements:
Structural design. For the walking surface, laminated safety glass made of at
least three glass panes should be used and tied together by PVB interlayers.
Linear support as well as point fixing with or without drilled holes is acceptable.
For basic design requirements, TRLV 1998 [323] is applicable. Structural
analysis must be performed by considering all influences that may increase the
stresses, like temperature deformations, supports, eccentricities, tolerances etc.
The uppermost glass sheet of laminated glass elements must be neglected for
the structural analysis. Furthermore, composite behaviour (shear transmission

through the PVB) may not be taken into account. The deflection limit at
midspan is 1/200 of the span.
Impact resistance. Impact resistance has to be verified by tests, see Sec-
tion 8.1.3.
Residual resistance after breakage (remaining load carrying capacity).
For this test, the damaged specimen from the impact test is used. Any glass
sheets within the laminated glass element that were not destroyed by the
impact have to be damaged with a hammer and center punch at several
points. The post-breakage resistance is defined as the time elapsed between
the breaking of all the glass sheets and the collapse of the loaded laminated
glass element. Normally, a post-breakage resistance of at least 24 hours is
required by German authorities. (cf. Section 8.1)
For glazing that is accessible for cleaning and maintenance, basically the same re-
quirements apply. The applied load for the impact test however is lower and the
impact body is different. Details are given in Section 8.1.3. Additional safety require-
ments for permanently installed working and walking areas and other installations
for maintenance and inspection are given in DIN 4426:2001 [80].
u USA — IBC. Glass requirements are found in Chapter 24 of the International
Building Code (IBC) [198]. Section 2409 covers glass in floors and sidewalks.
Laminated glass with a minimum of two sheets has to be used for such applications.
There are no requirements concerning impact resistance or post-breakage resistance.
u United Kingdom. If access onto the glass is required , the Health Safety and
Welfare regulations come into effect and testing for both soft and hard body impact
is mandatory. The post-breakage performance of the glass is tested by the ‘sand bag’
test. Advice on the test regimes and selection of the glass is available in [75] and
[173].
2.4.4 Railings and balustrades

Impact resistance, especially against human impact, is a key requirement for railings and
balustrades. Several accidental hazard scenarios have to be considered:
u Persons falling down or slipping through gaps in the barrier
u Injury due to glass fragments or sharp edges after glass breakage
u Injury by glass fragments falling on areas below that may be occupied by people.
Railings and balustrades can be divided into three groups:
u Category A — Full height glazing. Mostly glazing with continuous lateral support
and without handrail that acts as a wall or forms part of a wall.
u Category B — Cantilevered balustrade. The glass panels are clamped along their
lower edge. The handrail is attached to the upper edge.
u Category C — Balustrade with a glass infill panel. The glass infill panels may be
fixed by continuous lateral support along at least two edges or by point fixings. In
some countries, clamped or clipped infill panels are also possible.
A selection of international and national regulations on balustrades and railings are:

u Europe — EN 12600. Impact resistance requirements for flat glass in buildings

(e. g. railings and balustrades) are given in the European standard EN 12600:2002
[101]. The test simulates human body impact using a 50 kg mass wrapped by
two rubber tires (soft pendulum test). The test is intended to classify flat glass
products according to their impact resistance and mode of breakage (cf. Section 8.1).
However, the standard does not specify requirements for application therefore,
various additional national requirements exist in European countries. In most
countries (in contrast to Germany), impact resistance has to be verified for the
glazing rather than the whole assembly. This means that the glass may be tested in
a standardized frame instead of using the original components that will be used in
the building.
u Germany — TRAV. According to TRAV 2003 [322], the impact resistance of the
glass and its supporting system (including clamps, point fixings) has to be verified
in addition to standard structural design. Different glass types have to be used in
function of the balustrade category (A to C). There are two different methods for
impact resistance verification:
Soft pendulum test: As distinct from EN 12600:2002 [101], the experimental
setup and the specimen have to be equivalent to the original building unit
in terms of materials, support structure etc. The same standard pendulum is
used.
Verification by calculation: TRAV 2003 [322] contains tables with maximum
allowable stresses for various glass dimensions and thicknesses. These may
be used for railings and balustrades of categories A and C (continuous lat-
eral support along at least two edges). Furthermore, TRAV gives detailed
specifications of many standard railing and balustrade types with verified im-
pact resistance. The use of these standard details ensures conformity without
further verification.
u UK — BS 6180. BS 6180:1999 [48] contains requirements for barriers in and
around buildings. Actions have to be determined according to BS 6399-1:1996 [53].
Structural safety of all balustrade components must be verified. Different glass
types have to be used in function of the balustrade type. For impact performance,
the safety glazing recommendations in BS 6262-4:1994 [51] have to be taken into
account. Barriers with glass infill or cantilevered balustrades must comply with
impact classes. This is verified by soft pendulum tests according to BS 6206:1981
[49] (see Section 8.1.3).
u USA — IBC. Glass requirements are covered in Section 2407 ‘Glass in handrails
and guards’ of the International Building Code (IBC) [198]. Actions have to be
determined according to Section 1607.7 of the IBC. Different glass types have to
be used in function of the balustrade type. The impact class is determined by soft
pendulum tests according to CPSC 16 CFR 1201 [73], see (see Section 8.1.3).

Chapter
3
Fracture Strength of Glass Elements
3.1 Introduction
The aim of this chapter is to provide an in-depth understanding of the mechanisms of glass
fracture that underpin subsequent chapters and should be used as the basis for structural
design of glass.
The mechanical properties of glass stem from the molecular structure discussed
in Chapter 1 which, unlike most other construction materials, does not consist of a
geometrically regular network of crystals, but of an irregular network of silicon and
oxygen atoms with alkaline parts in between. The random molecular structure has no
slip planes or dislocations to allow macroscopic plastic flow before fracture; consequently,
glass is perfectly elastic at normal temperature and exhibits brittle fracture. This inability
to yield plastically before fracture means that the fracture strength of glass is very
sensitive to stress concentrations. Since surface flaws cause high stress concentrations,
and accurate characterization of the fracture strength of glass must incorporate the nature
and behaviour of such flaws. To this end, Section 3.2 discusses the stress corrosion that
causes existing surface flaws to grow slowly in size prior to failure, a phenomenon that
is often referred to as ‘subcritical crack growth’. This section is also a prerequisite for
subsequent sections.
Section 3.3 introduces quasi-static linear elastic fracture mechanics (LEFM) and
provides a mathematical model for determining the fracture strength of glass. This model,
called the ‘lifetime prediction model’, is derived from a mathematical description of a
glass element’s surface condition and of the growth and fracture of surface flaws through
LEFM and probability theory. The equations which are provided in the lifetime prediction
model can be used for predictive modelling and structural design. They take subcritical
crack growth, non-homogeneous, time-variant biaxial stress fields, arbitrary geometry and
arbitrary stress histories into account. While the lifetime prediction model described herein
is more complex than traditional semi-empirical models, it offers significant advantages
which are discussed in this section.
Although it is valid for very short loading times, the lifetime prediction model in
49
50 CHAPTER 3. FRACTURE STRENGTH OF GLASS ELEMENTS
Section 3.3 cannot be used to describe dynamic phenomena such as glass fracture or
the response of glass elements to impact loads. To deal with such phenomena, dynamic
fracture mechanics theory is required. Most aspects of this theory are of formidable
theoretical complexity and beyond the scope of this document. However, some of the
simplified empirical formulations are of practical interest especially for the diagnostic
interpretation of glass failures and are therefore presented in Section 3.4.
Because most of the glass used in construction is soda lime silica glass, the present
chapter refers to this glass type. The presented concepts and mathematical relations are
also applicable for other glass types, but the material parameters need to be adjusted (cf.
Chapter 1).
3.2 Stress corrosion and subcritical crack growth
In vacuum, the strength of glass is time-independent.1 In the presence of humidity, how-

ever, stress corrosion causes flaws to grow slowly when they are exposed to a positive crack
opening stress. This means that a glass element which is stressed below its momentary
strength will still fail after the time necessary for the most critical flaw to grow to its
critical size at that particular stress level. The momentary strength of a loaded glass
element therefore decreases with time, even if it is exposed to static loads only. This
phenomenon, which is fundamental for the structural use of glass, was already discovered
in 1899 by Grenet [178]. The growth of a surface flaw depends on the properties of the
flaw and the glass, the stress history that the flaw is exposed to, and the relationship
between crack velocity and stress intensity.
In the present document, the term ‘stress corrosion’ is used to refer to the chemical
phenomenon. The term ‘subcritical crack growth’ is used to refer to the consequence of
stress corrosion, i. e. the growth of surface flaws.2
3.2.1 Relationship between crack velocity and stress intensity

First systematic investigation of stress corrosion was conducted by Levengood [237]. An
explanation for the chemical process behind the phenomenon was put forward by Charles
and Hilling [64] and further developed by Michalske and Freiman [252]. This theory,
also known as the ‘classical stress corrosion theory’, involves the chemical reaction of a
water molecule with silica at the crack tip (Figure 3.1):3
Si-O-Si+H2 O → Si-OH+HO-Si (3.1)
According to this theory, the crack velocity scales with the kinetics of this chemical reaction.
Its activation energy depends on the local stress and on the radius of curvature at the
1
Even in vacuum, the resistance of many glasses is in fact slightly time-dependent. This effect, called ‘inert
fatigue’, is however of no practical relevance for structural engineering applications.
2
In academic publications, this distinction is not always made and other terms, such as ‘slow crack growth’,
‘static fatigue’, and ‘environmental fatigue’ are in use.
3
The classical interpretation involving a chemical reaction at the very tip of a crack is questioned by
Tomozawa [321]. As the diffusion of molecular water into the glass is activated by stress, he suggests that
this diffusion process and the modification of the glass properties in the crack tip area that it causes might
explain subcritical crack growth. A more in-depth discussion is beyond the scope of this document. The
interested reader should refer to specialized texts on this subject, e. g. [56, 170, 184, 252, 321, 338].

3.2. STRESS CORROSION AND SUBCRITICAL CRACK GROWTH 51
Glass Figure 3.1:

Stress corrosion, chemical reaction at
Si
the crack tip: (1) adsorption of water
Water Si Si
to Si–O bond, (2) concerted reaction
O
H O O involving simultaneous proton and
H H
H O H electron transfer, and (3) formation of
H surface hydroxyl groups [252].
O
O
Si
Si Si
1 2 3
crack tip. The theory involves a first order chemical process, which is consistent with
the observed linear correlation between the logarithm of the crack velocity v and the
logarithm of the humidity ratio H (except for very low H or v) [338].
Figure 3.2 shows the simplified, schematic relationship between crack velocity v and
stress intensity factor KI that is commonly used for glass lifetime prediction. For values of
KI close to the fracture toughness KIc (definition → p. 57) or even above, v is independent
of the environment and approaches a characteristic crack propagation speed (about
1 500 m/s for soda lime silica glasses) very rapidly. In a narrow region below KIc (region
III), the curve is very steep, v lying between 0.001 m/s and 1 m/s. In inert environments
(cf. Section 3.3.3), this curve would extrapolate linearly to lower crack velocity. In normal
environments, the behaviour strongly depends on the environmental conditions. The
empirical relationship
v = S · KIn , (3.2)
which was originally proposed by Evans and Wiederhorn [163], provides a good approxi-
mation for region I.4 The parameters S and n need to be determined from experiments.
The unit of S depends on the value of n. This can be avoided with the following equivalent
formulation (S = v0 · KIc−n ):
n
v = v0 KI /KIc (3.3)
The crack velocity parameter v0 has the units of speed (length/time), n is dimensionless.
When the v-KI -curve is plotted on logarithmic scales, v0 represents its position and n its
slope. KIc is a material constant that is known with a high level of precision and confidence
(cf. Section 3.3.1). Regions I and III are connected by region II. In this region, the kinetics
of the chemical reaction at the crack tip are no longer controlled by the activation of the
chemical process, but by the supply rate of water. It takes time for a water molecule to be
transported to the crack tip, such that a shortage in the supply of water occurs as the crack
velocity increases [338]. The crack velocity v is, therefore, essentially independent of KI
but depends on the amount of humidity in the environment. Below a certain threshold
stress intensity Kth (see Section 3.2.2), no crack growth occurs.
4
The exponential functions v = vi · eβ KI and v = vi · eβ(KI −KIc ) were also proposed to model the v-KI
relationship. In practice, the difference between a power law with a high exponent and an exponential
function is very small. An exponential function has the main advantage of being consistent with the
kinematics of the above-mentioned chemical reaction. Equation (3.2), however, allows for much simpler
calculations, which explains its predominant use.

Figure 3.2: log v

Idealized v-KI -relationship.
v = v 0 (KI / KIc )n III
log(v ) = n ⋅ log(KI) + log(v 0 ⋅ KIc− n) environment
Crack velocity, v
II
I vacuum
threshold
log KI
Kth KIB KIc
Stress intensity factor, KI
In view of the order of magnitude of glass elements in buildings (mm to m), the typical
depth of surface flaws (µm to mm) and the service life generally required, only the range
of extremely slow subcritical crack growth, region I, is relevant for determining the design
life of a glass element. The contribution of regions II and III to an element’s lifetime is
negligible.
3.2.2 Crack healing, crack growth threshold and hysteresis effect

In 1958, Levengood [237] found that aging has an effect on glass surface flaws. Further
experimental work in laboratory conditions showed that the strength of flawed specimens
increases during stress-free phases [317, 336]. Looking at it in more detail, this effect,
generally called crack healing, is a consequence of two phenomena, the crack growth
threshold and the hysteresis effect.
At stress intensities below the crack growth threshold5 Kth , no significant crack growth
occurs. For typical soda lime silica glass at a moderate pH value, Kth is about 0.2 to
0.3 MPa m0.5 (see Haldimann [187] for an overview of available data).
The crack growth threshold was originally explained by a rounding of the crack tip
(‘crack tip blunting’) at slow crack velocities [27, 64]. More recent investigations, however,
strongly support the hypothesis that alkali are leached out of the glass and that this
change in the chemical composition at the tip of the crack is responsible for the crack
growth threshold rather than a geometrical change (blunting). Observations of aged
indentation cracks by atomic force microscopy did not give any evidence of blunting.
Sodium containing crystallites were actually found on the surface of glass close to the tip
of the indentation crack. This is more consistent with alkali ions’ migration under the
high stress at the crack tip and their exchange with protons or hydronium ions6 from the
environment [171, 183, 256].
In alkali containing glasses, there is also a hysteresis effect: an aged crack will not
repropagate immediately on reloading. The hysteresis effect is convincingly explained by
renucleation of the aged crack in a plane different from the original one, as if the path of
5
Also known as ‘stress corrosion limit’, ‘crack growth limit’, ‘threshold stress intensity’, or ‘fatigue limit’.
6
A hydronium ion is the cation H3 O+ derived from protonation of water.

3.2. STRESS CORROSION AND SUBCRITICAL CRACK GROWTH 53
the crack has to turn around the area just in front of the former crack tip. This non-coplanar
re-propagation was directly observed by atomic force microscopy [195, 335, 339].
A comprehensive probabilistic crack propagation model, which accounts for the above-
mentioned effects, was proposed by Charles et al. [65].
Although its favourable influence can be considerable, crack healing has not been
taken into account (at least not explicitly) by design proposals to this day. Because of
the strong dependence on the environmental conditions, crack healing is difficult to
quantify. The threshold appears to depend strongly on the environmental conditions and
on the glass’s chemical composition. It is, for instance, more easily evidenced with alkali
containing glasses and in neutral or acidic environments, while there is no evidence of a
threshold in alkaline environments [177]. In static long-term outdoor tests, in contrast
to tests in the climatic chamber, no evidence of any substantial crack healing or of a
crack growth threshold was found [167]. For structural applications, in which safety is a
major concern, it therefore remains advisable not to take any threshold or healing effects into
account.
3.2.3 Influences on the relationship between stress intensity and crack growth
It is important to bear in mind that the relationship between stress intensity and crack
velocity is very sensitive to a number of aspects. A short overview is given in the following.
For more details, see [187].
u Humidity. As mentioned before, the water content of the surrounding medium7
strongly influences subcritical crack growth. The effect of an increasing water

content is essentially a parallel shift of regions I and II of the v-KI relationship
towards higher crack velocities [337].
u Temperature. An increasing temperature causes mainly a parallel shift of the curve
towards higher crack velocities. Furthermore, the slope decreases slightly [338].
u Corrosive media and pH value. The crack velocity generally increases as the pH
value of the surrounding medium increases. Furthermore, the pH value has a certain
effect on the slope of the v-KI relationship and a particularly strong influence on
the crack growth threshold Kth [170].
u Chemical composition of the glass. All parameters of subcritical crack growth are
influenced by the chemical composition of the glass [338].

u Loading rate. According to Haldimann [187], the v-K relationship does not only
I
depend on environmental conditions, but is also strongly loading rate dependent.
As mentioned before, stress corrosion requires humidity. If an element is loaded
rapidly, the diffusion process is not fast enough, so that a shortage in the supply
of water to the crack tip slows down stress corrosion and therefore the subcritical
growth of flaws. Consequently, the v-KI relationship of an element is shifted towards
lower crack velocities when loaded rapidly.
Figure 3.3 gives an overview of published v-KI -data8 [43, 90, 184, 195, 284, 285, 298,
302, 324, 338]. The following can be concluded:
7
It is actually the ratio of the actual partial pressure to the partial pressure at saturation. In air, this
corresponds to the relative humidity.
8
When modelling subcritical crack growth, the v-KI -relationship is generally assumed to be valid over the
full KI -range. This is why the curves that represent design models extend to the entire range of the figures’
axes.

100
Models proposed based on experimental data:
Richter (1974) - 50% RH - DCB (through crack)
10-2 Ullner (1993) - Air
Dwivedi & Green (1995) - 65% RH - 4PB dyn. fat. V
Dwivedi & Green (1995) - 65% RH - direct optical V
Crack velocity, v (m/s)
10-4
Design models:
Blank (1993) - 'summer' (16/4.5)
10 -6 Blank 1993 - 'winter' (16/8.2)
n = 16, v0 = 6 mm/s
10-8 Experimental data:

Hénaux & Creuzet (1997) - 50% RH - V - AFM
10 -10
10-12
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
Stress intensity factor, KI (MPa m0.5)
100
Models proposed based on experimental data:
Richter (1974) - DCB (through crack)
10 -2
Ritter et al. (1985) - dyn. fatigue (cross lab)
Sglavo et al. (1997) - cycl. fat. - V (ai+a)
Sglavo & Green (1999) - dyn. fat. - V (ai)
Crack velocity, v (m/s)
10-4 Sglavo & Green (1999) - dyn. fat. - V (a)

Ullner (1993)
10-6 Design models:

n = 16, v0 = 6 mm/s
10 -8 Experimental data:
Gy (2003) - as float (rcs = 0.75 MPa) - DT
Gy (2003) - special annealing (rcs = 0.25 MPa) - DT
10 -10
Wiederhorn and Bolz (1970) - Water - 90°C - DCB
10-12
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
Stress intensity factor, KI (MPa m0.5)
Figure 3.3: Crack growth data overview in air (above) and in water (below).
(V = Vickers indentation, ai = as indented, a = annealed, DT = double torsion test, DCB = double
cantilever beam test, dyn. fat. = dynamic fatigue, rcs = residual core stress.
u General. Crack velocity parameters vary widely and depend on several influences,
including environmental conditions and the loading rate. Fracture strength predic-
tions for service lives of many years are, therefore, of limited accuracy.
u Structural design. For structural design, a constant value of n = 16 is a reasonable
assumption. For general applications, v0 = 6 mm/s should be conservative9 . For
glass elements that are permanently immersed in water, a higher value of e. g.
v0 = 30 mm/s is more appropriate.
u Interpretation of experiments. Strength data from tests at ambient conditions are
inevitably dependent on the surface condition and on crack growth behaviour. The
large variability of the crack velocity parameters makes it very difficult to obtain
accurate surface condition information from tests at ambient conditions [187].
Inaccurate estimation of the crack velocity during testing can yield unsafe design
parameters. Testing at inert conditions is, therefore, preferable (Section 6.4).
9
Further differentiation of environmental conditions, e. g. considering summer and winter conditions, is
not recommended for modelling purposes. The potential difference between the two cases is very small
compared to the scatter of the data. The definition of two parameter sets would therefore be rather
arbitrary and would not necessarily increase the accuracy of the model. The complexity of the calculation
process, on the other hand, would be increased considerably.

3.3. QUASI-STATIC FRACTURE MECHANICS 55
3.3 Quasi-static fracture mechanics
Linear elastic fracture mechanics (LEFM) provides a good model for describing the brittle
fracture of glass (see Section 3.1). In LEFM, mechanical material behaviour is modelled
by looking at cracks. A crack is an idealized model of a flaw having a defined geometry
and lying in a plane. It may either be located on the surface (surface crack) or embedded
within the material (volume crack). For structural glass elements, only surface cracks need
to be considered. Figure 3.4 shows the fundamental terms used to describe such cracks.
Figure 3.4:
Fundamental terms used to describe surface cracks.
glass thickness
(h)
crack crack tip

front
σn crack depth (a)
crack σn
length
3.3.1 Stress intensity and fracture toughness

The theoretical strength of a material is determined by the forces of the interatomic bonds.
Orowan proposed that the stress necessary to break a bond, known as Orowan stress, is
given by
p
σm = Eγ/r0 (3.4)
where γ is the fracture surface energy, r0 is the equilibrium spacing of the atoms and E is
Young’s modulus. With E = 70 GPa, r0 = 0.2 nm and γ = 3 J m−2 , we obtain a theoretical
strength of 32 GPa for a typical silica glass [305]. In practise the tensile strength of
annealed soda lime silica glass is much lower. The large variations between theoretical
and practical strength were explained by Griffith [179], whose experiments on glass form
the basis of modern fracture mechanics. Griffith argued that fracture did not start from
a pristine surface, but from pre-existing flaws, known as ‘Griffith flaws’, on that surface.
Such flaws are not necessarily visible to the naked eye, but they severely weaken brittle
solids because they produce very high stress concentrations. As explained in Section 3.2,
surface flaws in glass grow with time when loaded, the crack growth rate being a function
of several parameters.
In 1913, Inglis [199] recognized that a slot, notch or hole in a metal plate tends to
reduce its tensile strength by an amount that is more than would result simply from
the reduction in load-bearing cross-sectional area. He demonstrated that the stress
magnification near the tip of a narrow elliptical discontinuity whereof the long diameter
2a lies perpendicular to the applied stress σ E may be approximated by
p
σtip = 2σ E a/ρ , (3.5)

where ρ is the radius of curvature at the crack tip. Clearly with atomically sharp flaws, ρ
is very small and σ E is thus magnified by several orders of magnitude such that σtip can
approach the molecular bond strength even if the applied stresses are relatively small.
Based on Inglis’ work and experiments on glass specimens, Griffith [179] modelled a
static crack as a reversible thermodynamic system. In the configuration that minimizes
the total free energy of the system, the crack is in a state of equilibrium and thus on the
verge of extension. The total energy U in the system is
U = UM + US (3.6)
where UM is the mechanical energy (the sum of the strain potential energy stored in the
elastic medium and the potential energy of the outer applied loading system) and US is
the free energy expended in creating new crack surfaces. Therefore UM favours crack
extension, whereas US opposes it. The equilibrium requirement dU/dc = 0 is known as
the Griffith energy-balance concept. From this, Griffith calculated the critical conditions at
which instantaneous failure occurs as
p
σf = 2Eγ/(πac ) (3.7)
where σf is the failure stress and ac is the critical crack length.

Irwin [201] extended the original Griffith energy-balance concept to provide a means
of characterizing a material in terms of its brittleness or fracture toughness. He introduced
the concept of the stress intensity factor (SIF) K, which represents the elastic stress
intensity near the crack tip. The stress intensity factor for mode I loading10 , KI , is given
by11 p
KI = Y · σn · πa (3.8)
where σn is the nominal tensile stress normal to the crack’s plane, Y is a correction factor,
and a represents the size of the crack (i. e. the crack depth or half of the crack length).12
The correction factor Y 13 depends on the crack’s depth and geometry, the specimen
geometry, the stress field and the proximity of the crack to the specimen boundaries.
While the dependence on the specimen geometry, the stress field and the crack depth is
small for shallow surface cracks and can generally be ignored, the dependence on the
crack geometry and the proximity to boundaries is more significant. Y is therefore often
called the geometry factor . A long, straight-fronted plane edge crack in a semi-infinite
specimen has a geometry factor of Y = 1.12. For half-penny shaped cracks in a semi-
infinite specimen, the geometry factor is in the range of 0.637 to 0.713, depending on the
approach used [187].
Instantaneous failure of a glass element occurs when the elastic stress intensity KI due
to tensile stress at the tip of one crack reaches or exceeds a critical value. This critical
10
Opening mode, i. e. normal separation of the crack walls under the action of tensile stresses.
11
In scientific publications, the energy release rate G is often used instead of the stress intensity factor KI . For
an elastic material and crack mode I, it is G = KI2 /E 0 with E 0 = E for plane stress state and E 0 = E/(1 − ν 2 )
for plane strain state [201]. E is Young’s modulus and ν is Poisson’s ratio. In the case of shallow surface
cracks, a plane stress state may be assumed.
12
Such simple stress intensity considerations are based on the assumption of a homogeneous distribution of
the nominal stress within the section. Although this is generally not the case in structural glass applications,
the equations are good approximations because the depth of the cracks is small compared to the material
thickness, such that the stress variation over a crack’s depth is small.
13 p
Caution when using published data, where Y is often used as a synonym for Y π.

value is a material constant known as the plane strain fracture toughness or the critical
stress intensity factor KIc . This failure condition is called Irwin’s fracture criterion and is
expressed as:
KI ≥ KIc (3.9)
The criterion assumes pure mode I fracture of a crack exposed to uniaxial tension normal
to the crack’s plane. More general cases are discussed in Section 3.3.5.
The fracture toughness KIc can be considered to be a material constant. It does
not depend significantly on influences other than the material itself. Table 3.5 gives
an overview of published values for modern soda lime silica glasses. A value of KIc =
0.75 MPa m0.5 can be used for all practical purposes.
Table 3.5:
Source K Ic
Fracture toughness KIc
(MPa m0.5 )
of soda lime silica glass
Wiederhorn [337] 0.82 at room temperature.
Atkins and Mai [23] 0.78
Gehrke et al. [170] 0.78
Menčík [251]; from a review of published data 0.72 – 0.82
Ullner [324] 0.76
3.3.2 Heat treated glass

The term heat treated glass includes any glass type that has been processed in order to
induce residual stresses (cf. Section 1.3.2), namely heat strengthened glass and fully
tempered glass.
The in-plane surface stress normal to a crack’s plane (index ‘n’), also known as the
crack opening stress, is:
σn (τ,~r, ϕ) = σ E,n (τ,~r, ϕ) + σr,n (~r, ϕ) + σp,n (τ,~r, ϕ) (3.10)

σE surface stress due to actions
σr residual surface stress due to tempering (‘prestress’)
σp surface stress due to external constraints or prestressing
τ point in time
~r crack location
ϕ crack orientation
A crack can only grow or fail if it is exposed to tensile stress, i. e. if σn (t,~r, ϕ) > 0. By
considering negative σn as σn = 0 in crack growth calculations, the effect of residual
stresses can be accounted for in a simple and consistent way and the same design equations
or algorithms can be used for all glass types.
From Equation (3.10) follows that the fracture strength of heat treated glass is the
sum of the absolute value of the residual (compressive) surface stress and of the strength
of the glass itself, called inherent strength henceforth. Only the latter is influenced by
subcritical crack growth and depends, therefore, on time and environmental conditions
(cf. Section 3.2). The residual stress is constant.

If a heat treated glass element is designed such that (T is the design life)
max σ E,n ≤ −(σr,n + σp,n ) ∀(~r, ϕ) , (3.11)

τ∈[0,T ]
no surface decompression occurs, i. e. no surface crack is ever exposed to tensile stress

during the entire service life. Such an element does not show any size-dependent, time-
dependent or environment-dependent effects.
3.3.3 Inert strength

From Equation (3.8) and Equation (3.9), we can determine the stress intensity required
for a crack to extend immediately and cause failure:
p
Y · σn · π · a ≥ KIc (3.12)
With this, the stress causing failure of a crack of depth a, the critical stress σc , is
KIc
σc (t) = p (3.13)
Y · π · a(t)
while the depth of a crack failing at the stress σn , the critical crack depth ac , is
2
KIc

ac (t) = p . (3.14)
σn (t) · Y π
Both the stress σn and the crack depth a are time-dependent. Therefore σc and ac are also
time-dependent. The critical stress represents the resistance of a crack to instantaneous
failure (i. e. failure that is not triggered by subcritical crack growth) and is therefore
called inert strength henceforth. It is plotted in Figure 3.6 as a function of the crack depth
using typical parameters for a long, macroscopic surface crack of small depth in a glass
plate.
Figure 3.6: 140

Strength of a single crack at inert con-
120
dition as a function of its depth.
Inert strength, σc (MPa)
100
80
60
40
20
Y = 1.12, KIc = 0.75 MPa m0.5
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
Crack depth, a (µm)

3.3.4 Lifetime of a single flaw

Assuming the ordinary differential equation of crack growth (cf. Equation (3.3))
n
v = da/dt = v0 KI /KIc (3.15)
to be valid over the full range of KI (which means neglecting the crack growth threshold),
using the stress intensity factor from Equation (3.8) and assuming n to be constant,
variable separation yields
Z a(t) Z t
p n
− 2n
a da = v0 · KIc−n · Y π · σnn (τ) dτ (3.16)
ai 0
with ai being the initial crack depth (ai = a(t = 0)). The time-dependent size of a single
crack exposed to the crack opening stress history σ(t) is thus:
2
Z t 2−n
2−n 2−n p n
a(t) = ai 2
+ · v0 · KIc−n · Y π · σnn (τ) dτ (3.17)
2 0
Variable separation and integration over the time interval [0, T ] and the corresponding
crack depths [ai , a] gives the following basic relationship:
Z T a (n−2)/2
2 i
σn (τ) dτ =
n
p n (n−2)/2 1 − a (3.18)
0 (n − 2) · v0 · KIc · (Y π) · ai
−n
The crack depth at failure af is the critical crack depth (Equation (3.14)) for the failure
stress σ(t f )
2
KIc

af = p (3.19)
σn (t f ) · Y π
with t f being the time to failure or lifetime of the crack in question. This can now be
inserted into Equation (3.18). As n is large (≈ 16), the expression in square brackets
in Equation (3.18) approaches 1 for long lifetimes with af ai . Thus the following
simplified expression may be obtained:
Z tf
2
σnn (τ) dτ = p (n−2)/2
(3.20)
0 (n − 2) · v0 · KIc · (Y π)n · ai
−n
Given a stress history, this widely used relationship enables the calculation of the lifetime
of a crack given its initial depth or the allowable initial crack depth given its required
lifetime. The left hand side of Equation (3.20) is called risk integral or ‘Brown’s integral’,
because it was first used by Brown [46] to characterize damage accumulation in glass.
While Equation (3.20) is very convenient, it suffers from its limit of validity. If
crack velocity is slow and/or the loading time is very short (near-inert conditions, see
Section 6.4), a crack’s strength as obtained from this equation converges on infinity. This
makes, of course, no sense. A crack’s strength cannot be higher than the inert strength.
The reason for the problem is that the crack depth at failure is not much bigger than the
initial crack depth in the aforementioned conditions. In fact, in perfectly inert conditions,

both depths are identical. The assumption of af ai used to obtain Equation (3.20) is
therefore not valid in such conditions.
From Equation (3.17) and Equation (3.19), a formulation of general validity can be
obtained:
 p n−2 Zτ  2
σn (τ) · Y π
2−n
n−2 −n
p n
ãc (τ) =  + · v0 · KIc · (Y π) · σn (τ̃) dτ̃
n
(3.21)
KIc 2 0
The crack depth ãc (τ) is the initial depth of a crack that fails at the point in time τ when
exposed to the crack-opening stress history σn (τ). The choice of the symbol will become
clear in Section 3.3.5. The disadvantage of Equation (3.21) is that it depends not only
on the risk integral but also on the momentary stress σn (τ). While the risk integral is
monotonously increasing, in general the momentary stress is not. Therefore, the minimum
initial crack depth min(ãc (τ)), which is relevant for design, does not necessarily occur at
the end of the stress history (τ = T ) but may occur at any τ ∈ [0, T ]. A crack does not
fail if ai < min ãc (τ).
τ∈[0,T ]
Figure 3.7 quantitatively illustrates the behaviour of a surface crack using Equa-
tion (3.21). The curves show the constant stress that causes failure as a function of the
loading time and for different initial crack depths. The figure is plotted for v0 = 6 mm/s,
which is the conservative assumption for structural design purposes given in Section 3.2.
It can be seen that the strength of cracks is strongly time-dependent. Furthermore, the
long-term strength of cracks with an initial depth in the order of 100 µm or more is low.
Figure 3.7: 80
Initial crack depth:
70 inert strength
Strength of a surface crack as
ai = 30 μm
a function of the loading time 0.001s
ai = 60 μm
60 0.01s
Constant stress, σ (MPa)
ai = 100 μm
and the initial crack depth.
The figure is based on a conser-
50 0.1s ai = 200 μm
vative assumption with regard 1s ai = 300 μm
to the crack growth behaviour, 40 10s
which is suitable for structural 1min
30 10min
design. 1h
1d
20 30d
1yr 5yr
50yr
10
Y=1.12, KIc=0.75 MPa m0.5, v0=6 mm/s, n=16
0
10-4 10-2 100 102 104 106 108 1010
Time to failure, tf (s)
Equivalent static stress and resistance
The simplified expression in Equation (3.20) is generally sufficient for structural design
(but not necessarily for the interpretation of test results, see Chapter 6). This equation
means that, if n is constant, two stress histories σ(1) (τ) τ ∈ [0, t 1 ] and σ(2) (τ) τ ∈ [0, t 2 ]

R t1 R t2
cause the same crack growth if 0 σ(1) n
(τ) dτ = 0 σ(2)
n
(τ) dτ. One can, therefore, define
a t 0 -equivalent stress σ t 0 as follows: 14
i 1/n
T
!1/n  
Z J h
1 1 X
σt0 = σ (τ) dτ
n
≈ σt j · t j 
n
(3.22)
t0 0
t 0 j=1
This equivalent stress is the stress that would, when applied during the reference time
period t 0 , cause the same amount of crack growth as the original stress history σ(τ). The
right side of EquationP(3.22) caters for discrete stress histories consisting of J time periods
of duration t j (T = t j ) and constant stress σ t j . The same approach can be used for a
crack’s resistance by defining the t 0 -equivalent resistance:
!1/n
1 2
σR,t 0 = (3.23)
t 0 (n − 2) · v0 · K −n · (Y pπ)n · a(n−2)/2
Ic i
This is the static stress that a crack can resist for a reference time period t 0 (usually
t 0 = 1 s, 3 s or 60 s). It is independent of the applied load and completely characterizes
the load resistance of a given crack (or an element whose load capacity is governed by
this crack) for given environmental conditions (v0 , n), initial crack depth (ai ) and crack
geometry (Y ). A structural safety verification based on this approach entails ensuring
that:
σ t 0 ≤ σR,t 0 (3.24)
The relationship between lifetimes and applied constant stresses of two identical cracks
(ai , Y ) in identical conditions (v0 , n, KIc ) follows directly from Equation (3.22):
σ2
1/n
σ2
n
t1 t1

= or = (3.25)
σ1 t2 t2 σ1
Inserting σ(τ) = σ̇const · τ into Equation (3.22), the relationship between the lifetime of
two identical cracks (ai , Y ) in identical conditions (v0 , n, KIc ) loaded at constant stress
rates σ̇1 and σ̇2 is obtained:
n
t1 σ̇2 n+1
= (3.26)
t2 σ̇1
Since these equations are independent of v0 , they can be used to determine n. Plotting
the failure stress as a function of the stress rate on logarithmic scales results in a slope of
1/(n + 1). This allows the parameter n to be determined from experiments with variable
stress rate. It should not be overlooked, however, that while the equations are independent
of v0 , their validity is confined to cases in which flaws and conditions, including v0 , are
identical during all tests. Since v0 can be strongly stress rate dependent (cf. Section 3.2),
this method should be used with caution.
14
For hand calculations with simple stress histories, it is useful to express the T -equivalent stress σ T
in terms of a chosen, characteristic value σch and a shape coefficient g with σ T = g 1/n σch and g =
RT n
T −1 0 σ(τ)/σch dτ. For a constant stress σconst , the coefficients are σch = σconst and g = 1. For a
constant stress rate (σ(τ) = σ̇const · τ), it is g = 1/(n + 1) and σch = max(σ(τ)). Values for other common
stress histories are provided in [251].

3.3.5 Lifetime of a glass element with a random surface flaw population

Starting point and hypotheses
Section 3.3.4 discussed the lifetime of a single crack. For several cases of practical
relevance, this is an appropriate way of modelling the surface condition of structural glass
elements. For others, however, it is not (see Chapter 6). Let us consider a simple yet
common case: as-received glass, i. e. glass as it is delivered to the client. As stated in
Section 1.2.2, the surface contains a large number of mechanical flaws of varying severity,
which are not necessarily visible to the naked eye. This surface condition can much
better be represented by a statistical approach, namely a random surface flaw population
(RSFP). The mathematical relations from Section 3.3.4 need, therefore, to be extended
to describe glass elements in which resistance is governed by such a RSFP. Only a very
succinct derivation is presented in the following. For more information, the interested
reader should refer to the detailed derivation provided by Haldimann [187].
In addition to the hypotheses used to predict the lifetime of a single flaw in Sec-
tion 3.3.4, a few additional hypotheses are required for the present case:
1. The material contains a large number of natural flaws of variable depth.
2. The crack depth is a random variable15 that can be represented by a statistical
distribution.
3. The individual flaws do not influence each other.16
4. A glass element fails when the first flaw fails.
5. All crack locations and orientations have the same probability of occurrence.
6. Pure mode I crack propagation and failure represents the actual multimodal be-
haviour with sufficient accuracy.
For an in-depth assessment of the hypotheses used in Section 3.3.4 and the present section,
see [187, Chapter 5].
In addition to linear elastic fracture mechanics, the present section makes use of
fundamental work in the fields of theory of probability and strength of materials, including
[28, 29, 162, 331, 332].
Constant, uniform, uniaxial stress
In order to make the derivation as clear and understandable as possible, two more very
restrictive assumptions are made to start with, but will be dropped in the course of the
generalization:
1. The orientation of all flaws is identical and perpendicular to the homogeneous
tensile stress σ.
2. There is no subcritical crack growth.
15
One could also consider the strength of the flaws as the basic random variable. The choice is irrelevant
because both quantities can be expressed in terms of each other using linear elastic fracture mechanics.
16
This assumption is conservative. The presence of cracks modifies the stress field within the material. If the
length of a surface crack is similar to, or longer than, the distance separating cracks, it induces a shielding
of the stress at the neighbouring crack tip. This effect can reduce crack growth and increase lifetime [24].

With a constant stress and no subcritical crack growth, the crack depth a and the critical
crack depth ac (cf. Section 3.3.3) are both constant. The failure probability of a crack is
simply the probability that its random size a is larger than the critical crack depth ac :
Z ∞
(1)
Pf,inert (a) = P a ≥ ac = f a (a) da = 1 − Fa ac

(3.27)
ac
Fa is the cumulative distribution function (CDF), f a the probability density function (PDF)
of the crack depth. The strength distribution mainly depends on the distribution of the
larger flaws. Assuming that the mean number of flaws is large, the mathematical theory
of extreme values applies and shows that the asymptotic behaviour of the crack depth
distribution can be described accurately by a power law. The probability density function
(PDF) of the crack depth a is thus (∝ means ‘proportional to’, r is a parameter):
f a (a) ∝ a−r (3.28)

R
The CDF of the crack depth Fa = f a is a Pareto distribution:
¨
0 for a ≤ a0
Fa (a) = (3.29)
1 − (a0 /a) r−1 for a > a0
For normalization reasons of the CDF (Fa = 1 for a → ∞), a lower limit a0 for the crack
depth a has to be introduced. Since very small cracks are irrelevant for failure, the actual
value of a0 is unimportant. Equation (3.29) sufficiently describes the crack distribution in
the range of relevant crack depths.
An element fails if any of the flaws fail, or survives if all flaws survive. The survival
probability of a glass element is, therefore, the product of the survival probabilities of
all flaws. By considerable rearrangement but without introducing additional simplifying
assumptions, the inert failure probability Pf,inert of a glass element can be found:
σ
m0
A

Pf,inert (σ) = 1 − exp − (3.30)
A0 θ0
KIc
θ0 = 1/m p p m0 = 2(r − 1) (3.31)
M0 0 · Y π · a0
The parameters θ0 and m0 solely depend on the surface flaw population and are therefore
true material parameters. They can be determined from tests (see Section 6.4.2). High
values of m0 represent a narrow distribution of the crack depths and therefore of inert
strengths. High values of θ0 represent a high mean and wide distribution of inert
strengths. Equation (3.30) can be rearranged to take on the form of a two-parameter
Weibull distribution with scale parameter θinert and shape parameter m0 :
σ
m0
Pf,inert (σ) = 1 − exp − (3.32)
θinert
−1/m0
A
θinert = θ0 (3.33)
A0

For two elements with surface areas A1 and A2 exposed to tensile stress, it is:
θinert,A1
1/m0
A2
= (3.34)
θinert,A2 A1
This ratio is commonly referred to as size effect. The influence of the size effect is small
for high values of m0 (small scatter of strength) and large for small values of m0 (large
scatter).
From Equation (3.32), the reference inert strength f0,inert (Pf,t , θ0 , m0 ), a quantity that
will be useful when discussing structural design, can be defined:
1/m0
f0,inert (Pf,t , θ0 , m0 ) = θ0 − ln(1 − Pf,t ) (3.35)
The physical meaning of f0,inert is as follows: A glass surface of area A0 = 1 m2 fails with
probability Pf,t when exposed to a uniformly distributed crack opening surface stress
f0,inert at inert conditions (see Section 6.4). The reference inert strength depends on the
target failure probability and the glass surface condition only. It does not depend on the
glass type (because it refers to the crack opening stress) or on crack velocity parameters
(because it refers to inert conditions).
Extension to non-uniform, biaxial stress fields
In a non-uniform stress field, the stress σ depends on the point on the surface ~r = (x, y).
Equation (3.30) can be extended accordingly by integrating over infinitesimal surface
elements dA of constant stress. To be able to account for random crack orientation in a
biaxial stress field, a multimodal failure criterion needs to be chosen. Published research
suggests that the simplest failure criterion, pure mode I fracture, gives the best agreement
with experimental results [187]. This simply means that a crack fails due to unstable crack
propagation if KI > KIc , that the mode I-equivalent stress is equal to the stress component
perpendicular to the crack and that the mode I geometry factor Y can be used. With this
notation, Equation (3.14) remains valid even for biaxial stress fields.
For a surface crack of orientation ϕ in plane stress state (σz = τz x = τz y = 0), the
stress component normal to the crack is
σn = σ1 cos2 ϕ + σ2 sin2 ϕ (3.36)
where σ1 and σ2 are the major and minor in-plane principal stresses (σ1 ≥ σ2 ) and ϕ is
the crack orientation (a crack with ϕ = 0 ⇒ is parallel to the direction of σ1 )
Since glass is a homogeneous, isotropic material, it may be assumed that all crack
locations ~r = (x, y) and crack orientations ϕ have the same probability of occurrence
as long as no directional scratching is introduced. The probability density functions for
a crack’s location and orientation are thus both uniform distributions ( fA(~r) = 1/A and
fϕ (ϕ) = 1/π), such that the probability of finding a crack of orientation ϕ within the
infinitesimally small surface area dA at the point ~r on the surface is Pϕ,~r = 1/AdA· 1/π dϕ.
With this, the inert failure probability of an element with a random number of randomly
distributed and randomly oriented surface cracks is [187]:
( Z π/2 )
σn (~r, ϕ) m0
Z
1 2

Pf,inert = 1 − exp − dAdϕ (3.37)
A0 A π ϕ=0 θ0

Extension to time-dependent loading
In the absence of subcritical crack growth, a crack fails at the point in time t if its depth a
is larger than the momentary critical crack depth ac (t) (cf. Section 3.3.3). The probability
that an individual crack will fail at time t is thus:

(1)
Pf,inert (t) = P ∃τ ∈ [0, t] : a ≥ ac (τ) = P a ≥ min ac (τ)

(3.38)
τ∈[0,t]
With this and the cumulative distribution function of the crack depth from Equation (3.29),
the failure probability for time-dependent loading, but still without subcritical crack
growth, can be found [187]:
  m0 
max σn (τ,~r, ϕ)

 1
Z Z π/2
2  τ∈[0,t] 
Pf,inert (t) = 1 − exp − dAdϕ (3.39)

 A0 π θ0
 
ϕ=0

A
Extension to account for subcritical crack growth
Subcritical crack growth (cf. Section 3.2) makes the surface flaw population time-
dependent. Compared to Equation (3.38), not only the critical, but also the momentary,
crack depth is now time-dependent:
(1)
Pf (t) = P ∃τ ∈ [0, t] : a(τ) ≥ ac (τ)

(3.40)
The criterion for the initial crack depth given in Equation (3.21) enables Equation (3.40)
to be expressed as:

(1)
Pf (t) = P ∃τ ∈ [0, t] : ai ≥ ãc (τ) = P ai ≥ min ãc (τ)

(3.41)
τ∈[0,t]
This means that instead of a criterion for the momentary crack depth a(τ), there is
now a criterion for the initial crack depth ai . One can, therefore, proceed in the same
way as above, where the crack depth was time-independent and thus always equal to
ai . Through considerable rearrangement but without introducing additional simplifying
assumptions, an expression for the time-dependent failure probability of a general glass
element that takes subcritical crack growth, non-homogeneous time-variant biaxial stress
fields, arbitrary geometry and arbitrary stress histories into account, can be found [187]:
   1
m0 
σn (τ,~r, ϕ) n−2
  n−2
+
    
 π/2    
θ0
 Z Z    
 1

2  
   
τ
 
Pf (t) = 1 − exp −  max  dAdϕ
  Z 
A0 π τ∈[0,t]  1  
σnn (τ̃,~r, ϕ) dτ̃

  
 

ϕ=0
U · θ0n−2

 A
 
  
 

    
0
(3.42)

A0 unit surface area, (A0 = 1 m2 )

A surface area of the glass element (both faces)
t point in time
σn (τ,~r, ϕ) in-plane surface stress component normal to a crack of orientation ϕ at the
point ~r(x, y) on the surface and at time τ (cf. Equation (3.36))
θ0 , m0 surface condition parameters as defined
in Equation (3.31), to be determined
from experiments; θ0 = stress, m0 = none

U combined coefficient containing parameters

related to fracture mechanics and
subcritical crack growth; U = 2 KIc2 / (n − 2) · v0 · Y 2 π ; [U] = stress2 · time
KIc fracture toughness (cf. Section 3.3.1)
v0 , n crack velocity parameters (cf. Section 3.2.1)
Y geometry factor (cf. Section 3.3.1)
For an in-depth discussion of Equation (3.42), the interested reader should refer to [187,
in particular Chapter 5].
Simplification for structural design
The following simplifications are appropriate for the vast majority of common structural
glass design tasks (see [187, Chapter 5]):
u Calculating the failure probability on the basis of the risk integral is an approxima-
tion of sufficient accuracy.

u The crack growth threshold can be neglected.
u An equibiaxial stress field may be assumed.
These assumptions enable the model from Section 3.3.5 to be simplified substantially.
Using the t 0 -second major principal stress (cf. Equation (3.22))
Z t 1/n
1
σ1,t 0 (t,~r) = σ1n (τ,~r) dτ , (3.43)
t0 0
Equation (3.42) simplifies to
 
m0 Z
 1 t0 n−2
n m0 
Pf (t) = 1 − exp σ1,t 0 (t,~r) n−2 dA .

− (3.44)
 A0 U · θ0n−2 A

However, this is just a model and not a design equation. For design, the failure probability
is not a result but a target value. This means that the target failure probability needs to
be introduced as an additional parameter. Furthermore, the standard verification format
that engineers are used to involves the comparison of a resistance term to an action term.
Equation (3.44) needs to be reformulated accordingly.
The first step is to define a uniformly distributed stress σ1eq,t 0 that would have the
R
same effect as the actual stress distribution, namely A σ1,t m̄
0
dA = A· σ1eq,t
m̄
0
. Using the
combined parameter m̄ = n m0 /(n − 2), this equivalent uniformly distributed stress is:
Z 1/m̄
1
σ1eq,t 0 = σ m̄
dA (3.45)
A A 1,t 0

Secondly, this stress value can be further standardized by defining the equivalent stress
that would have the same effect when acting on the unit surface area A0 = 1 m2 instead
of A. This yields the equivalent t 0 -second uniform stress on the unit surface area (in short:
equivalent reference stress):
1/m̄ Z 1/m̄
A 1

σ̄ = σ1eq,t 0 ,A0 = σ1eq,t 0 = σ1,t
m̄
dA (3.46)
A0 A0 A
0
Inserting this into Equation (3.44) and introducing one more combined parameter (k̄)
yields:
¦ ©
Pf (t) = 1 − exp −k̄σ̄ m̄ (3.47)
m0
n m0 t0 n−2
m̄ = k̄ = (3.48)
(n − 2) U · θ0n−2
Provided that the stress history of all sub-surfaces is known, σ̄ can be evaluated for any
conditions. Rearrangement yields a standard failure criterion:
σ̄ < f0 (Pf,t ) (3.49)

−1/n 1/n
t0 U

1/m̄ (n−2)/n
f0 (Pf,t ) = − ln(1 − Pf,t ) · = f0,inert · (3.50)
U · θ0n−2 t0
The reference inert strength f0,inert is defined in Equation (3.35) and U is defined in
Equation (3.41). The resistance term f0 (Pf,t ), called reference ambient strength hereafter,
is a function of the target failure probability Pf,t and has the following physical meaning:
The failure probability of a glass element with surface area A0 = 1 m2 that is exposed to a
uniformly distributed crack opening surface stress f0 for t 0 = 1 s at ambient conditions is
Pf,t . It is important to be aware of the parameter dependencies:
u The equivalent reference stress σ̄ is a function of the loading history (intensity and
shape), the residual stress σr , the element surface area A, the exponential crack
velocity parameter n and the surface condition parameter m0 .
u The reference inert strength f0,inert is a function of the target failure probability Pf,t
and of the surface condition parameters θ0 and m0 only. The reference ambient
strength f0 depends additionally on the crack velocity parameters v0 and n. In
contrast to common measures for glass resistance (cf. Chapter 4), however, it is
independent of the loading history, the surface area A and the residual stress σr .
The lifetime prediction model from Equation (3.42) was already simplified consid-
erably above. The quantification of the equivalent reference stress (Equation (3.46)),
however, still requires a transient finite element analysis. This is unproblematic for re-
search activities, for simple loading histories and for the interpretation of experimental
data. For application in practice, however, such analyses are often too complex and
time-consuming . It is, therefore, pertinent to discuss how and under what conditions
they can be avoided.
A time-dependent non-uniform stress field σ(τ,~r) can be expressed in terms of a
representative stress σ̆(τ) at one point on the surface and a dimensionless stress distribution

function c(τ,~r):
σ(τ,~r)

σ(τ,~r) = σ̆(τ) · = σ̆(τ) · c(τ,~r) (3.51)
σ̆(τ)
The maximum stress on an element σmax (τ) is generally a sensible choice for the rep-
resentative stress σ̆(τ). It is important to bear in mind that σ(τ,~r) refers to the crack
opening stress (cf. Section 3.3.2), such that c(τ,~r) = σ(τ,~r)/σ̆(τ) is equal to zero in
compressed regions of the surface.
The dimensionless stress distribution function allows for the rearrangement of Equa-
tion (3.46) as follows:
 Z  Z t m̄/n  1/m̄
1 1
σ̄ =   · (σ̆(τ) · c(τ,~r))n dτ  dA (3.52)
A0 A t0 0
If c(τ,~r) is independent of the load level represented by the time-dependent representative

stress σ̆(τ) and therefore independent of the time τ, it can be isolated from the time-
integral. This allows the time-integral and the area-integral to be separated such that the
equivalent reference stress σ̄ can be expressed as follows:
Z
−1/m̄
σ̄ = A0 · σ̆ t 0 · Ā 1/m̄
with Ā = c(~r)m̄ dA (3.53)
A
σ̆ t 0 is the t 0 -second equivalent representative stress (calculated from σ̆(τ) using Equa-
tion (3.22)). The equivalent area Ā (also known as the effective area) is the surface area
of a glass element that fails with the same probability, when exposed to the uniform
representative stress σ̆, as an element with surface area A fails when exposed to the
non-uniform stress field σ(~r). Ā can be defined for ambient and inert conditions alike,
with m̄ being n m0 /(n − 2) and m0 respectively.
The formulation in Equation (3.53) is of particular interest: It enables, for instance,
convenient design aids to be created in order to avoid transient finite element analyses for
common design tasks. In fact, all current glass design methods assume Equation (3.53) to
be valid, without declaring this assumption or discussing the conditions required for its
validity. It should, however, be noted that Equation (3.53) is only valid if Ā and therefore
the stress distribution function c(τ,~r) are constant for all τ ∈ [0, t].
These findings allow the following conclusions to be drawn:
ê General conditions. Geometric non-linearity (e. g. because plates undergo deforma-
tions larger than their thickness), residual stress (σr ), external constraints (σp ), and
actions that vary not only in intensity but also in shape make the dimensionless stress
distribution function c and therefore the equivalent area Ā depend on the represen-
tative stress and therefore on time. Equation (3.53) is not valid in these conditions
and there is no simple way to superimpose loads or to consider load duration effects.
Therefore, Equation (3.46) must be solved.
ê Conditions in which no transient analysis is required. Equation (3.53) allows
transient analyses to be avoided if Ā and therefore the stress distribution function
c(τ,~r) are constant for all τ ∈ [0, t]. This requires the following two conditions to be
satisfied:

1. The decompressed surface area remains constant. This is the case if σ(τ,~r) >
0 ∀(τ,~r) or if σ(τ,~r) ≤ 0 ∀(τ,~r). The first case occurs, for instance, on the
tension face of annealed glass panes (σr ≈ 0) exposed to a uniform lateral load.
A typical example for the second case are heat treated glass elements that are
designed such that no surface decompression occurs (cf. Section 3.3.2).
2. The major principal stress is proportional to the load at all points on the surface. This
requires in particular: a) linear elastic material behaviour, b) no (or negligible)
geometrically non-linear behaviour, and c) variation of the applied load intensity
only (but not of the load shape).
Under these conditions, c(τ,~r) and Ā do not depend on the representative stress σ̆(τ)
and are therefore time-independent. They depend solely on the shape of the stress
distribution within the element and on the element’s size, which are in turn both
constant for the conditions at hand. Although there are many cases in which the
conditions are not satisfied, current glass design methods implicitly assume that they
are.
The common approach of applying the load duration effect found for a single crack
(see Section 3.3.4) to the representative stress σ̆ is valid under these special conditions:
σ̆(2)
1/n
T1

= (3.54)
σ̆(1) T2
From Equation (3.53) the ratio between the equivalent reference stresses σ̄ of two
load histories characterized by the t 0 -second equivalent representative stresses σ̆ t 0
can be derived:
(1)
σ̄(1) σ̆ t 0
= (3.55)
σ̄(2) (2)
σ̆ t 0
Therefore, if the equivalent stress σ̄(1) in a given loading situation of duration T1 is

known, the equivalent stress σ̄(2) resulting from the same loading being applied for T2
is:
σ̄(2)
1/n
T2
(1)
= (3.56)
σ̄ T1
As two elements with σ̄(1) = σ̄(2) have equal probabilities of failure, Equation (3.53)
provides a simple approach to design. The t 0 -second resistance of specific elements
in specific conditions can be provided for instance in design tables or graphs. A
structural safety verification simply involves comparing this resistance to a t 0 -second
equivalent representative stress σ̆ t 0 calculated from an arbitrary stress history. As
the representative stress is proportional to the load (σ̆(t) = " · q(t)) in conditions
in which Ā is constant, this approach can even be extended to loads. Analogous to
Equation (3.22), it is:
i 1/n
T
!1/n  
J h
¨
σ̆
Z
1 1 X for stresses
Xt0 = X (τ) dτ
n
≈ n
Xt j · t j  with X =
t0 0
t 0 j=1 q for loads
(3.57)

ê Constant load and non-linear behaviour. If a constant load is applied during T , Ā is

also constant. It is 1/n
σ̆ t 0 = σ̆ T /t 0 = σ̆ t̄ (3.58)
and Equation (3.53) is applicable.
ê Comparing two periods of constant load on an element with non-linear be-
haviour. For any two periods of duration T1 and T2 with constant representative
stresses σ̆(1) and σ̆(2) it is:17
1/n 1/m̄
σ̆(2) T1 Ā1
= (3.59)
σ̆(1) T2 Ā2
This means that the ‘tensile strength ratio’ , the ratio of the maximum allowable stress
on a glass element for two periods of constant load, depends on the equivalent area Ā,
which is in general a function of the geometry, the stress level and the shape of the
load.
3.3.6 Discussion
While the lifetime prediction model described herein is more complex than traditional
semi-empirical models, it offers significant advantages over these. A comprehensive and
clear derivation enables the model and its hypotheses to be fully understood by its users.
The model contains no simplifying hypotheses which would restrict its applicability to
special cases. Its parameters have a clear physical meaning that is apparent to the engineer.
They each include only one physical aspect and they do not depend on the experimental
setup used for their determination. The condition of the glass surface can be modelled
using either a single surface flaw or a random surface flaw population and the properties
of these surface condition models are independent parameters that the user can modify.
This is a major advantage, especially when hazard scenarios that involve surface damage
must be analysed or when data from quality control measures or research are available.
Finally, the material strength rightly converges on the inert strength for very short loading
times or slow crack velocity.
Chapter 6 will discuss the use of this lifetime prediction model to overcome shortcom-
ings of current design methods. This chapter also provides a table (Table 6.3) that shows
clearly when to use which of the equations from the present chapter.
!
17
An equal probability of failure is obtained if the equivalent reference stresses are identical: σ̄(1) =
(2) 1/m̄ !
· σ̆(1) t̄ 1 · Ā1 = · σ̆(2) t̄ 2 · Ā2 .
−1/m̄ −1/m̄ 1/m̄ 1/n
σ̄ =⇒ A0 A0 Rearrangement and insertion of t̄ = (T /t 0 )
yields Equation (3.59).

3.4. DYNAMIC FRACTURE MECHANICS 71
3.4 Dynamic fracture mechanics
The lifetime prediction model described in Section 3.3 provides a mathematical means for
determining the fracture strength of glass by describing the condition up to and including
the instant of failure. It does not, however, provide information on what happens after
the fracture strength is exceeded. This information is vital for understanding post-
failure phenomena for example in the diagnostic interpretation of glass failure, which is
discussed in Section 8.2. In this case it is useful to be able to quantify the crack branching
behaviour of glass. A universally agreed theoretical explanation of crack branching is still
elusive, however a number of possible explanations have been put forward. These are
of formidable theoretical complexity and beyond the scope of this document. Interested
readers may refer to specialized literature, such as [169, 236]. Some of the simplified
empirical formulations, however, are of practical interest. They are, therefore, presented
hereunder. Their use for the diagnostic interpretation of glass failures is explained in
Section 8.2.
If an unbalanced force acts on a crack, i. e. KI ≥ KIc , there is excess energy to drive
the crack and the fracture becomes unstable. This is known as dynamic fracture and
the equilibrium conditions of Griffith and Irwin no longer apply. Under these conditions,
the crack propagates and accelerates very rapidly, typically between 1 500 − 2 500 m/s
for soda lime silica glass. This phenomenon is therefore referred to as ‘instantaneous’ or
‘catastrophic’ failure. There are two ways in which a crack may become dynamic:
1. The crack reaches a point of instability because the applied stress or the crack depth
cause the stress intensity factor KI to exceed the critical value KIc . Since cracks
grow under static loads, a dynamical state may be realized even under constant
loading conditions. A running crack accelerates rapidly towards a terminal velocity
governed by the speed of elastic waves.
2. The applied loading is subject to a rapid time variation, as in impact loading.
A general approach to the dynamic fracture problem was outlined by Mott [254] in an
extension to the Griffith concept. He simply incorporated a term for the kinetic energy,
UK , into the expression for the total system energy (Equation (3.6)):
U = UM + US + UK (3.60)
The kinetic energy term accounts for the kinetic energy of the advancing crack. Mott was
able to quantify UK for various (though rather simple) geometries and loading conditions,
such that the behaviour of a running crack can be predicted in terms of kinetic energy and
crack velocity as a function of the crack depth. He had, however, to make very restrictive
simplifying assumptions. He assumed, for instance, that a crack does not bifurcate or
branch. Further issues that are not taken into account include the influence of stress
waves that are reflected at the specimen boundaries and the fact that the microstructural
processes in the crack tip area, which govern the crack growth behaviour, are not the
same at high speeds as in quasi-static conditions.
Crack branching marks various stages of kinetic energy dissipation and is of major
interest for fracture of soda lime silica glasses used in construction. The initial acceleration
of the flaw starts on a relatively smooth surface known as the ‘mirror zone’. As the flaw
continues to accelerate, the higher stresses and greater energy released produce some form
of micro-mechanical activity close to the crack tip, producing severe surface roughening

Figure 3.8:
Schematic representation
2rb
of mirror, mist and hackle. 2rh
2rm
initial surface
flaw
mist
mirror
hackle
that finally causes the crack to bifurcate or branch along its front. This is observed as an
abrupt branching when the glass is viewed laterally, however an elevation of the crack
surface will reveal a progressive increase in the roughness of the fracture surface from
‘mirror’ to ‘mist’ to ‘hackle’ (Figure 3.8).
From the early 1950’s, experiments were performed to ascertain the role of crack
velocity in branching. Levengood [237] and Shand [303, 304] found empirically that
the fracture stress σf , i. e. the maximum principal tensile stress at the fracture origin,
was approximately proportional to the reciprocal of the square root of the mirror radius
(radius of the mirror/mist boundary) rm :
−1/2
σf = αm · rm (3.61)
Based on previous findings and further experimentation, Clark and Irwin [66] concluded
that crack branching is primarily controlled by a critical value of the strain-energy release
rate or stress intensity, rather than a crack-speed criterion. Though there is still much
debate on the exact mechanism of crack branching, this interpretation is widely accepted
today. Various experimental and theoretical efforts led to relationships of the same form as
Equation (3.61) and although its theoretical background is still in dispute, this relationship
found general acceptance since it is in reasonable agreement with experimental results.
The relationship was found to be equally valid for the radius of the mist/hackle boundary
rh , and for one-half the crack length at macroscopic branching rb (see [278] for a more
detailed literature review), such that it can be rewritten in the more general form
σf = α · r −1/2 (3.62)
where r is either rm , rh , or rb with the corresponding branching constants αm , αh and αb .

Duckworth, Shetty, Rosenfield and Siskos [88, 307] found that linear regression to
experimental data always yielded finite intercepts and thus suggested a modification of
Equation (3.62) to
σf − σar = α · r −1/2 (3.63)
where σar was originally interpreted as being the residual compressive surface stress.
An alternative explanation for σar has since been put forward, it is therefore pertinent
to term this quantity apparent residual compressive surface stress. They furthermore
concluded from their studies that the mirror constant is not influenced significantly by
stress gradients in the specimen [88].
Reed and Bradt [281] determined the mirror constant αm by analysing published
failure data of unweathered and weathered window glass panels using Equation (3.62).
The fact that their values (αm = 1.92 MPa m0.5 for unweathered and αm = 2.18 MPa m0.5
for weathered glass, assuming σar = 0) were in close agreement to those determined in

3.4. DYNAMIC FRACTURE MECHANICS 73
previous studies using small-scale laboratory testing showed that the relationship between
the mirror radius and the failure stress may be extended to much larger structures such as
windows panels.
Conway and Mecholsky [71] used the relationship
σar rm
1/2
+ Ψ0 = σf rm
1/2
YF (θ ) (3.64)
to predict the residual compressive surface stress σr , which they assumed to be equal
to the apparent residual surface compression stress σar , from the failure stress σf . ψ0
is a material constant, YF (θ ) is a crack-border correction factor. The angle θ indicates
the point on the branching boundary (θ = 0◦ : deepest point, θ = 90◦ : point on the
specimen surface). This means that while Equation (3.63) is only valid on the specimen
surface, Equation (3.64) is in principle valid for all points along the branching boundary.
This generalization remained, however, of limited practical interest because no published
mirror/mist boundary data at other points than the specimen surface was available.
Examination of Equation (3.64) indicates that for an ideally annealed glass plate (σr =
0 MPa), a plot of σf rm1/2
YF (θ ) versus rm
1/2
should yield a horizontal line having an ordinate
of ψ0 . In the case of a tempered plate, a line with a positive slope that yields the magnitude
of the residual stress and an intercept at ψ0 should result. Conway and Mecholsky were
able to show that the residual stress determined using this technique is indeed in relatively
good agreement with direct residual stress measurements by optical techniques. The
accuracy is, however, rather limited (tempered soda lime silica glass: 82 MPa from crack
branching versus 96 MPa by birefringence measurement, annealed SLSG: 7 MPa versus
2 MPa), such that direct residual stress measurement remains preferable for diagnostic
purposes.
Oakley [259] verified the accuracy of Equation (3.63) for the prediction of the macro-
scopic branch length 2rb by testing a large series of 540 4 mm thick annealed float glass
specimens containing only natural flaws in biaxial loading. Equation (3.63) fits well to his
experimental results. Furthermore, the crack mirror constant αb = 2.14 MPa m0.5 and the
apparent residual stress σar,b = 10.9 MPa m0.5 determined from this data are similar to
previously published results from both biaxial and uniaxial loading tests. This confirms
the usefulness of the approach in diagnostic fracture analysis where the exact nature of
the loading is generally uncertain. However, the apparent residual stress σar , although
similar to previous measurements, is clearly higher than the actual residual compressive
surface stress σr of the samples. This casts doubt that σar is an accurate measure of the
residual stress. Oakley found from an analytical analysis that the slope of the curve (αb ) is
insensitive to the plate thickness, but the intercept increases for thin plates. He therefore
attributed the difference between apparent and actual residual stress to the effect of the
finite plate thickness on the branching criterion when cracks are large.
Finally, all three branching constants αm , αh and αb as well as the corresponding
apparent residual stresses σar were determined in a recent study by Quinn [278]. He
used experimental data from biaxial strength tests on annealed glass disks that were
performed under a wide range of conditions, including different environments, stress
rates, and both artificial and natural surface flaws. The following parameters were
found: αb = 2.28 MPa m0.5 , σar,b = 10.7 MPa; αh = 2.11 MPa m0.5 , σar,h = 9.1 MPa and
αm = 1.98 MPa m0.5 , σar,m = 9.6 MPa. Although the BK7 (a high quality optical bor-crown
glass) used in these tests is not normally used in architectural applications, the study
provides some additional insight. It is an experimental confirmation that the relationship

between the fracture stress and the size of the measured fracture feature (rm , rh , or rb )
is constant over a wider range of conditions. This relationship is independent of the
environment (dry nitrogen, air, water), the rate of applied stress, the surface condition,
and the fracture stress. The fact that the parameters found are in good agreement with
the values determined by Oakley on soda lime silica glass (cf. above) suggests that these
conclusions are equally valid for soda lime silica glass and that the glass composition has a
minor influence on the crack branching behaviour. Furthermore, Quinn suggests another
alternative explanation for the difference between the apparent and the actual residual
stress. He interprets the apparent residual stress he observed (about 10 MPa, cf. above) as
a threshold stress below which crack branching does not occur.
The practical use of dynamic fracture mechanics for the diagnostic interpretation of
glass failures is discussed in Section 8.2 and [262].
3.5 Laboratory testing procedures
In order to understand glass design, some knowledge about glass testing procedures is
indispensable. Some of the most commonly used laboratory testing are, therefore, briefly
outlined hereunder.
3.5.1 Testing procedures for crack velocity parameters

The following testing procedures are widely used to determine crack velocity parameters
(see Section 3.2.1):
Direct measurement of the growth of large through-thickness cracks.
Particularly before measurements on indentation cracks (see below) became popular, this
experimental approach was used to determine crack velocity parameters. The growth of
a large through-thickness crack is directly measured as a function of the stress intensity
factor, for instance optically or using sound waves. On one hand, this is a direct and
relatively precise approach. On the other hand however, the behaviour of such large
through-thickness cracks is not necessarily representative of the behaviour of the relatively
small surface flaws that are relevant for structural design of glass elements. While
Richter [284] (cf. above) could only measure crack velocities in the range of 10−5 mm/s
≤ v ≤ 10−2 mm/s, which is clearly above the range that is relevant for structural glass
design18 , modern technologies such as atomic force microscopy allow measurements
within a wider range of 10−9 mm/s ≤ v ≤ 1 mm/s [246].
Direct or indirect measurement of the growth of indentation flaws.
Since indentation flaws are relatively small surface flaws, they are more representative of
the flaws governing failure of structural glass elements than long through-surface cracks.
The advantage of indentation flaws over ‘natural’ surface flaws is that their fracture
mechanics characteristics are well known, which is crucial if accurate crack velocity
18
At 10−5 mm/s, a crack grows by 1 mm within 28 hours.

3.5. LABORATORY TESTING PROCEDURES 75
parameters are to be obtained. The growth of indentation flaws may either be observed
directly or derived from ambient strength data.19
3.5.2 Testing procedures for strength data

Static long-term tests
Static long-term tests with constant stress, also known as ‘static fatigue tests’, are usually
performed using a four point bending test setup. The testing procedure consists in
applying a constant load and measuring the time to failure. The main advantage of such
tests is their similarity with in-service conditions of structural glass elements that carry
mainly dead loads. The disadvantage is that such tests are extremely time-consuming. If
a specimen’s surface condition or the stress corrosion behaviour differs only slightly from
the assumptions used to design the test, the specimen may only fail after several years or
not at all.
Dynamic fatigue tests
The term ‘dynamic fatigue test’ is a generic term used for constant load rate testing, for
constant stress rate testing, and for testing with cyclic loading. It is mostly performed
using four point bending (P4B) or coaxial double ring (CDR) test setups (also known as
concentric ring-on-ring tests). Figure 3.9 shows a schematic representation of the two test
setups.
load
glass load
specimen glass specimen
loading ring
reaction ring reaction reaction

reaction
Figure 3.9: Schematic representation of coaxial double ring (left) and four point bending (right)
test setups.
In 4PB tests, the specimen is exposed to an approximately uniaxial stress field (σ1 6= 0,
σ2 = 0). In CDR tests, an equibiaxial stress field (σ1 = σ2 ) is obtained.20
Both test setups are simple and provide short times to failure even for specimens
with small surface defects (e. g. as-received glass). The failure stress is a function of the
stress rate. When plotting this relationship on logarithmic scales, a line with a slope of
1/(n + 1) is obtained. If v0 is constant, this allows for the determination of the crack
velocity parameter n from tests at different stress rates.
In Europe, the testing procedure that is mostly used to obtain glass strength data is
the coaxial double ring test. It is standardized in EN 1288-1:2000 [109] (fundamentals),
19
For details on the procedure, see e. g. [177, 298, 301, 302].
20
For detailed information on the CDR testing procedure, the interested reader should refer to seminal work
on the subject such as [291] (basis for EN 1288-2:2000 [110], in German) or [313].

EN 1288-2:2000 [110]21 (R400 test setup) and EN 1288-5:2000 [112] (R45 and R30
test setups). Details on the different setups are given in Table 3.10. Another common
procedure, the four point bending test, is standardized in EN 1288-3:2000 [111]. In all
these tests, the stress rate to be used is 2 ± 0.4 MPa/s.
Table 3.10: Coaxial double ring test geometries in European standards.
Designation Standard Loading Reaction Tested Specimen

ring radius ring radius area∗ edge length
(mm) (mm) (mm2 ) (mm)
EN CDR R45 EN 1288-5 [112] 9 45 254 100 (±2)
EN CDR R400 EN 1288-2 [110] 300 ± 1 400 ± 1 240 000 † 1 000 (±4)
∗
This is the surface area in uniform, equibiaxial tension = the area inside the loading ring (exception, see † ).
†
This is the value from the code. It does not correspond to the area within the load ring (282 743 mm2 ).
Testing is mostly done on as-received glass specimens or specimens with artificially

induced homogeneous surface damage. The data obtained represents a combination
of the specimen’s surface condition and the crack growth behaviour during the tests.
Statistical analysis of the test results is generally done by fitting a two-parameter Weibull
distribution [331, 332] to the experimental failure stress data:
σf,A β

Pf (σf,A) = 1 − exp − (3.65)
θA
Pf (σf,A) is the cumulative probability of failure and σf,A is the failure stress of specimens of
which the surface area A is exposed to tensile stress. θA is the scale parameter (depends on
A) and β the shape parameter of the Weibull distribution. Various methods for parameter
estimation exist. The procedure standardized in EN 12603:2002 [102] was often used
in the past.22 It is based on point estimates and the median-rank based empirical failure
probability given in Equation (C.6). For details on this approach as well as on alternative
methods, see Section C.3.
For a general introduction to Weibull statistics, the interested reader should refer to a
statistics book, e. g. [25, 253].
Tests for the glass failure prediction model
The underlying model of the US and Canadian Standards, the so-called glass failure
prediction model (GFPM), does not use the above-mentioned testing procedures. The two
interdependent surface flaw parameters m e and k̃ are determined by loading rectangular
glass plates with uniform lateral load. The visually determined failure origin, the stress
history at the failure origin and a rather complex iterative procedure are used to find the
parameters (see Section 4.4.1). Only one crack velocity parameter, n = 16, is explicitly
considered in the GFPM.
21
DIN 52292-2:1986 [81], which was used for the majority of tests performed in the past, has been replaced
by this standard. Apart from the suppression of the test setup R200, which was hardly ever used, it does
not contain any relevant changes.
22
The older German national standard DIN 55303-7:1996 [84], which was used for many research projects
and publications, is essentially equivalent.

3.6. QUANTITATIVE CONSIDERATIONS 77
3.6 Quantitative considerations
3.6.1 Introduction
Now what is the actual strength of glass? In view of the complex material behaviour
described in the preceding sections of this document, it is clear that there is no simple
and straightforward answer. The present section aims to help the designer in making an
informed decision by presenting a choice of available information and data from research.
For simplified approaches, standards, and regulations, the reader should refer to the
design chapters (Chapters 4, 5 and 7).
The parameters that are used to describe the strength or the lifetime of structural
glass elements vary among design methods. In the present section, the parameter set of
the general lifetime prediction model described in Section 3.3 is used (Table 3.11). Its
advantage over other commonly used parameter sets is that the parameters have a clear
physical meaning and each include only one physical aspect.
The parameters related to crack growth and failure, namely the crack velocity pa-
rameters n and v0 , the crack growth threshold Kth and the fracture toughness KIc have
already been discussed in Sections 3.2 and 3.3. The present section focuses on data
concerning parameters that describe the flaws on glass surfaces, namely the surface
condition parameters θ0 and m0 and the geometry factor Y .
Table 3.11: Overview of the parameters which influence the lifetime of structural glass elements.
Symbol Designation Main influence(s)

KIc fracture toughness material ‘constant’
Kth crack growth threshold environmental conditions
Y geometry factor geometry of the crack and the element, stress
field
v0 , n crack velocity parameters environmental conditions, stress rate
θ0 , m0 surface condition parameters (RSFP) glass surface condition
ai initial depth of a surface crack (SSF) hazard scenario, glass type
3.6.2 Geometry factor

The geometry factor is in general a function of the stress field, the crack depth, the crack
geometry and the element geometry. This dependence can, however, generally be ignored
for two reasons: Firstly, the crack growth that affects an element’s lifetime occurs at crack
depths that are very small in comparison with the element’s thickness. Secondly, the depth
and geometry of natural flaws are extremely variable. It does not make sense to increase
the complexity of the model considerably to achieve a gain in accuracy that would be very
small compared to these unavoidable uncertainties.
Table 3.12 gives some experimentally determined values for the geometry factor (non-
italicized text). It remains, however, unknown to what extent these experiments represent
actual flaws as they are encountered on glass elements under in-service conditions.
Furthermore, it is difficult to separate the geometry factor’s influence from other influences
in tests, which is why experimental results must be interpreted with care.

Table 3.12:
Type of flaw Geometry factor Y
Overview of experimen-
tally and analytically Glass on glass scratching [324, 325] 0.564
determined values for Vickers indentation [324, 325] 0.666
the geometry factor of Half-penny shaped crack in a semi-infinite 0.637 – 0.713†
surface flaws. specimen
Quarter-circle crack on glass edges [274] 0.722
Sandpaper scratching [324, 325] 0.999
Long, straight-fronted plane edge crack in a 1.120
semi-infinite specimen
†
range of proposed values, see [187] for details
To complement the experimental results, the geometry factor shall additionally be

estimated using linear elastic fracture mechanics. Because of the extreme brittleness of
glass, even elements that are exposed to very small loads fail immediately as soon as a
surface crack grows to more than a few tenths of a millimeter. The following conditions
of fracture mechanical relevance are, therefore, fulfilled in the case of macroscopic cracks
on the surface of glass elements for structural engineering applications (for terminology,
see Figure 3.4): a) The crack depth is small compared to the crack length. b) The crack
depth is small compared to the material thickness. c) The radius of the crack front (not
the crack tip) is substantially larger than the crack depth. d) The crack depth is negligibly
small compared to the overall dimensions of the structural element. This corresponds to
the basic case of a long, straight-fronted plane edge crack in a semi-infinite specimen which
has a geometry factor of Y = 1.12 [202]. This value was used by [43] and subsequently
by all European work based on the DELR design method (cf. Chapter 4). Particularly
flaws caused by hard contact are likely to be long, a geometry factor of Y = 1.12 seems,
therefore, a sensible assumption for surface cracks away from edges.23 This assumption is
supported by the value of 0.999 that was determined for sandpaper scratching.
Surface flaws on glass edges and at holes depend mainly on the machining process and
are likely to have different geometries from those that flaws on the surface have. There is,
however, no quantitative data available that would shed some light on this issue. Based
on theoretical considerations, [274] proposed modelling flaws on edges as quarter circle
cracks with a geometry factor of Y = 0.722.
In order to put them into the context of the experimental values discussed before, the
above-mentioned geometry factors are also listed in Table 3.12 (italic text).
3.6.3 Ambient strength and surface condition

Christoph HAAS
Glass surface away from edges
Existing glass strength data is difficult to compare. Firstly, past glass testing has been con-
ducted at ambient conditions. The parameters that should represent the material strength
23
Other researchers modelled glass surface damage as half-penny shaped cracks in a semi-infinite specimen
([168, 260, 282]). For such cracks, there is no single, universally used geometry factor. Popular solutions
range from 0.637 to 0.713 [187].

depend, therefore, on the surface condition and on the crack growth behaviour during
the tests. Secondly, the currently used ‘strength parameters’ are not material parameters
but depend on the testing procedures used for their determination (cf. Section 3.5.2 and
Chapter 4). It would not make much sense to compare the fracture strength of a small
specimen which is exposed to an equibiaxial, linearly increasing stress (European tests) to
the 60 s-equivalent uniformly distributed lateral load on a large rectangular glass plate
(North American tests).
The second problem can be solved using the lifetime prediction model from Section 3.3.
The surface condition parameters θ0 and m0 (cf. Equation (3.31)), which depend solely
on the surface condition of the glass and are therefore true material parameters, can be
derived from ambient strength data (for details and equations, see [187]). What cannot
be avoided is the need to estimate the crack growth which takes place during ambient
tests. The surface condition parameters shown in Table 3.13 were calculated using
n = 16, v0 = 0.01 mm/s, Y = 1.12, KIc = 0.75 MPa m0.5 . The v0 value is an estimation for
laboratory tests at ambient conditions and medium stress rate, which was derived from
existing data of experiments performed at various stress rates [187].24
For a discussion on how to use this data for design as well as on related problems, see
Chapter 6.
Table 3.13: Surface condition parameters determined from laboratory tests at ambient condi-
tions unless otherwise stated (n = 16, v0 = 0.01 mm/s).
A θ0 m0
(cm2 ) (MPa) (–)
As-received glass
DIN 1249-10:1990 [78] 2400 62.89 4.94
Brown [47] 70.21 6.39
Beason and Morgan [32] 60.27 7.88
Fink [167] 23.8 61.20 6.30
Haldimann [187] from ORF data ∗
62.95 8.09
Haldimann [187] from inert tests∗ 20.4 67.57 7.19
Weathered window glass
Beason [30] 27.65 5.25
ASTM E 1300-04 [21] 40.93 6.13
Fink [167]† 23.8 20.82 3.76
Glass with artificially induced homogeneous surface damage
DELR / prEN 13474 2400 28.30 20.59
Blank [43] 2400 35.37 33.19
Blank [43] 2.54 33.29 23.53
∗
Inert conditions, therefore independent of the crack velocity parameters.
†
The conversion of data from small specimens to the reference surface area of A0 = 1.0 m2 tends to be unreliable
for data with large scatter (small m0 ).
24
It is important to use a realistic and not a conservative value for v0 , because overestimating the crack
growth during the tests means underestimating the surface damage on the specimen. The resulting surface
flaw parameters would be too optimistic and thus unsafe.
The fact that the as-received glass parameters determined at ambient conditions are in close agreement
with those determined from inert conditions suggests that the v0 value used is a sensible choice.

Glass edges
Glass panels are cut to the required dimension with diamond cutters or water-jet cutters.
For standard window glazing or insulated glass units, the resulting raw edge quality is
sufficient. For heat treated glass or structural glass elements, the glass edges have at least
to be ground or polished and chamfered. Holes, which can be considered as curved glass
edges, are drilled with a diamond borer or a water-jet cutter. The surface quality after
drilling is comparable to a ground edge.
Due to machining, surface damage is generally more severe on glass edges than it is
away from edges. The inherent tensile edge strength is, therefore, generally lower than the
strength away from edges and depends strongly on the machining process and the edge
finishing quality.25
Schneider [292] found that in annealed glass, holes drilled by water-jet have deeper
surface flaws and therefore a lower tensile strength than holes drilled with diamond
cutters. After tempering, he measured similar strengths for both drilling processes.
At present there is insufficient knowledge of the severity of the induced edge flaws
such that it is difficult to predict the strength of glass elements on edges and at bolt holes
accurately. Further investigations on the surface condition in function of the machining
and finishing processes are required. On glass edges that are potentially exposed to severe
damage during an element’s lifetime, e. g. because of accidental impact or vandalism, this
kind of damage is generally more critical than the machining damage and must, therefore,
be considered for design (Chapter 6). Until more knowledge is available, the following is
recommended: For protected glass elements, the published strength data or the values
from ASTM E 1300 (see below) may be used. For exposed glass elements, a conservative
assumption on the maximum flaw depth to be considered (design flaw) should be made.
The strength of the design flaw can be estimated for instance with Figure 3.7.
At present, only edge strength data from tests at ambient conditions is available. It is, as
mentioned before, difficult to compare since results depend on the testing procedure and
the statistical procedures used to interpret the results. Many results are contradictory. The
interested reader should refer to [40, 182, 235, 292]. ASTM E 1300 [21] is currently the
only standard which specifies allowable tensile stresses for glass edges, see Section 4.4.2.
The influence of the surface condition and the residual stress on the compressive edge
strength is small. It is, therefore, comparable to compressive strength away from edges.
DIN 1249-10:1990 [78] gives values between 700 and 900 MPa, Wörner et al. [343]
between 380 and 600 MPa. In experiments with various load introduction configurations,
Luible [240] found compressive edge strength to be greater than 500 MPa.
25
It should be noted that machining and edge finishing has not only an influence on the mean of the fracture
strength, but also on its variability. The mean strength of polished glass edges, for instance, is higher than
the one of edges with artificially induced homogeneous surface damage. However, when the characteristic
strength is defined as the 5% fractile of some statistical distribution which is fitted to the results, it may
well be lower for polished edges than for artificially damaged edges. What may seem paradox at first
glance is just a consequence of the larger scatter of the polished edge data, which leads to a lower 5%
fractile despite the higher mean value.

3.6.4 Residual surface stress due to thermal tempering

Away from edges
In contrast to the inherent glass strength, the residual surface stress does not depend on
the surface condition, the loading history or the environmental conditions. Figure 3.14
shows published measurements, grouped by glass thickness.
8 8
6mm HSG 6mm FTG
6 6
Specimen count
Specimen count
4 4
2 2
0 0
25 90
8mm HSG 10mm FTG
80
20 70
Specimen count
Specimen count
60
15
50
10 40
30
5 20
10
0 0
45 12
10mm HSG 15mm FTG
40
10
35
Specimen count
Specimen count
30 8
25
6
20
15 4
10
2
5
0 0
30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Residual surface compression stress (MPa) Residual surface compression stress (MPa)
Figure 3.14: Residual stress data, pooled by glass thickness (histograms and fitted normal
distributions; data sources: [187, 234, 241, 292]).
The residual stress data allows the following conclusions to be drawn:

u The residual surface stress varies widely among specimens as well as among manu-
facturers26 .
u The residual stress in heat strengthened glass seems to be inversely proportional to
the glass’s thickness.
26
This is not directly visible in the figures, but is in the original data. It is also the reason why the fully
tempered glass data look like a superposition of at least two samples with very different mean values.

u The characteristic residual stress for structural design can be defined as the 5%-
fractile value of the normal distribution which fits to the pooled data of all thick-
nesses. With the data shown, the values obtained are σr,k,HSG = 40 MPa for heat
strengthened glass and σr,k,FTG = 95 MPa for fully tempered glass. The values given
in prEN 13474-1:1999 [275] are even lower, namely 25 MPa for HSG and 75 MPa
for FTG. This means that for the structural design of glass elements, a very large
part of the residual stress is currently ‘lost’, i. e. cannot be considered for the design
strength, because of the large scatter of the data. This ‘lost strength’ will often be
a multiple of the long-term inherent glass strength (cf. Figure 3.7). Significantly
more economical and aesthetic glass structures could, therefore, be designed if a
high residual stress level could be guaranteed, e. g. by quality assurance measures.
Straight edges and holes
The residual stress distribution on edges and near holes is inhomogeneous and varies
widely. It depends on the temperature distribution in the glass element during the
tempering process, which is in turn a function of the element’s geometry as well as of the
cooling equipment and the cooling process.
Measurement of residual stresses on edges or near edges is difficult, time-consuming
and requires special equipment. It is therefore tempting to measure residual stresses away
from edges and extrapolate these to obtain the stresses along edges. It should be noted
though, that no distinct correlation between residual stress on edges and away from edges
could be found [55]. In view of the above-mentioned dependance, this is not surprising.
Recent experimental and numerical investigations on glass strength and residual stress
on edges and at holes were conducted, among others, by [40, 60, 235, 245, 292, 310].
Some of the main findings are summarized in the following:
u The tempering process can be simulated numerically, such that the residual stresses
can be determined by simulation. Such simulations are, however, generally not
practicable for design since they require advanced finite element software, expert
knowledge about the physical processes and the complex simulations, and detailed
information on the tempering facility.
u An alternative way of determining residual stresses around holes consists in experi-
mentally measuring the strength at holes and subtracting the inherent glass strength.
The procedure has, however, notable drawbacks. Firstly, the inherent strength at
holes cannot be accurately determined. Secondly, the stress field due to loading
is complex around holes. It needs to be calculated with FE models, which must
often account for nonlinearities due to interfaces that transmit only compressive
stresses. The results obtained from such FE models depend strongly on the model
characteristics (mesh, element type, simplifying assumptions, material laws etc.).
u Residual stresses decrease towards the centerline of the glass pane. This effect is
more pronounced with thick than with thin glasses.
u The residual stress on a glass surface reaches its minimum at about one to two
glass thicknesses away from the edge. This effect, called ‘overshoot’, becomes more
pronounced with increasing glass thickness. The analysis of failure origins in lateral
torsional buckling tests showed that this phenomenon should be taken into account
for structural design [241].

u In fully tempered glass, the residual stress on edges is significantly lower (15% to
25% on straight edges, 25%-35% at holes) than it is away from the edges.
u In heat strengthened glass, however, the residual edge stress tends to be significantly
higher (up to 50% on straight edges, about 15% at holes) than the residual stress
away from the edges.
u The residual compressive stress near the chamfers of cylindrical holes is slightly
higher than away from holes (approx. 10% to 15%), but residual stresses in holes
decrease towards the centerline of the glass pane. This effect is more pronounced
with thick glasses. With conical holes, the stress distribution is even more complex
Figure 3.15.
u [235] and [292] obtained a number of results which are contradictory (although
they are not directly comparable because different approaches were used for their
determination). While residual stresses are about 10% smaller in holes than on
straight edges according to Laufs, Schneider claims that they are higher in holes.
For lateral loading and fully tempered glass, Schneider determined design strengths
in holes which are even higher than those typically assumed away from edges, while
Laufs determined much lower values. For in-plane loading, Laufs found strengths
which are only about 50% of those typically assumed away from edges. Both
researchers propose design values for the tensile strength in glass holes [235, 292].
u At a distance of about half the glass thickness away from holes, the residual stresses
on the glass surface is slightly lower than it is away from edges [235, 292].
u Crack healing seems to have a strong beneficial effect on the edge strength of fully
tempered glass. The effect is less pronounced with heat strengthened glass.
Figure 3.15: Simulated residual stress in a cylindrical (left) and a conical (right) hole [293].

Chapter
4
Current Standards, Guidelines and
Design Methods
4.1 Introduction
The increasing use of glass as a load-bearing material has led to the development of
a number of national and international design standards, draft standards, technical
guidelines and recommendations. The aim of these documents is to arrive at an accurate
value of allowable load or stress for an acceptable probability of failure in terms of
the geometrical configuration of the glass (i. e. shape and support conditions) and the
environmental parameters (loads and ambient conditions) by means of a few simple
calculations.
These design methods do not cater for all types of glass configurations, loading, support
and surface conditions. Most commonly, they are limited to glass elements of rectangular
shape with continuous lateral support and to uniformly distributed out-of-plain loads. An
in-depth analysis of the underlying assumptions in Section 4.5 reveals further limitations
that the design methods fail to mention.
It is beyond the scope of this document to give an exhaustive overview of all national
standards and design methods that exist in the field of glass. All the more because many
of them are based on simple theories, ignore geometrical non-linearity and the like. While
these methods are sufficiently accurate for rectangular window glazing with continuous
lateral support, they should not be used for structural glass applications or for support and
loading conditions that they do not cover. The standards and design methods discussed in
the following have been chosen either because they are widely used or because they are
of particular interest for structural glass design.
4.2 Rules of thumb

Benjamin BEER
Accurate analysis and design methods are generally unattractive for manual computation
and it is unrealistic to expect the engineer to perform laborious calculations throughout
85
86 CHAPTER 4. CURRENT STANDARDS, GUIDELINES AND DESIGN METHODS
the whole of the iterative design process. This fuels the need for reliable rules of thumb
for performing quick checks. Rules of thumb are a very useful tool for the structural
engineer, but their use should be limited to scheme design purposes rather than as the
basis for detailed design. Rules of thumb can not replace detailed design. They simply
help ensure that material selection, material quantity and consequently cost estimates are
not too far from the final requirements. Furthermore, rules of thumb should be used as
an approximate verification of the results obtained from detailed analysis.
4.2.1 Allowable stress based design methods

Despite the inaccuracy of this over-simplistic approach and the fact that the concept of
allowable stress is rarely used in current building design standards, allowable stress design
methods are still widely used to design glass elements. It is mainly the extreme ease of use
and the simplicity of these methods that make them attractive. The general verification
format is:
σ E ≤ σadm (4.1)
σE maximum in-plane principal stress, calculated using the characteristic values of

the actions of the most unfavourable design scenario
σadm allowable principal in-plane stress (the fracture strength found in experiments,
divided by a global safety factor that accounts for all uncertainties and variances
associated with actions, resistance and modelling)
There is no way of considering the effects of the element’s size, the environmental
conditions, the duration of load and the like, or of taking a specific target failure probability
into account. These aspects must all be somehow ‘included’ in the recommended σadm
values.
The German technical guidelines TRLV 1998 [323] and TRAV 2003 [322] are well
known and widely used examples of design guides based on allowable stresses. Both
documents apply to glass panes exposed to uniform lateral loads only. The recommended
allowable stresses for static loads are summarized in Table 4.1. For impact loads, TRAV
2003 [322] sets the following allowable stresses: 80 MPa for ANG, 120 MPa for HSG,
170 MPa for FTG. Additionally, both guidelines contain a series of more detailed specifica-
tions on how to account for load combinations. They also list special requirements that
must be met and modified allowable stress values for a series of specific situations.
Allowable stresses have also been proposed for edges of glass beams, e. g. by Hess
[192], Güsgen [182] and Laufs [235].
Table 4.1:
Allowable stress σadm (MPa)
Allowable stresses for
vertical glazing overhead glazing
glass panes exposed to
uniform lateral load annealed glass (ANG) 18 12
according to [323] and fully tempered glass 50 50
[322]. (FTG)
laminated ANG 22.5 15 (25∗ )
∗
only for the lower glass pane in the hazard scenario ‘upper pane broken’

4.2. RULES OF THUMB 87
Table 4.2 shows allowable stresses recommended for initial design by Pilkington Glass
Consultants [217, 272]. These values should only be used in conjunction with linear
stress analysis.
Table 4.2: Allowable stresses for initial design – Recommendations by Pilkington.
Load type Loading example Annealed Glass Fully tempered glass

(MPa) (MPa)
Short term body stress wind 28∗ 59
Short term edge stress wind 17.8∗ 59
Medium term snow 10.75 22.7
Medium term floors 8.4 35
Long term self weight, water, shelves 7 35
∗
Valid for annealed glass ≥ 10 mm. For 6 mm thick glass these values may be multiplied by a factor of 1.4.
Shortcomings
Allowable stress based design methods have some notable drawbacks:

u They do not account for the actual physical phenomena that govern the mechanical
behaviour of glass.
u Scatter and uncertainty of the influencing parameters differ. With only one global
safety factor, this cannot be accounted for.
u The approach is of very limited accuracy and flexibility and is not well suited to
deal with aspects such as geometric non-linearity or instability.
4.2.2 Recommended span / thickness ratios

Table 4.3 provides a list of maximum unsupported spans proposed by Colvin [68] for
initial design purposes of glazing with continuous lateral support along two or four edges.
Furthermore the maximum height of a vertical glass fin should not exceed 15× the fin
depth [68].
Table 4.3:
Glass type Maximum span / thickness ratio
Maximum unsupported
vertical sloping or horiz.
spans proposed by
Annealed glass (ANG) 150 100 Colvin [68].
Fully tempered glass (FTG) 200 150
Laminated ANG 150 100
Laminated FTG 150 100

4.3 European standards and design methods
4.3.1 DELR design method
Verification format
The design method of damage equivalent load and resistance, called DELR design method
hereafter, was the first European glass design method that attempted to account for
the specific behaviour of glass in an adequate and transparent way. It is compatible
with the current generation of standards based on partial safety factors. Presented to a
larger public in [297], the design method is based on research work by Richter [284],
Kerkhof [224], Kerkhof et al. [225], Exner [164, 165], Blank [43], Güsgen [182] and
others. Originally developed for glass plates, it was also extended to cover glass beams.
The maximum principal design stress σmax ,d is compared to an equivalent resistance as
follows:
σbB,Atest ,k σV,k
σmax ,d ≤ + (4.2)
ασ (q, σV ) · α(Ared ) · α(t) · α(S v ) · γM,E γM,V
ασ (q, σV ) coefficient to account for the stress distribution on the glass surface; q =
uniform lateral load1 , σV = residual surface stress due to tempering
α(Ared ) coefficient to account for the size of the decompressed surface area2 Ared (for
annealed glass, Ared is equal to the entire surface area)
α(t) coefficient to account for the load duration
α(S v ) coefficient to account for load combination and environmental conditions
σmax,d design value of the maximum in-plane principal stress in the element, calculated
according to current action standards3
σbB,Atest ,k characteristic value of the inherent bending fracture strength in R400 coaxial
double ring tests according to EN 1288-2:2000 [110] (see Section 3.5.2; 5%
fractile, confidence level 0.95, surface area4 Atest = 0.24 m2 , stress rate = 2 ±
0.4 MPa/s)
σV,k characteristic value (5% fractile) of the absolute value (compression = posi-
tive) of the residual surface stress (normally induced by thermal or chemical
tempering; called ‘prestress’ in the DELR design method; )
γM,E partial factor for the inherent strength
γM,V partial factor for the residual stress
1
[297] uses p. q is used here for compatibility with the rest of the document.
2
see Appendix B
3
In particular EN 1990:2002 [133], EN 1991-1-1:2002 [134], EN 1991-2-3:1996 [136], EN 1991-2-4:1995
[137], EN 1991-2-5:1997 [138], EN 1991-2-7:1998 [139] in connection with the National Application
Documents in Europe; SIA 260:2003 [308] and SIA 261:2003 [309] in Switzerland.
4
[297] uses A0 . This symbol is avoided here because is has a different meaning in the present document
(unit surface area).

4.3. EUROPEAN STANDARDS AND DESIGN METHODS 89
Coefficients
A set of coefficients is used to compensate for the differences between laboratory test
conditions (used to determine the strength) and actual in-service conditions. The non-
homogeneous stress distribution on the glass surface is accounted for as follows:
 β 1/β
σ1 (x, y)
Z
1
ασ (q, σV ) =  dxd y  (4.3)
Ared Ared
σmax ,d
σ1 (x, y) is the major principal stress at the point (x, y) on the surface and depends (like
Ared ) on σV . The Weibull shape parameter β is assumed to be 25. This value has been
defined byBlank [43] based on experiments on float glass samples with artificially induced
homogeneous surface damage (sandblasting). It does not directly reflect the test data,
but reflects a so-called ‘limiting distribution’ that lies somewhat below the test data. For
standard cases, tabulated values of ασ (from finite element calculations) are given, a
simple but conservative assumption is ασ = 1.0.
The size effect is accounted for as follows:
1/β
α(Ared ) = Ared /A0 (4.4)
The coefficient α(t) accounts for the load duration. It depends on the subcritical crack
growth, the duration of all loads in a load combination, the overlapping probability of
wind- and snow load, the bending strength determined in tests, the stress rate used in
these tests, the surface area and the required lifetime. For usual conditions and a design
life of 50 years, Sedlacek et al. [297] proposes to use α(t) = 3.9.
The coefficient α(S v ) takes the relative magnitude of the different loads within a
load combination as well as environmental conditions into account. Its calculation
is complex and too lengthy to be discussed here; the interested reader should refer
to [297]. The difference with respect to other design methods is that two sets of
crack velocity parameters are used in the calculation of α(S v ): one for ‘winter con-
ditions’ (SWinter = 0.82 m/s(MPa m0.5 )−n ) and one for ‘summer conditions’ (SSommer =
0.45 m/s(MPa m0.5 )−n ). n = 16 is assumed for both conditions.
Partial factors
In [297], a partial resistance factor of γM ≈ 1.80 is proposed for structures of medium

importance. This factor is chosen by a rather particular approach involving two Weibull
distributions: First, a ‘characteristic value of the inherent bending strength’ σbB,Atest ,k =
45 MPa is defined as the 5% fractile of a Weibull distribution with the parameters θAtest = 74
MPa and βtest = 6. This distribution represents the breakage stress of as-received float
glass specimens in an R400 coaxial double ring test (see Section 3.5.2) at a stress rate
of 2 ± 0.4 MPa/s and with Atest = 0.24 m2 (95% confidence level). These tests were
performed as a basis for DIN 1249-10:1990 [78]. A ‘design bending strength of damaged
specimens’ σbB,Atest ,d = 24.7 MPa is defined as the 1.2% fractile value of the failure strength
distribution proposed by Blank [43]. This distribution, characterized by θAtest ,limit = 32 MPa
and βlimit = 25, was chosen based on laboratory tests with the same setup as described
above but on specimens with artificially induced homogeneous surface damage. The

chosen distribution is somewhat more conservative than the actual test results. The partial
resistance factor is defined as γM = σbB,Atest ,k /σbB,Atest ,d ≈ 1.80.
This approach is reused in unaltered form for the European draft code prEN 13474-
1:1999 [275], see Section 4.3.2.
Extension for beams
Equation (4.2) is adapted for beams by adapting the coefficients:
σbB,Ltest ,k σV,k
σmax ,d ≤ + (4.5)
ασ (q, σV )BZ · α(Lred ) · αBZ (t) · αBZ (S v ) · γM,E γM,V
 β 1/β
σ1 (l)
Z 1/β
1 Lred

ασ (q, σV )BZ =  dl  α(Lred ) = α(t) ≈ 3.7
Lred Lred
σmax ,d Ltest
(4.6)
σbB,Ltest ,k is the characteristic bending strength (5% fractile) of beam specimens with
decompressed length5 Ltest (= 0.46 m). σ1 (l) is the major principal stress at location l.
α(Lred ) accounts for the length of a beam’s decompressed edge. [297] recommends the
use of β = 5 for polished and β = 12.5 for unpolished edges. The values were determined
from very small samples (11 and 13 specimens respectively). γM,E ≈ 1.40 is proposed for
β = 12.5. ασ (q, σV )BZ equals 1.0 for a uniform stress distribution, 0.94 for a parabolic
and 0.86 for a triangular one. αBZ (S v ) is equal to α(S v ).
Shortcomings
There are no shortcomings that are very specific to this method. The more general ones
are discussed in Section 4.5.
4.3.2 European draft standard prEN 13474
The design method of prEN 134746 [275, 276] is based on the DELR design method, but
contains influences from the methods of Shen and Siebert (see Sections 4.3.3 and 4.3.4).
The draft standard faced stiff opposition and is still under revision at the time of writing.
The influence of the stress distribution on the glass surface is accounted for on the action
side of the verification equation, the residual surface stress on the resistance side. The
structural safety verification format compares an effective stress σeff with an allowable
effective stress for design fg,d :
σeff,d ≤ fg,d (4.7)
5
The decompressed length is the length of the edge where the tensile stress due to loading is greater that
the residual compressive stress due to tempering.
6
Important: This standard is currently under revision by the committees CEN/TC 250 (‘Structural Eurocodes’)
and CEN/TC 129 (‘Glass in Buildings’). At the time of writing, the non-public working papers differ
considerably from the published draft standards [275] and [276].

The effective stress σeff,d 7 has to be determined for the most unfavourable action combi-
nation as: Z 1/β
1 β
σeff,d = σ1 (x, y) dxd y (4.8)
A A
A is the total surface area of the glass pane and σ1 (x, y) is the major principal stress
due to actions at the point (x, y) on the surface. This means that the effective stress
is defined independently from the residual stress and that decompression of the whole
surface is assumed. Using the coefficient for annealed glass ασ (p) from the DELR design
method, it is σeff,d = σmax ,d · ασ (q). β is the shape parameter of the Weibull distribution
of the breakage stress. For common geometries and support conditions, [276] provides
tables and equations to determine σeff,d in function of the applied load q and the plate
dimensions without actually having to solve Equation (4.8).
The allowable effective stress is defined as:

fg,k fb,k − fg,k
fg,d = kmod + · γn (4.9)
γM · kA γV
fb,k characteristic value of the fracture strength (5% fractile);

fb,k = fg,k for ANG, 70 MPa for HSG and 120 MPa for FTG
fg,k characteristic value of the inherent strength (5% fractile);
fg,k = 45 MPa for soda lime silica and borosilicate glass
fb,k − fg,k the contribution of residual stress to the failure strength; 0 for annealed glass
γV partial factor for the residual stress due to tempering (= 2.3 for SLS glass)
γM partial factor for the inherent strength (= 1.8 for SLS glass)
γn national partial factor (= 1.0 for most countries)
kA coefficient to account for the surface area, defined independently from the
residual stress as kA = A0.04 (from Equation (4.4) with mit Atest = 1 m2 and
β = 25)
kmod modification factor to account for load duration, load combination and envi-
ronmental conditions; kmod is given for the following dominant actions: short
duration (wind): 0.72, medium duration (snow, climate loads for IGUs): 0.36,
permanent loads (self weight, altitude for IGUs): 0.27
In comparison to the DELR design method, prEN 13474 contains the following modifica-
tions:
u The factor to account for the influence of the stress distribution on the surface is
defined independently from the residual stress.

u k
mod replaces α(t) and α(S v ).
u k replaces α(A
A red ), but is based on the total instead of the decompressed surface
area, which makes it independent of the residual stress. Additionally, it is defined
with respect to a reference surface of 1 m2 instead of 0.24 m2 . Surprisingly, it is
used together with the unaltered characteristic strength value which is based on
A0 = 0.24 m2 .
7
prEN 13474 does not use the index d, even when referring to the design level. The index is added here for
clarity.

As a result of these modifications, the partial factors are not directly comparable. The
replacement of α(t) and α(S v ) by kmod is very similar to Shen’s concept, but kmod is not
identical to ηD . Instead of explicitly accounting for the relative magnitudes of the different
loads of a load combination, the few tabulated kmod values include implicit assumptions.
Appendix E of prEN 13474-2:2000 [276] proposes a step-by-step procedure for design,
using predefined load combinations.
Shortcomings
The characteristic value of the inherent strength of float glass is said to be fg,d = 45 MPa.
This value was originally defined in DIN 1249-10:1990 [78], based on coaxial double
ring tests on new annealed glass specimens with a surface area of Atest = 0.24 m2 (cf.
Section 3.5.2). A two-parameter Weibull distribution was fitted to the measured failure
stresses. The Weibull parameters obtained were θAtest = 74 MPa and β = 6 (at 0.95
confidence level). The characteristic value is defined as the 5% fractile value of this
distribution, which gives the 45 MPa mentioned above. To account for the size effect, fg,d
is divided by a size factor kA defined as
kA = A0.04 (4.10)
with A being the total surface area of the glass plate. As discussed in Section 4.5, the
actual size factor based on Weibull statistics is:
1/β
kA,Wb = A/Atest (4.11)
A and Atest are the decompressed surface areas of the element to be designed and the
specimen used to determine the characteristic strength. The following inconsistencies
may therefore be identified:
u A characteristic resistance determined from a distribution with β = 6 is combined
with a correction factor based on β = 25 (exponent 0.04 = 1/25).
u The size factor kA becomes 1 for A = 1 m2 . This means that the surface area in
the tests leading to fg,d is assumed to be approximately four times bigger than it
actually was. For β = 25, the quantitative effect of this is relatively small. Using the
real test surface Atest = 0.24 m2 , it is kA,Wb (A = 1 m2 ) = 1.059 (difference of ‘only’
6%). For β = 6, however, it is kA,Wb (A = 1 m2 ) = 1.269 (difference of 27%).
The more general shortcomings are discussed in Section 4.5.
4.3.3 Shen’s design method

Shen presented this design method in [306]. In [343], it was adapted to the format
of EN 1990:2002 [133]. It is mainly a considerable simplification of the DELR design
method, with one important exception: The concept to account for residual stresses is
taken from the Canadian Standard CAN/CGSB 12.20-M89 [59] (cf. Section 4.4.3). Only
two coefficients, both on the resistance side of the verification equation, are used and
very simple tables are proposed for their values. The residual surface stress of tempered
glass is accounted for indirectly by these coefficients. The design method is confined to
laterally loaded glass panes, made of annealed or fully tempered glass, with continuous

lateral support along all four edges. An application to structural elements such as beams
or columns is not immediately possible. The structural safety verification format is:
η F · ηD
σmax ,d ≤ σk · (4.12)
γR
σmax,d design value of the maximum principal stress
σk characteristic value of the bending strength determined in R400 coaxial double
ring tests (cf. Section 3.5.2).
ηF coefficient to account for surface area stress distribution
ηD coefficient to account for load duration
γR partial factor for the resistance
The verification has to be done separately for every different load duration. The factor ηF
for the surface area and the stress distribution is defined in a simplistic way, see Table 4.4.
The load duration factor ηD is a function of the glass type and is given in Table 4.5. To
derive these values, the surface condition and the environmental conditions in structural
applications have been assumed to be identical to those in the bending strength laboratory
tests. With this assumption, it is
1
σD tR 1

n
ηD = = · (4.13)
σR tD n + 1
σD equivalent strength
σR bending strength found in laboratory tests (cf. Footnote 8)
tR test duration8
tD load duration
n crack velocity parameter; nANG ≈ 17 (annealed glass), nFTG = 70 (fully tempered
glass)
Table 4.4:
A = 0.5 – 4.0 m2 A = 4 – 10 m2
Factor η F for Shen’s design method [343].
ANG 1.0 0.9
FTG 1.0 1.0
Table 4.5:
Dead load (50 yr) Snow (30 days) Wind (10 min)
Factor η D for Shen’s
ANG 0.27 0.45 0.69 design method [306].
FTG 0.74 0.83 1.00
8
The bending strength values from DIN 1249-10:1990 [78], which refer to tests with a stress rate of 2 MPa/s,
are used: t R,ANG = 45 MPa / 2 MPa/s = 22.5 s, t R,FTG = 120 MPa / 2 MPa/s = 60 s.

Shortcomings
The value nFTG = 70 is taken from CAN/CGSB 12.20-M89 [59] without further discussion.
It has two drawbacks:
1. Increasing a crack velocity parameter is unrelated to the actual physical phenomena
governing the resistance of heat treated glass (cf. Section 3.3.4).
2. While the value of 70 is indeed given in CAN/CGSB 12.20-M89 [59], it does not
relate to the crack velocity parameter n in this standard, despite the use of the
symbol n. It is actually the value of a parameter combining n with a constant for the
relationship between lateral load and stress in rectangular plates (see Section 4.4.3).
For a combination of loads of different duration, ηD has to be calculated individually.
[306] makes proposals on how this should be done for the combination of snow and dead
load as well as for snow and wind.
The choice of the partial factor γR for the resistance depends on the target reliability
level and the scatter of the bending strength data. Based on the assumption that the
bending strength’s coefficient of variation is 0.1, [306] proposes γR ≈ 1.25 for buildings
of medium importance.9 Wörner et al. [343] provides no value for γR .
4.3.4 Siebert’s design method

This design method was proposed by Siebert in [311]. The major modifications with
respect to the aforementioned methods are as follows:
u An approach to account for the influence of biaxial stress fields is proposed.
u The residual stress is considered as an action.
The structural safety verification format is
θ
σges,d, max · fA · fσ · ftS ≤ (4.14)
fP
σges,d,max maximum principal surface stress; σges,d, max = σd, max + σ E
σd,max maximum principal stress due to actions
σE residual surface stress (compression ⇒ negative sign)
fA coefficient to account for the different surface areas of test specimen and actual
structural element
fσ coefficient to account for the different stress distributions in the test specimen
and the actual structural element
ftS coefficient to account for load duration and relative magnitudes of different
loads
θ scale parameter of the Weibull distribution fitted to experimental bending
strength data (has the dimension of a stress)
fP factor to account for the target failure probability
9
To find this γR , the resistance is assumed to follow a log-normal distribution. This assumption is incompati-
ble with the size effect, which is a direct consequence of Weibull statistics (cf. Chapter 3). [306] does not
comment on this issue.

The stress due to action is calculated as in the DELR design method. The residual stress
γV σV , however, is considered as an action. Its partial factor cannot be defined on a firm
scientific basis due to the lack of data. Siebert proposes γV = 1.25, which conceptually
means putting the residual stress back to the resistance side. For a favourable action, the
partial factor should rather be < 1.0, which is 1/γV .
To obtain resistance data, Siebert recommends standard R400 coaxial double ring tests
according to EN 1288-2:2000 [110] on specimens with artificially induced homogeneous
surface damage and data analysis according to DIN 55303-7:1996 [84], see Section 3.5.2.
If tests are performed on heat treated glass, the residual stress has to be deduced from
the breaking stress. Siebert proposes, however, to use annealed glass for testing because
(a) measurement of the residual stress is imprecise and (b) defects caused by a given
method of artificial damaging are more severe in annealed than in heat strengthened or
fully tempered glass.
To account for a non-homogeneous stress distribution within the element, the use of a
so-called effective area AN,ef is proposed:
β
χ · σges,d (x, y)
Z
AN,ef = dA (4.15)
A
σges,d,max
σges,d (x, y) first principal design stress at the point (x, y) on the surface; this refers to
the crack opening stress ⇒ σges,d (x, y) ≥ 0.
σges,d, max maximum first principal design stress on the surface
A surface area of the glass pane
χ correction factor for the ratio of major and minor principal stress;
(conservative assumption: 1.0; for a uniaxial stress field, χ ≈ 0.83 is proposed)
Using AN,ef , a coefficient to account for the difference in surface areas of test specimens
and actual structural elements is defined as:
1/β
AN,ef
fAσ = (4.16)
AL,ef
AL,ef is the effective area of the test specimen. To simplify design tables, it is proposed to
split fAσ into two factors as follows:
1/β
σges,d,ef
1/β
A AN,ef

fA = fσ = = (4.17)
AL,ef A σges,d, max
β β
The effective principal stress σges,d,ef is defined such that A· σges,d,ef = Aeff · σges,d,max . As
residual stress is considered as an action, fσ depends on it. fA is identical to α(A) in the
DELR design method.
The load duration, the relative magnitude of different loads in a load combination and
the environmental conditions are accounted for by the factor f tS , which is the product of
the factors α(t) and α(S v ) from [182] ([311] uses identical assumptions and equations).
An additional factor, fP , enables a target probability of failure Ga to be chosen. It is defined
as

−1/β
1

fP = ln (4.18)
1 − Ga
[311] uses the failure probabilities proposed by [43] and [182]. According to these, it
is e. g. 1.5 · 10−3 for structures of medium importance, which gives fP = 1.30 when using
β = 25 from [43].
In comparison with that used in the DELR design method, Siebert’s partial factor
for the residual compressive surface stress is clearly less conservative. For annealed
glass, both methods give basically identical results despite the different partial factors:
σRd = σbB,Atest ,k /γM = 45 MPa/1.8 ≈ θ / fP = 32 MPa/1.3 ≈ 25 MPa. The reason for the
different factors is that the resistance is based on the Weibull scale parameter (θ ) in
Siebert’s method and on the characteristic strength (σbB,Atest ,k ) in the DELR design method.
Shortcomings
There are no shortcomings that are very specific to this method. The more general ones
are discussed in Section 4.5.
4.4 North American standards and design methods
4.4.1 Glass failure prediction model (GFPM)

The glass failure prediction model (GFPM) presented in [30] and [32] is directly based
on the statistical theory of failure for brittle materials advanced by [331]. According to
Weibull, the failure probability of a brittle material can be represented as
Pf = 1 − e−B (4.19)
where B reflects the risk of failure as a function of all relevant aspects, in particular the
surface condition and the stress distribution. For general cases, the GFPM proposes the
risk function Z
me
B = k̃ c̃(x, y)σeq, max (q, x, y) dA (4.20)
A
in which c̃(x, y) is the ‘biaxial stress correction factor’ (a function of the minor to major
principal stress ratio), A the surface area and σeq, max (q, x, y) = σ(q, x, y)(t d /60)1/16 the
maximum equivalent principal stress as a function of the lateral load q and the point on
the plate surface (x, y). m e and k̃ are the so-called ‘surface flaw parameters’.10 Based
on this, the following expression is introduced for rectangular glass plates exposed to
uniform lateral loads of constant duration:
me t d m/16
e a
B = k̃(a b)1−me Eh2 R̃ m̃, q̃, (4.21)
60 b
a and b are the rectangular dimensions of the plate (a > b), h is the effective thickness,
t d is the load duration in seconds and E is Young’s modulus (71.7 GPa in the GFPM). The
non-dimensional function
10
The tildes are not used in the source. They are required in the present document to avoid confusion in
subsequent chapters.

4.4. NORTH AMERICAN STANDARDS AND DESIGN METHODS 97
Z
1 me
e q̃, a/b = c̃(x, y)σ̃max (q̃, x, y)

R̃ m, dA (4.22)
ab A
depends on the surface flaw parameter me and the distribution of the non-dimensionalized
stress on the surface. q̃ = q(a b)2 /(Eh4 ) is the non-dimensionalized load and σ̃ =
σ(q, x, y)ab/(Eh2 ) is the non-dimensionalized stress.
Shortcomings
The surface flaw parameters m e and k̃ cannot be measured directly. They are determined
from constant load rate tests on rectangular glass plates using a rather complex iterative
procedure. In order to establish the stress/time relationship at the location of the critical
flaw (i. e. the flaw that caused failure), the failure origin has to be determined visually.
From this relationship, the 60 s equivalent failure stress and the corresponding
60 s equiv-
alent failure load is calculated. Then, a set of risk factors, R̃ m,
e q̃, a/b , corresponding
to each equivalent failure load is calculated for a wide range of assumed m. e The best
value of me is determined by choosing the one which results in a coefficient of variation of
the risk factor closest to 1.0 (⇒ mean = standard deviation). k̃ can then be calculated
using the plate’s geometry and the mean of the set of R̃ m̃, q̃, a/b for the best m. e Both
its magnitude and its units are dependent on m. e
Some minor improvements of the GFPM and its implementation in ASTM E 1300 are
presented in [31] and integrated into recent versions of the standard.
4.4.2 American National Standard ASTM E 1300

The American National Standard ‘Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance
of Glass in Buildings’ ASTM E 1300-04 [21] provides extensive charts to determine the
required thickness of glass plates. It is based on the glass failure prediction model by
Beason & Morgan (see Section 4.4.1) and on the finite difference stress and deflection
analysis by Vallabhan [326]. Resistance is defined using a target failure probability of 8%.
ASTM E 1300 applies to vertical and sloped glazing in buildings exposed to a uniform
lateral load and made of monolithic, laminated, or insulating glass elements of rectangular
shape with continuous lateral support along one, two, three or four edges. The specified
design loads may consist of wind load, snow load and self-weight with a total combined
magnitude less than or equal to 10 kPa. The standard does not apply to other applications
such as balustrades, glass floor panels and structural glass members or to any form of
wired, patterned, etched, sandblasted, drilled, notched or grooved glass or to any glass
with surface and edge treatments that alter the glass strength. The verification format is
q ≤ LR = NFL · GTF (4.23)
with q being the uniform lateral load, LR the ‘load resistance’, NFL the ‘non-factored load’
(based on a 3 s load duration) and GTF the so-called ‘glass type factor’ (load-duration
dependent, see below).
The important difference with respect to European design methods is that this veri-
fication format is based on loads and not on stresses. Furthermore, it does not use any

partial factors. The NFL is determined from charts given for various geometries, support
conditions, glass thicknesses and for monolithic as well as laminated glass. The GTF
combines glass type and load duration effects and is given for single panes (Table 4.6) as
well as for insulating glass units.
Table 4.6:
Glass type Short duration load Long duration load
Glass type factors (GTF)
for a single pane of ANG 1.0 0.5
monolithic or laminated HSG 2.0 1.3
glass. FTG 4.0 3.0
e = 7, k̃ = 2.86 · 10−53 N−7 m12 ,

All charts and values are calculated using the GFPM with m
a Young’s modulus of E = 71.7 GPa and the effective (not the nominal) glass thickness
[21, 31]. The non-factored load charts incorporate the viscoelastic model for the plas-
tic interlayer from [38]. This model claims to describe accurately the evolution of the
polymer shear modulus at 50 ◦ C. At this temperature and for a load duration of 3 s (the
reference in the standard), the PVB interlayer is characterized with an effective Young’s
modulus of 1.5 MPa. This value is meant to be a lower bound for commercially available
PVB interlayers.
For independent stress analyses required in the case of special shapes or loads not
covered in the standard, allowable surface stresses for a 3 s duration load are given, see
Table 4.7. The values for edges are taken from [330]. It is claimed for the allowable 3 s
stress and Pf < 0.05 in annealed glass away from the edges, that the following equation
should give conservative values:
1/7
Pf
σallowable = (4.24)
k̃ (d/3)7/n A
The constant 7 in Equation (4.24) is the parameter m e and 3 is the reference time period
in seconds. For Pf = 0.008, d = 3 s and A = 1 m2 , Equation (4.24) yields 16.1 MPa, which
is indeed very conservative with respect to the value of 23.3 MPa given in Table 4.7.
Table 4.7:
annealed heat strength- fully tempered
Allowable surface stress
glass ened glass glass
(MPa) for a 3 s duration
load according to ASTM away from the 23.3 46.6 93.1
E 1300-04 [21]. edges
clean cut edges 16.6 n/a n/a
seamed edges 18.3 36.5 73.0
polished edges 20.0 36.5 73.0
To be able to compare the allowable stresses in Table 4.7 to those from Table 4.1, they
must be converted to the same reference time period (σ60s = σ3s (3/60)1/16 = σ3s · 0.829).
For annealed glass, very similar values are obtained. For fully tempered glass, the
allowable stress is clearly higher according to ASTM E 1300-04 [21] (σ60s = 77.2 MPa)
than according to TRLV 1998 [323] (σ60s = 50 MPa).

4.4. NORTH AMERICAN STANDARDS AND DESIGN METHODS 99
The 3 s duration load that represents the combined effects of I loads of different
duration (all normal to the glass surface) is determined using11
I 1/n
di
X
q3 = qi (4.25)
i=1
3
where q3 is the magnitude of the 3 s duration uniform load and qi the magnitude of the
load having duration di . For annealed glass, n = 16.
Shortcomings
Haldimann [187] showed that even if all explicit and implicit simplifying assumptions be-
hind the design concept in ASTM E 1300 are considered, Equation (4.25) (Equation (X7.1)
in ASTM E 1300-04 [21]), is not correct. It should read as follows (cf. Equation (3.57)):12
!1/n
I
1 X
q3 = n
q · di (4.26)
3 s i=1 i
4.4.3 Canadian National Standard CAN/CGSB 12.20

The Canadian National Standard ‘Structural Design of Glass for Buildings’ CAN/CGSB
12.20-M89 [59] deals with soda lime silica glass panes exposed to uniform lateral load.
Like the American National Standard, it is based on the GFPM (see Section 4.4.1) and a
target failure probability of Pf = 0.008 for the resistance. It is important to notice that in
contrast to ASTM E 1300-04 [21], which uses a 3 s reference duration for the resistance,
CAN/CGSB 12.20-M89 [59] is based on a 60 s reference duration. This is due to the fact
that the Canadian Standard, published in 1989, is based on ASTM E 1300-94 [22] while
the 3 s reference duration was only introduced in ASTM E 1300-03 [20].
Standard cases
For standard cases, the verification format is as follows:
Ed ≤ Rd (4.27)
Ed combination of all actions (design level = including partial factors)

Rd resistance of the pane (design level = including partial factors)
The action term is:
Ed = α D D + γ · ψ · (α L L + αQ Q + α T T ) (4.28)
11
Caution, this equation is incorrect. See the excursus below.
12
This view is supported by a simple example in the following. There should obviously be no difference
between loading a glass element with 10 kN once for 60 s and loading it with the same load twice
for 30 s. When using Equation (4.26), the result is indeed the same for both cases: q3s = 12.06 kN.
Equation (4.25), however, yields q3s = 10 kN · (60 s/3 s)1/16 = 12.06 kN for the first case and q3s =
10 kN · (30 s/3 s)1/16 + 10 kN · (30 s/3 s)1/16 = 23.10 kN for the second case.

D dead loads (self weight, invariant hydrostatic pressure)

L live load (snow, rain, use and occupancy, variable hydrostatic pressure)
Q live loads (wind, stack effect, earthquake, climatic and altitude load for IGUs)
T effects of temperature differences except those included in Q
αx partial factors: α D = 1.25 (unfavourable) or 0.85 (favourable); α L = αQ = 1.50;
α T = 1.25
γ importance factor: γ = 1.0 (in general), γ ≥ 0.8 (farm buildings having low
human occupancy or buildings for which collapse is not likely to cause serious
consequences)
ψ load combination factor: ψ = 1.0 (when only one of L, Q and T acts), ψ = 0.7
(when two of L, Q and T act), ψ = 0.6 (when all of L, Q and T act). The
combination with the most unfavourable effect has to be determined.
The resistance term is:
R = c1 · c2 · c3 · c4 · Rref (4.29)
c1 glass type factor: 1.0 (flat glass, laminated glass), 0.5 (sand blasted, etched or
wired glass)
c2 heat treatment factor: 1.0 (annealed glass), 2.0 (heat strengthened glass), 4.0
(fully tempered glass)
c3 load duration coefficient
load type approx. equiv. duration ANG HSG FTG
wind and earthquake 1 min 1.0 1.0 1.0
sustained (snow, ponding) 1 week to 1 month 0.5 0.7 0.9
continuous (dead load, hydr. pressure) 1 year to 10 years 0.4 0.6 0.8
c4 load sharing coefficient (for insulating glass units): 1.0 (monolithic glass), 1.7
and 2.0 (double-glazed and triple-glazed sealed insulating glass units with
similar glass types and thicknesses)
Rref reference factored resistance of glass (the standard gives tabulated values)
(factored resistance of annealed glass loaded to failure under a constant load in
60 s; the values given are based on the minimum allowable (not the nominal)
thickness and an expected failure probability of 0.8%)
Laminated glass may be considered as monolithic glass if the load duration is < 1 minute
and the temperature < 70 ◦ C or if the load duration is < 1 week and the temperature
< 20 ◦ C. For any other condition, laminated glass has to be considered as layered glass
(no composite action may be assumed).
Special cases
For non-standard applications that are not covered by the tables and factors, some more
general indications are given. They allow to get more insight into the model that the
tabulated values are based on. The area effect is accounted for by
RA = Rref · A(−1/m)
e
(4.30)
where A is the area of the pane in m2 and me ‘varies from about 5 to 7’. The load duration
effect is accounted for by
R t = Rref · t (−1/ñ) (4.31)

4.5. ANALYSIS AND COMMENTS 101
with t being the load duration in minutes and ñ being 15 for ANG, 30 HSG and 70 for
FTG.
It is crucial to notice that ñ is not equal to the exponential crack velocity parameter n
although the letter ‘n’ is used in CAN/CGSB 12.20-M89 [59]. The tilde has therefore been
added here to avoid confusion. Based on [219, 220], the standard assumes that σ ∝ Rc ,
σ being the ‘stress in fracture origin areas’, R the uniform lateral load and c a constant
< 1. It is ñ = cn, which means that Equation (4.31) is in fact a combination of Brown’s
integral (see Section 3.3.4) with the proportionality between the stress and q c found for
rectangular plates (q is the uniform lateral load). As this proportionality and the value
of c are included in ñ, the tables and equations in the Canadian Standard should not be
applied to other geometries, boundary conditions or loading conditions. The value of c is
not directly given in the standard, but as n is said to be 16 (called d in the terminology of
the standard) and ñ = 15, it should be 15/16.
For general cases, CAN/CGSB 12.20-M89 [59] recommends to limit stresses to 25 MPa
away from the edges of plates and to 20 MPa on clean-cut edges. These values have to be
corrected by the factor for the area effect and most probably also for the load duration,
although the latter is not mentioned explicitly.
Shortcomings
The n versus ñ issue gives rise to a certain number of problems and misunderstandings.
This has already been seen when discussing Shen’s design method (Section 4.3.3), but it
also affects the Canadian standard itself. In Appendix B of the standard, the one-minute
reference resistance Rref is said to be (Rf is the failure load at the time of failure t f in
minutes):
t 1/ñ
f
Rref = Rf (4.32)
ñ + 1
Using the equations in Section 3.3.4 and σ ∝ Rc , it is seen, however, that it should be13 :
t 1/ñ
f
Rref = Rf (4.33)
n+1
4.5 Analysis and comments
The preceding sections have shown that most of today’s design methods are actually
variations, extensions or simplifications of others. These may be grouped into: European
design methods, which are based on the DELR design method, and North American design
methods, which are based on the GFPM.
The following analyses and comments aim at helping the engineer, who uses the above
mentioned design methods, to better understand their bases, advantages, drawbacks and
limits of validity.
13
Though this has already been pointed out in [168], the standard has not yet been revised at the time of
writing (2006).

Main concepts
In Table 4.8, European and North American design methods are compared with respect
to the main concepts that they are based on. It can be seen that the two approaches are
not directly comparable because of conceptual incompatibilities. Data from experiments
designed for one method cannot directly be used in conjunction with the other method.
Table 4.8: Comparison of European and North American design methods.
European design methods North American design methods

Testing procedure to Constant stress rate coaxial dou- Large rectangular glass plates ex-
obtain strength data ble ring tests with σ̇test = posed to uniform lateral load.
2 ± 0.4 MPa/s on specimens
with Atest = 0.24 m2 (cf. Sec-
tion 3.5.2).
Surface condition of Artificially induced homogeneous Weathered windows glass.
strength test specimens surface damage.∗
Design ‘strength’ A single value is used, the ‘char- Two interdependent parameters
definition acteristic value of the inherent called ‘surface flaw parameters’
strength’† . It is defined as the 5% e and k̃ are used. Their determi-
m
fractile value (at 0.95 confidence nation from experimental data is
level) of the failure stress mea- based on the stress history at the
sured in the experiments. visually determined failure origin
and a rather complex iterative
procedure.
Subcritical crack Taken into account by load dura- Only one crack velocity parame-
growth tion factors that depend on the ter is used explicitly. It is equiva-
loading only. The factors are lent to the parameter n in Euro-
based on the empirical relation- pean methods and assumed to be
ship v = S · KIn , (cf. Section 3.2). 16.
Extrapolation from Some but not all differences be- Graphs are provided for many
experiments to tween laboratory conditions and common cases (in terms of ge-
in-service conditions actual in-service conditions are ometry and support conditions).
accounted for by correction co- They provide uniform lateral
efficients. Details vary between loads that a given glass pane can
methods, see Section 4.3. withstand for a reference time pe-
riod.
Taking the glass type Mostly by adding the absolute By multiplying the load resis-
into account value of the residual surface tance of a float glass element
stress (multiplied by a ‘safety by some load duration-dependent
factor’) to the allowable tensile glass type factor.‡
stress of float glass.
∗
The generally used parameter set does, however, not directly reflect test data, see Section 4.3.1.
†
In contrast to usual characteristic resistance values, this one is not a ‘real’ material parameter. It depends on
the geometry, the surface condition, the environment and the loading of the specimens. The term ‘characteristic
value’ is therefore somewhat misleading, which is why it is put in inverted commas.
‡
In CAN/CGSB 12.20-M89 [59], the glass type factor (called ‘heat treatment factor’) does not depend on the
load duration. The load duration factor, however, is glass type dependent, which comes to the same thing.

Time-dependence of the glass strength
The tensile strength of glass strength is time-dependent due to stress corrosion (see
Section 3.2). The design methods presented above conceal this dependence within
coefficients, such that the underlying assumptions are not readily visible. They are,
therefore, briefly discussed in the ensuing text.
Current glass design methods assume that the crack velocity parameters are well
known constant values. The ‘classic’ European crack velocity parameters have been
published in [225]. They are based on the ambient condition crack growth data from
Richter [284] who determined the parameters by optically measuring the growth of large
through-thickness cracks on the edge of specimens loaded in uniform tension. On this
basis, ‘design parameters’ for the DELR design method were chosen in [43]. (These design
parameters represent substantially higher crack velocities than Richter’s measurements,
see Figure 3.3). The European draft standard prEN 13474 and the design method by
Siebert are directly based on the DELR design method and use the same parameters. Shen
uses a different approach, see Section 4.3.3.
The GFPM uses only one crack velocity parameter explicitly. It is equivalent to the
parameter n in European design methods and assumed to be equal to 16.
Laboratory testing to obtain strength data
The design methods presented in this chapter are based on strength data obtained at
ambient conditions. The parameters meant to represent the surface condition or a
e in the North American design methods, θA and β in the
‘material strength’ (k̃ and m
European design methods) are, therefore, inevitably dependent on the surface condition
and on crack growth behaviour. This is a drawback for two reasons. Firstly, unrelated
physical aspects are combined within a single value. Secondly, the large scatter and the
stress rate dependence of the crack velocity parameters (see Section 3.2) make accurate
estimation of the crack growth that occurs during experiments at ambient conditions
difficult. Inaccurate estimation, however, can yield unsafe results. This issue is further
discussed in Chapter 6.
Load duration effects
Time-dependent effects related to loads are commonly referred to as ‘load duration effects’
or ‘duration-of-load effects’.14
All design methods presented in this chapter are implicitly or explicitly based on the
assumption that crack growth and with it the probability of failure of a crack or an entire
glass element can be modelled using the risk integral, also known as Brown’s integral (see
Section 3.3.4).
Lifetime prediction based on the risk integral implies that the failure probability can be
described accurately by accounting for the crack growth (damage accumulation) during
the lifetime only while neglecting the influence of the initial surface condition and of
the momentary load. These simplifying assumptions have important consequences. The
14
Strictly speaking, the term is not very accurate because it implies constant loads. In the more general case of
time-variant actions, ‘action history effects’ would be more appropriate. As ‘load duration effect’ represents
commonly accepted terminology and is widely used in academic publications, the term is nevertheless used
in the present document.

momentary failure probability at a point in time is independent of the momentary load at

that time (which is not the case in reality). Furthermore, the material resistance obtained
from an equivalent stress based model converges on infinity for very short loading times
or very slow subcritical crack growth. This is clearly inaccurate. It should converge on the
inert strength, which is an upper resistance limit (cf. Section 3.3.3).
These issues were among the reasons that led to confusion and a general lack of
confidence in advanced glass design methods. Together with the high variance in experi-
mentally determined parameters, they are also the main reasons for various researchers
to claim that the glass failure prediction model and any Weibull distribution based design
approach are fundamentally flawed and unrealistic (e. g. [57, 58, 282, 283]).
It can be shown that the risk integral is a good approximation if the crack depth at
failure is substantially greater than the initial crack depth [187]. It is, therefore, suitable
for structural design calculations. With very high loading rates or low crack velocities, i. e.
when little subcritical crack growth occurs, the simplified approach grossly underestimates
the probability of failure and leads to unrealistic and unsafe results (resistance above
the inert strength). For these cases, which include the interpretation of experiments, the
generalized formulation, which is presented in Section 3.3.4, must be used.
All design methods account for the load duration effect by a factor that depends on the
load duration and sometimes the residual stress only. In European methods, this factor is
applied to the allowable maximum or equivalent in-plane principal stress. In GFPM-based
methods, it is applied to the allowable lateral load. This is again a simplifying assumption.
In reality, the load duration effect additionally depends on many other factors, including
the action history and the element’s geometry. For guidance on exact calculations, see
Chapter 6.
Residual stress
Several methods include the effect of residual stresses within the resistance of the glass.
It is, however, crucial to distinguish residual stress clearly from inherent strength . Only
decompressed parts of a glass element’s surface are subjected to subcritical crack growth
and its consequences. Furthermore, the uncertainties, and consequently the partial factors,
are different for residual stress and inherent strength.
Design methods accounting for residual stress explicitly superimpose the residual
stress on the inherent strength. This assumes that the inherent strength is not affected by
heat treatment. There is evidence showing that the tempering process actually causes a
certain amount of ‘crack healing’ [40, 190]; this assumption can thus be considered safe
(conservative) for design.
Size effect
As a direct consequence of the use of Weibull statistics (see below), the resistance of glass
elements depends on their surface areas in all design methods. As only tensile stress can
cause glass failure, the size depends not on the total, but on the decompressed, surface
area. For given geometry and support conditions, the latter depends in general15 on the
load intensity and is therefore time-variant. Taking this aspect accurately into account is
15
In some special but frequent cases such as annealed glass plates exposed to uniform lateral load, the whole
surface is decompressed at all non-zero load intensities.

1.3 Figure 4.9:

The size effect’s dependence on the
1.2
Size effect, σ (A1) / σ (A2)
Weibull shape factor or first surface flaw

1.1
parameter (using Equation (4.34)).
1.0
s = 25
0.9
s = 15
s = 10
0.8
s=5
0.7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ratio of the surface areas exposed to tensile stress, A1 / A2
complex (see Section 3.3). European design methods define the size factor based on the
total surface area, which makes it load-independent. US and Canadian standards multiply
the load resistance of annealed glass elements by a factor. As the entire surface of an
annealed glass plate is immediately decompressed on loading, the two approaches yield
the same result. The size effect can be expressed as
σ(A1 )
1/s
A2
= (4.34)
σ(A2 ) A1
where σ(A1 ) and σ(A2 ) are the tensile strengths of structural members with surface areas
A1 and A2 respectively exposed to tensile stress. In European methods, s is the shape
parameter β of the tensile fracture strength distribution. In GFPM based methods, s is the
surface flaw parameter m. e 16 Figure 4.9 shows that the size effect is quite significant for
the ASTM E 1300 value of m e = 7, while it becomes almost negligible (for realistic panel
sizes) for the value β = 25 that is generally used in European design methods.
Two issues with the size effect are rather problematic: Firstly, the exponent s differs
much between design methods. Secondly, while the size effect in as-received glass is
verified by experimental evidence the same cannot be said for weathered glass. Calderone
[58], for instance, found little or no relationship between the total surface area and the
breakage stress or between the most stressed panel area and the breakage stress. This
issue is further discussed in Chapter 6.
Weibull statistics
According to the model in Section 3.3, the strength of as-received or homogeneously

damaged glass specimens should follow a two-parameter Weibull distribution. This is
indeed the case with experimental data obtained at inert conditions. The goodness-of-fit
of the results of common ambient strength tests to the Weibull distribution, however, is
often poor. Several researchers have, therefore, proposed using log-normal or normal
distributions to represent glass strength. This is problematic because the Weibull distri-
bution results from fundamental hypotheses of the model in Section 3.3. The use of a
non-Weibull distribution type would require an alternative glass strength model.
In contrast to inert strength data, strength data obtained at ambient conditions do not
solely represent a glass specimen’s surface condition, but are additionally influenced by
16
e and β are not identical. It is β = m(n
The two parameters m e + 1)/n, so typically β = 17/16 · m.
e [187]

subcritical crack growth. Haldimann [187] showed that the goodness-of-fit of ambient
strength data to the Weibull distribution decreases as time to failure increases, which
means as the influence of subcritical crack growth increases. The poor fit of ambient
strength data to the Weibull distribution can, therefore, be explained by the wide variability
of the crack velocity parameters (cf. Section 3.2).
In conclusion, Weibull statistics are in principle well suited to describe the strength of
glass. The problems encountered are not related to the statistical model itself. Instead,
they are caused by the variability of the crack growth parameters and by the fact that the
damage on glass elements in in-service conditions is often not uniform and homogenous.
This issue is further discussed in Chapter 6.
Biaxial stress fields
The GFPM-based standards use the biaxial stress correction factor proposed by the GFPM.
It depends on the principal stress ratio (which is, in general, load intensity-dependent) and
on the surface flaw parameter m. e Though not explicitly stated, only the fully-developed
principal stress ratio is used for the resistance graphs and the testing procedure. Based on
this ratio, a single biaxial stress correction factor for each point on the surface is calculated
and assumed to be valid for all load intensities.
European glass design methods generally assume all cracks to be oriented perpendic-
ularly to the major principal stress. This is equivalent to assuming an equibiaxial stress
field. While this assumption is conservative (safe) for design, it is not conservative when
deriving glass strength data from tests (see Section 6.4).
4.6 Conclusion and Outlook
Current widely used design methods suffer from notable shortcomings. They are, for
instance, not applicable to general conditions, but are limited to special cases like rectan-
gular plates, uniform lateral loads, constant loads, time-independent stress distributions
and the like. Some model parameters combine several physical aspects, so that they
depend on the experimental setup used for their determination. The condition of the
glass surface is not represented by user-modifiable parameters, but is embedded implicitly.
Finally, the design methods contain inconsistencies and different models yield differing
results.
The following two chapters present recent findings which endeavour to redress these
issues. Chapter 5 explains ways to design structural glass elements for compressive in-
plane loads and stability problems. Chapter 6 explains how the design methods discussed
in the present chapter can be generalized and their scope of application can be extended
based on the considerations in Chapter 3.

Chapter
5
Design for Compressive In-plane
Loads and Stability Problems
5.1 In-plane loading and stability
The compressive strength of glass is significantly higher than its tensile strength [78, 167].
Experimental studies [240] demonstrated that it is possible to utilize the enormous com-
pressive in-plane load carrying capacity of glass panels. This opens up new applications of
glass panels in structures such as columns, transparent walls, beams, for fins to stiffen
façade elements, for shear panels, and for applications where the glass is used in a similar
way to steel, aluminum or timber [231, 334]. Due to the high slenderness of structural
glass elements made of thin glass plates, they tend to fail because of instability. Every
in-plane loaded glass element must, therefore, be checked against stability failure. Several
established design methods exist for common structural materials (i. e. steel, timber),
but these methods cannot be applied directly to glass, since the influence of production
tolerances (thickness, variation in panel size), of the initial imperfections, of the brittle
behaviour, and of the viscoelastic behaviour of laminated glass interlayers have to be
specifically considered for glass. A substantial amount of fundamental research has been
carried out in the past few years to investigate the stability behaviour of structural glass
elements. Nevertheless results are not yet implemented in existing design standards.
Column buckling of glass elements was studied by Kutterer [232], Luible [241, 244], and
Overend [264]. Fundamental research on lateral torsional buckling of glass beams was
done by Belis [35], Holberndt [238], Kasper [222] and Luible [241, 243]. Research on
glass plate buckling is a relatively new research field. First experimental and analytical
studies were carried out by Englhardt [160], Luible [241] and Wellershoff [333, 334].
In the past, stability problems were described with bifurcation buckling models based
on linear elastic stability theory. The bifurcation buckling theory assumes that a geo-
metrically perfect elastic structural member that is subjected to an increasing load fails
suddenly when a critical load is reached. This critical load depends only on the geometry,
the loading conditions and the flexural stiffness of the element and may be determined
by mathematical models (i. e. [319]) or by numerical approaches such as finite element
analysis (FEA). Bifurcation buckling models are generally unable to describe the buckling
107
108 CHAPTER 5. DESIGN FOR COMPRESSIVE IN-PLANE LOADS
strength of real structural elements with initial out of straightness and non-linear material
behaviour (such as in the case of steel or aluminium). The critical buckling load represents
an upper strength limit for column buckling and lateral torsional buckling. In the case of
plate buckling, loads higher than the critical buckling load may be applied because of the
so-called post buckling behaviour of plates, which is a consequence of membrane effects.
Because of geometric imperfections (i. e. initial deformations w0 and v0 , see Figure 5.1),
the load carrying behaviour of stability-critical structural elements is characterized by
deformations even for very small loads. A further increase of the load leads to a non-
linear increase of the deformations until the strength of the material or a deformation
limit is reached. Therefore, bifurcation buckling models are not satisfactory for design.
Nevertheless, they are of great importance because the critical buckling loads calculated
this way are often used as reference values for design aids like buckling curves. More
realistic models and approaches, such as second order models and non-linear numerical
buckling analysis, are required to describe this load carrying behaviour. At this stage it
is important to note that non-linear material behaviour does not need to be taken into
account because of the ideally elastic behaviour of glass.
N
y F
a
z v
z
Lcr w
y y w
LD σx
x
z
h x
x y y
y z z b
z N = ∫ σ x dy
perfect perfect b
bar beam
Ncr Fcr,LT perfect
plate imperfect
plate
imperfect imperfect Ncr,P
bar beam
w0 w v0 v w0 w
a) column buckling b) lateral torsional buckling c) plate buckling
Figure 5.1: Fundamental stability problems and load carrying behaviour: a) column buckling, b)
lateral torsional buckling, c) plate buckling.
5.2 Parameters having an influence on the buckling behaviour
The buckling behaviour of structural glass elements is mainly influenced by

u production tolerances (i. e. glass thickness, geometrical imperfections),
u the initial deformation,
u the interlayer material used in laminated glass,

5.2. PARAMETERS HAVING AN INFLUENCE ON THE BUCKLING BEHAVIOUR 109
u the linear elastic material behaviour without plastic deformability or strain harden-
ing effect as for steel,
u the fracture strength, which depends on the inherent glass strength and on the
residual stress (see Chapter 3),
u the boundary conditions (i. e. type of fixing, silicone joints and gaskets, etc.)
Some of these influencing aspects have recently been studied [241, 293]. The main
findings are summarized in the following.
5.2.1 Glass thickness

Glass manufacturers try to save material in making the best use of the thickness tolerances
specified by the codes [153]. The real glass thickness t is generally less than the nominal
value, therefore reducing the moment of inertia of the cross section and, thus the buckling
strength. Measurements showed that glass thickness values follow a normal distribution.
The 5% fractile value corresponds to 97.6% of the nominal glass thickness [241].
5.2.2 Initial deformation

The initial geometric deformation (w0 and v0 , see Figure 5.1) is mainly caused by the tem-
pering process. The measurements confirmed that non-tempered annealed flat glass has
a very low initial deformation (< L/2500), while heat-strengthened and fully tempered
glass can have a sinusoidal initial deformation up to L/300. laminated glass showed
the same results as monolithic glass. The measured values fitted well to a normal dis-
tribution with a 95% fractile value of L/386. Maximum initial deformations, however,
depend strongly on the quality of the tempering furnace and can therefore vary among
manufacturers [241].
5.2.3 Interlayer material behaviour in laminated glass

Different interlayer materials such as PVB or DuPont’s SentryGlass® Plus, which are used
in laminated glass, are discussed in Section 1.3.3.
The viscoelastic material behaviour of the PVB interlayer for example leads to a time
and temperature dependent bending behaviour of laminated glass. The resistance against
stability failure is significantly higher under short term loads than it is under long term
loads. As calculations with viscoelastic models are complicated, simplified approaches
may be used [232, 241, 333] instead, allowing for a calculation with an equivalent elastic
material.
The design approaches presented in this chapter are developed on laminated glass
with PVB interlayer. As long as the interlayer may be simplified as a linear elastic material
they may be applied to other interlayer materials as well.
5.2.4 Boundary conditions and glass fixings

The support conditions and the way the load is applied on a structural glass member may
have a positive effect, for instance when the rotation of an edge is partially restrained by
its fixing, silicone joints or gaskets. Such support conditions tend to reduce the effective
buckling length and thus increase the buckling resistance. However, if these effects are

taken into account in the design process, an adequate model has to be used and the joint
quality has to be monitored during the lifetime.
A negative effect may occur if the glass fixing creates an eccentric load introduction,
thus resulting in additional bending moments which reduce the buckling resistance.
5.3 Column buckling
5.3.1 Modelling
The load carrying behaviour of monolithic glass can be described using the second order
differential equation for a bar with length Lcr and pinned ends, with an initial sinusoidal
deformation w0 and an axial compression load N , which is applied with an eccentricity e
(Figure 5.2).
d 2 w(x) πx

EI + N w0 sin + e + w(x) = 0 (5.1)
d x2 Lcr
The elastic critical buckling load is
π2 E I
Ncr = 2
(5.2)
Lcr
and the maximum deflection w at midspan considering second order effects is

e w0
wmax = + . (5.3)
N /Ncr

1 −
p
cos Lcr /2 N /Ncr
This yields a maximum surface stress

N M N N
σmax = ± = ± (wmax + w0 + e) , (5.4)
A W A W
where N is the applied force, A is the sectional area and W is the elastic section modulus.
In laminated glass the interlayer material behaves like a shear connection between
the glass panes. Simplistically a lot of interlayer materials may be considered as an
elastic material with a constant shear stiffness for a given temperature and load duration.
Figure 5.2:
N
Column buckling model.
w0 wmax
Lcr Mmax
N N M

5.3. COLUMN BUCKLING 111
The load carrying behaviour can then be described using elastic ‘sandwich’ theory [316,
346]. The critical buckling load of a laminated glass with two or three glass panes and
symmetrical layout (Figure 5.3) is given in [241] as:
π2 (1 + α + π2 αβ) E IS
Ncr = (5.5)
1 + π2 β 2
Lcr
In the case of two glass panes, it is
I1 + I2 t int E IS
α= ; β= ; IS = b(t 1 z12 + t 2 z22 ) , (5.6)
IS Gint b(z1 + z2 )2 Lcr 2
and in the case of three glass panes, it is
2I1 + I2 t int E IS
α= ; β= ; IS = 2bt 1 z12 . (5.7)
IS Gint bz12 Lcr 2
Lcr is the buckling length, b is the width of the cross section, Gint is the shear modulus of
the interlayer material and I i = bt i3 /12 is the moment of inertia of the pane i.
A simplified approach for calculating the deflection and the maximum bending stresses
of a laminated glass consists in employing Equations (5.4) and (5.3) with the following
equivalent thickness [241]:
È
3 12 I S (1 + α + π α β)
2
t eff = (5.8)
b(1 + π2 β)
A and W in Equation (5.4) are A = b t i and W = bt eff /6 respectively.

P 2
It is assumed that the glass pane’s rotation is not restrained at either extremity and
that the load is applied axially, i. e. there are no lateral loads.
Kutterer [232] developed an analytical second order model based on sandwich theory
[316] for the analysis of the buckling behaviour of laminated glass elements under
an axially applied force. The model accounts for creep effects of the PVB interlayer.
The lateral displacement and the maximum stresses may be calculated as a function of
temperature and load duration. For a given axial load the model is able to predict a
critical time at which time delayed buckling will start.
Analytical models are generally limited to simple structural systems and certain
boundary conditions. Numerical finite element models are more flexible and powerful.
They have the advantage that the interlayer may either be represented by elastic or
viscoelastic elements based on existing material data [329]. Furthermore, arbitrary
boundary conditions (e. g. restraints due to the load introduction or intermediate supports)
may easily be incorporated (see Section 2.3.2).
Figure 5.3:
interlayer Cross section of a laminated
glass
glass t1
glass with two (left) and
glass
glass t1 t int z1
z1 three (right) glass panes
t int glass
glass t2
z2
glass
glass t2 t int z2
glass
glass t1

5.3.2 Load carrying behaviour

The column buckling behaviour of glass elements made of monolithic and laminated glass
with PVB interlayer was studied experimentally and compared to analytical and numerical
models by Luible [241] and Kutterer [232]. The models in Section 5.3.1 are suitable to
describe the load carrying behaviour of glass elements with imperfections in compression.
In contrast to monolithic glass, the buckling behaviour of laminated glass depends on
load duration and temperature because of the viscoelastic behaviour of the PVB interlayer
[242]. Several other parameters have an influence on the column buckling behaviour:
u The glass thickness t, the initial deformation w and the load eccentricity e have the
0
most important influence on the buckling strength. The real glass thickness rather
than the nominal glass thickness has to be taken into account (see Section 5.2.1).
The buckling strength that results from the real thickness may be up to 11.7% less
than the buckling strength that is obtained based on the nominal thickness.
u Because of the high compressive strength of glass, the failure origin of glass element
in compression is always on the tension surface for the panel dimensions commonly
used in buildings (L > 300 mm, t < 19 mm) and initial deformations as explained in
Section 5.2.2. The buckling strength of glass is, therefore, limited by the maximum
tensile strength [241].
u Experimental studies demonstrated that the failure origin is mainly in areas that
have a low tensile strength. In the case of annealed glass, this is the glass edge
(most severe surface damage). In the case of tempered glass, this is close to the
glass edge, where the residual compressive surface stress reaches a minimum (see
Section 3.6.4).
u The load carrying capacity of tempered glass is mainly influenced by the residual
compressive surface stress rather than by the inherent glass strength. This effect is
caused by the non-linear relationship between the applied compressive load and the
tensile stress on the glass surface (Figure 5.4). As a simplified approach for column
buckling design, the inherent strength may be neglected and the buckling strength
can be determined from the residual stress only.
u The composite action caused by the viscoelastic PVB interlayer in laminated glass
increases the buckling strength. Unfortunately, creep effects in the PVB make the
buckling strength depend on time and temperature. For low temperatures and
short-term loading the buckling strength can almost reach the buckling strength of
a monolithic cross section of the same thickness. For long-term loads (e. g. dead
Figure 5.4: N
The influence of the residual stress N
Ncr
and of the inherent strength on the
buckling strength.
Buckling strength
σ-
σ+
compressive inherent
residual stress strength
t
Tensile stress on the N

glass surface σ+

5.3. COLUMN BUCKLING 113
load) or high temperatures (> 50 ◦ C) the composite action provided by the PVB is
insignificant and the load carrying behaviour is similar to independent glass panes
without PVB. Therefore the lower limit of the buckling strength of a laminated glass
may be determined by ignoring the composite action (GPVB = 0). From a safety
point of view, a shear interaction may only be taken into account for short-term
loads like wind or impact loads and for temperatures < 25 ◦ C.
5.3.3 Structural design

Compressive members such as steel columns are generally designed using column curves.
This approach can be applied to compressive glass elements as well. In steel construction,
column curves are based on a slenderness ratio [141]. This allows the same curve to be
used for the design of members with different steel grades. However, in contrast to steel,
the slenderness ratio for glass must be based on the maximum tensile strength, as the
compressive strength does not limit the buckling strength. The application of column
curves for column buckling of glass elements has been discussed in [242]. It is shown
that as a simple approach, the maximum tensile stress in a compressed glass member can
be determined by means of elastic second order equations (Equation (5.4)). The column
buckling capacity of a glass element is adequate if
fSd ≤ fRd (5.9)
where fSd is the design value of the maximum tensile stress and fRd the design value of
the maximum tensile strength.
A reduced glass thickness and a reasonable assumption of the initial deformation has
to be considered in the second order analysis (Section 5.2). Due to the non-linear relation
between applied loads and resulting bending stresses, the maximum bending stress has to
be determined with factored load and superposition of stresses resulting from different
loads is not possible. Simplistically the tensile strength may be assumed to be equal to the
residual stress (see Section 5.3.2).
This approach applies to laminated glass as well. Generally it is advantageous to
take the composite behaviour of the interlayer into account. For PVB interlayers it is
recommended to consider a composite behaviour only for short-term loads such as wind
loads. Simplistically, the sandwich cross section may be replaced by an effective monolithic
cross section with an effective thickness t eff given by Equation (5.8). Maximum stresses
may be calculated with Equation (5.4) or numerical models.
5.3.4 Intermediate lateral supports

The buckling strength of a member with monolithic cross section is directly proportional
to the square of the buckling length. Reducing the effective buckling length by means of
an additional intermediate lateral support will increase the buckling strength by a factor
of 4 (Figure 5.5).
Ncr,2 L2
= 2 ⇒ Ncr,2 = 4Ncr,1 (5.10)
Ncr,1 L
2

This assumption is not valid for laminated glass. Decreasing the effective buckling
length of a laminated glass by intermediate lateral supports increases the buckling strength
but on the other hand it also decreases the lateral bending stiffness, which is a function
of the interlayer shear modulus and the effective shear length. The shear length may be
conservatively assumed as the distance between the supports. For a more realistic analysis
it is recommended to use suitable finite element models where the entire member is
modelled [241]. Ncr,3 may be used as a conservative approach to determine the buckling
strength of Ncr,2 (Figure 5.5). For laminated glass it may be assumed that
Ncr,3 ¶ Ncr,2 ¶ 4Ncr,1 (5.11)

.
Figure 5.5: Monolithic glass
Influence of intermediate Ncr,1 Ncr,2
lateral supports on the
critical buckling load
L/2
L
L/2
Laminated safety glass

Ncr,1 Ncr,2 Ncr,3
∆x ∆x
L/2
L/2
∆x
L
∆x
∆x=0
L/2
∆x
5.3.5 Influence of the load introduction

The laminated glass models are based on the assumption that the shear deformation
between the glass panes at the extremities is free and that the load is applied symmetrically
on the cross section. In practice the glass edges of a laminated glass made of HSG or
FTG are not flush and loads are generally applied through intermediate materials such as
neoprene, injected mortar, high strength plastics or aluminium. The partial shear restraint
due to these load introduction materials leads to a stiffer load carrying behaviour than
assumed in the model. Uneven glass edges result in an asymmetric load distribution on
the glass panes, which creates additional bending moments. Such bending moments may
be determined for example with the model presented in [241], which takes asymmetric
thickness of the load introduction material into account. If the influence of the glass edges
is critical, detailed finite element models are recommended for design.

5.4. LATERAL TORSIONAL BUCKLING 115
5.4 Lateral torsional buckling
Lateral torsional buckling is a limit state of structural stability, where a beam is subjected
to bending. The typical structural deformation is a combination of lateral deflection and
twisting (see Figure 5.1). In glass structures lateral torsional buckling may, for instance,
occur in glass beams or glass fins used as lateral stiffeners in façades.
5.4.1 Modelling
The critical torsional buckling moment (bifurcation buckling) of a beam with a rectangular
cross section can generally be determined by
È 
π2 E Iz  2
GK LLT
Mcr,LT = C1 2  C2 za + 2 + C2 za  (5.12)

LLT π E Iz
where E is Young’s modulus, Iz is the moment of inertia about the z-axis, G is the shear
modulus, K is the torsion constant, and LLT is the unrestrained beam length. The factors
C1 and C2 take into account different bending moments Table 5.6 and za is the distance
between the center of gravity and the point where the load is applied. Due to the
rectangular cross-section of monolithic and laminated glass beams warping torsion may
be neglected in practice. In [238] a slightly different formula, based on [286], that
accounts for warping torsion effects, is proposed for the calculation of the critical buckling
moment.
The critical lateral torsional buckling moment of laminated glass may be calculated
using Equation (5.12), where the lateral bending stiffness E Iz and the torsional stiffness
GK are replaced by an equivalent stiffness, E Iz,eff and GKeff . Both stiffnesses are based
on sandwich theory [316, 346] in order to take into account the composite action of the
interlayer in laminated glass [241]. The equivalent bending stiffness for laminated glass
with two or three glass panes is:
αβπ2 + α + 1

E Iz,eff = E Is (5.13)
1 + π2 β
In the case of two glass panes, it is
I1 + I2 t int E IS
α= ; β= ; IS = h(t 1 z12 + t 2 z22 ) , (5.14)
IS Gint h(z1 + z2 )2 LLT 2
and in the case of three glass panes, it is
2I1 + I2 t int E IS
α= ; β= ; IS = 2ht 1 z12 . (5.15)
IS Gint hz12 LLT 2
Table 5.6: Lateral torsional buckling factors C1 and C2 .
Bending moment C1 C2
Constant 1.0 -
Linear (zero at mid span) 2.7 -
Parabolic (zero at both extremities) 1.13 0.46
Triangular (zero at both extremities and maximum at mid span) 1.36 0.55

Figure 5.7: LLT

Lateral torsional buck-
ling model with bend- My My
x
ing moments applied at
both extremities.
w
Elevation End support
z
x
My
v My
Top view
y
Initial position
y
My w
Section
φ
Final position
v
z
The variables t 1 , t 2 , t int , and z1 are explained in Figure 5.3, h is the beam height, E is
Young’s modulus, I i is the moment of inertia of glass pane i, Gint is the shear modulus of
the interlayer and LLT is the buckling length. The equivalent torsional stiffness GKeff for
laminated glass is
¨
GKglass1 + GKglass2 + GKcomp two glass panes
GKeff = (5.16)
GKglass1 + GKglass2 + GKglass3 + GKcomp three glass panes
with
2 λh

GKcomp = G IS,comp 1− tanh (5.17)
λh 2

4 t 1 + t 2 + t
2
t1 t2

int h two glass panes
IS,comp = 2 t1 + t2 (5.18)
2(t 2 + 2t int + t 1 )2 t 1 h

three glass panes
The aforementioned formulas are sufficiently accurate for the determination of the
critical buckling load of glass beams. In order to describe the non-linear lateral torsional
buckling behaviour of an initially imperfect glass beam, analytical models have been
developed for the basic structural system of a simple beam with uniformly applied load,
constant bending moments and concentrated load at mid span [222]. Those analytical
models are limited to small deformations and bending moments M < 0.8Mcr,LT . Numerical
models such as finite element models are generally more powerful. They enable arbitrary
boundary conditions and structural systems as well as the non-linear behaviour with
significant lateral deformations to be modelled [241]. For monolithic glass, shell elements
are sufficient. For laminated glass, different glass panes and interlayers have to be taken
into account. A simple approach, in order to reduce the size of laminated glass models, is

to model the glass panes with shell elements and the interlayer with volume elements.
Shell elements and volume elements are either tied together with coupled nodes or
modelled with identical nodes for the shell and volume elements. In the latter case, the
shell elements must be defined with an offset (Figure 5.8). A lot of interlayer materials
may simply be modelled as an elastic material with an appropriate shear stiffness or as a
viscoelastic material based on existing material models [329].
Symetric axis Figure 5.8:

u=0; φy=φy=0 Typical lateral torsional buck-
ling model with shell elements
Laminated u φx
glass for glass and volume elements
φy for the interlayer.
v
w
φz Interlayer
(solid elements)
=0 t
=PVB
tint
=0
t=1 t1
Support Glass
(shell elements with
an offset of t/2) Identical nodes
A typical numerical stability analysis comprises the following steps:

u Creating the model with appropriate elements and material definition.
u Application of the boundary conditions such as vertical and lateral supports and
loads. In case of laminated glass applied conditions have to allow for a free rotation
and shear deformation of the glass.
u Start of the simulation with a modal analysis of the system. The resulting eigenvalue
corresponds to the critical buckling load, the resulting first eigenvector corresponds
to the first critical buckling shape of the initial deformation.
u Application of the initial deformation using a scaled shape of the first eigenform of
the system.
u Non-linear analysis on this ‘imperfect’ system.
u Postprocessing in order to identify the maximum deflection and principal surface
stress.

The load carrying behaviour of glass beams made of monolithic and laminated glass with
PVB interlayer was studied with tests and numerical models in [35, 222, 241, 244]. It
turned out that even under small loads and initial imperfections the top cord of the beams
tend to deform laterally. The relation between applied load and lateral beam deflection is
non-linear. Similar to column buckling, the monolithic glass shows an elastic behaviour
(Figure 5.1), while the load carrying behaviour of laminated glass is characterized by the
viscoelastic material PVB. Temperature and load duration have a major influence on the
buckling strength of laminated glass. The typical load carrying behaviour is explained in
Figure 5.9:

u A laminated glass beam which is subjected to a constant force F shows a dispropor-

tional increase of the lateral deformation due the creeping of the PVB (Figure 5.9).
If the applied force F is less than the buckling strength of the glass panes without
taking the PVB interlayer into account (GPVB = 0), the lateral deflections will con-
verge. For load durations t → ∞, the lateral deflections converge on the value of a
glass beam with independent panes. For loads higher than the buckling strength of
the glass without taking the PVB interlayer into account, creeping effects lead to
a disproportional non converging increase of the lateral deflection until the glass
breaks.
u A laminated glass beam subjected to a linearly increasing displacement u0 (e. g. in
a lateral torsional buckling test) has a load versus lateral deflection behaviour as
shown in Figure 5.9. The applied force increases up to a critical maximum until
creep effects become important and the deflection increases disproportionately.
Higher displacement rates lead to higher peak values. The force converges on the
buckling strength of independent glass panes (GPVB = 0).
The glass beam fails and the buckling resistance is attained when the maximum tensile
strength on the glass surface is exceeded. In general this buckling resistance occurs at
load levels lower than the critical buckling load calculated with the bifurcation buckling
model. An exception are very slender glass beams with a long span and a high ratio of
beam height to glass thickness. Such beams show high lateral deflections and a warping
deformation of the cross section. This deformation causes a load carrying behaviour which
is closer to the behaviour of shell structures than of beams and the buckling resistance is
higher than the critical buckling load [241].
Figure 5.9:
Typical lateral torsional buck-
Fcr
Applied force F
ling behaviour of monolithic Glass beam F, u

and laminated glass beams. v0,1
v0,2
v0,1 < v0,2
lateral deflection v
Initial deformation v0
Lateral deflection v
Monolithic glass
Lateral deflection v
v→∞
u'1
u'2
Force F
F > Fcr(GPVB=0)
Fcr(GPVB=0)
v → conv.
F < Fcr(GPVB=0) u'1 > u'2
Time t Lateral deflection v

Laminated safety glass Laminated safety glass
subjected to a constant subjected to a constant
force F displacement rate u’

Because of the high compressive strength, the buckling resistance of glass beams is
governed by the tensile glass strength. As the highest tensile stresses occur on the edge,
the tensile strength close to the edge is generally critical for buckling failure. Failure origin
monitoring during buckling tests on HSG and FTG showed three critical areas where the
stresses exceeded the tensile glass strength (Figure 5.10):
u the corner of the edge (a)
u the lateral surface in a certain distance from the edge (b)

u the center of the glass edge (c).
Which failure origin finally causes failure of the beam depends on the residual edge
stresses, on surface damages, and on the stress field due to loading.
Figure 5.10:
Typical failure origins.
The shear connection by the PVB interlayer has a significant influence on the buck-
ling strength. Figure 5.11 shows the influence of the PVB shear modulus GPVB on the
critical buckling moment Mcr,LT and compares it to the case without shear connection
(Mcr,LT,without PVB ). For realistic values of GPVB (< 5 MPa), Mcr,LT is at best 3.2 times
Mcr,LT,without PVB . In order to achieve a behaviour which is equivalent to a monolithic
glass pane, the shear modulus would have to be at least 300 MPa. A significant composite
action due to a PVB interlayer may therefore only be taken into account for short term
loads.
M cr,LT /M cr,LT,without PVB t = 10/1.52/10 mm Figure 5.11:

6 Influence of the shear modulus GPVB on
L LT = 1000mm, h = 200mm
the critical lateral torsional buckling
L LT = 2000mm, h = 200mm load Mcr,LT . The curves show the ratio
5 L LT = 3000mm, h = 300mm Mcr,LT / Mcr,LT,without PVB .
L LT = 3000mm, h = 400mm
L LT = 4000mm, h = 400mm
4
1
0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000
G PVB [N/mm2]


In general there are three different approaches for lateral torsional buckling design of
glass beams:
u Numerical models (FEA)
u Analytical models based on second order theory

uBuckling curves derived from buckling tests and numerical FEA models
The lateral torsional buckling resistance of a glass beam may be determined by means
of an appropriate finite element model (Figure 5.8). Such models allow non-linear effects,
initial imperfections and arbitrary boundary conditions to be taken into account.
Analytical models based on second order theory are limited to elementary structural
systems and boundary conditions. They are also limited to small deformations and the
application of the models in practice is relatively complex.
The buckling design with design curves, such as those adopted in steel and timber
design, provide a simple and quick design method. This method is also convenient for glass.
Lindner and Holberndt [238] and Luible and Crisinel [244] investigated the application
of buckling curves for the lateral torsional buckling design of glass beams. Generally
buckling curves give reduction factors χLT for design as a function of the slenderness
ratio λLT . In contrast to steel, both parameters are based on the tensile strength of glass.
The slenderness ratio is a function of the structural system, the boundary conditions, the
loading conditions and the glass type:
È
σRk 2σRk Iy
r
λLT = = (5.19)
σcr,LT Mcr,LT h
σRk is the characteristic tensile strength and σcr,LT is the critical lateral torsional buckling
stress. The critical lateral torsional buckling moment Mcr,LT may be calculated with
Equation (5.12). For the design of laminated glass elements, the equivalent lateral
bending stiffness E Iz,eff (Equation (5.13)) and the equivalent torsional stiffness GKeff
(Equation (5.16)) may be used. The reduction factor is defined as

χLT = f λLT , (5.20)
hence the design value of the bending moment capacity of the glass beam becomes
MLT,Rd = χLT · σRd · Wy (5.21)
where σRd is the design value of the tensile strength and Wy is the section modulus
about the strong axis of the beam. For various loading conditions (linear load, con-
centrated load, constant bending moment), glass geometries, interlayer shear moduli,
and initial deformations v0 , reduction factors were simulated using numerical models,
compared to experimental test results and plotted in buckling diagrams [238, 241]. An
example taken from [241] is shown in Figure 5.12. Since there are currently no design
methods or codes, these diagrams may serve as a preliminary orientation. The following
should be noted:
u Lindner and Holberndt [238] and Luible [241] confirmed that it is possible to
define lateral torsional buckling curves for glass based on the tensile glass strength.

u Based on tests and numerical simulations, reduction factors for monolithic glass
[238, 241] and for laminated glass [241] were determined (Figure 5.12). These
authors also discuss possible buckling curves.
u Reduction factors for laminated glass are lower than for monolithic glass.
As a conservative approach, the buckling curve (c) of the European steel design
u
code [140] might be used for the design of monolithic and laminated glass beams
that are subjected to concentrated loads, uniformly distributed loads or constant
bending (Figure 5.12). Luible [241] showed that all reduction factors found from
simulations and laboratory tests are located above this curve.
The lateral torsional buckling verification for glass beams is as follows:
MLT,Sd ≤ MLT,Rd (5.22)
MLT,Sd is the design value of the bending moment due to applied loads.
In practice, additional criteria might have an influence on the lateral torsional buckling
of glass beam as well:
u Silicone joints or gaskets generally create an additional lateral restraint of the beam
top cord and therefore increase the buckling resistance. If the functioning of the
silicone joint and gaskets can be guaranteed over the entire design life, they may be
considered as additional elastic supports [37].
u The unfavourable influence of details such as supports or restraints on the load
carrying behaviour has to be studied carefully during the design process. Some
types of supports (e. g. clamps, point fixings) may lead to local stress concentrations
in the glass because of their insufficient rotation capacity. This can be more critical
than global buckling.
1.2 Figure 5.12:

critical buckling load Reduction factors χLT for lateral
1.0 prEN 1993-1-1: curve (c) torsional buckling of a glass beam
laminated safety glass
Reduction factorr χLT
subjected to a concentrated force

0.8 monolithic glass
at mid-span with v0 = LD /270.
0.6
F
0.4
0.2 v 0 = L LT/270
0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Slenderness λLT

5.5 Plate buckling

Dr. Frank WELLERSHOFF
Glass plates subjected to in-plane loads tend to fail because of plate buckling. Today, there
are only few built structures where glass plates are subjected to in-plane loads. In future
this might change as such structures offer new architectural possibilities in terms of high
transparency combined with a high load carrying capacity [241, 333].
Depending on the type of loading, different structural behaviours have to be distin-
guished:
u plate subjected to pure compression
u plate subjected to shear

u plate subjected to compression and shear
uplate subjected to in-plane and lateral loads
The ensuing parts of this section show the results of buckling investigations on glass
plates that are simply supported along their edges and subjected to combinations of pure
compression and shear. A combined loading of compression, shear and lateral loads is yet
to be investigated in glass structures.
Figure 5.13:
Different types of
plate buckling.
Compression Shear Compression In- and out of

and shear plane loads
5.5.1 Modelling
The critical buckling load of a monolithic glass may be calculated with analytical models
based on linear elastic bending theory [194]. However, due to post-critical buckling
behaviourof plates, the critical buckling loads Ncrit and τcrit are not a criterion for the
ultimate strength and thus not suitable for plate buckling design. The critical buckling load
overestimates the real buckling strength of compact plates and significantly underestimates
the real buckling strength of slender plates. Nevertheless critical buckling load formulas
are shown in the subsequent text as they are needed for plate buckling design methods
such as buckling curves (see section Section 5.5.3).
The critical buckling load Nx,crit (given as force per unit length) of a monolithic plate
subjected to pure compression (Figure 5.14) is
m α 2 π2 E t t 2
Nx,crit = + (5.23)
α 12 1 − ν 2

m b
where α = a/b (Figure 5.14), m is number of half sine waves in the x-direction, t is the
glass thickness, b is the width of the plate, E is Young’s modulus, and ν is Poisson’s ratio.

5.5. PLATE BUCKLING 123
Nx τ Figure 5.14:
Structural system of a four
side simply supported plate
subjected to pure compression
τ
(left) and shear (right).
a τ
w a
Nx
x x τ
y b y b
z z
The critical buckling load Nx,crit of a rectangular laminated glass plate with two glass
panes (Figure 5.3) may be determined using linear elastic sandwich theory [346]:
( D1 +D2 ) m 2
h i
Ab2
m α 2 π2 D D
+1 +
α π2 Ds
Nx,crit = + (5.24)
α b2
h 2 i
m m
+ 1 + π2AD
α s
where
E ti3 E t 1 z12 + E t 2 z22

D = D1 + D2 + Ds ; Di = ; DS = (5.25)
12(1 − ν 2 ) 1 − ν2
Gint (z1 + z2 )2
A= (5.26)
t int
The geometric parameters t i and zi are shown in Figure 5.3.
The critical buckling load τcrit (given as force per unit length)of a monolithic plate
subjected to shear (Figure 5.14) is
π2 E t t 2
τcrit = kτ (5.27)
12(1 − ν 2 ) b
with the shear buckling coefficient

¨
4.00 + 5.34/α2 for α < 1
kτ = (5.28)
5.34 + 4.00/α2 for α ≥ 1
According to [333], the critical buckling load of laminated glass subjected to shear
may be determined with
π2 E t t 2
τcrit = kτ kVSG (5.29)
12(1 − ν 2 ) b
where kVSG is a correction factor which takes into account the shear stiffness of the
interlayer. Values for different shear moduli and geometries are given in [333].
In order to study the load carrying behaviour of a buckled glass plate in a more realistic
manner (including post-critical buckling), numerical finite element models (FEM) are

recommended. Figure 5.15 shows a typical finite element model where the glass panes
are modelled using shell elements and the interlayer is modelled using volume elements.
The two element types are connected using the same nodes. Shell elements are defined
with an offset of t/2 from the center of gravity of the glass pane. Load introduction and
boundary conditions are applied by means of additional nodes, which are coupled with
the element nodes. The edges of the glass panes have to be supported in such a way that
the shear deformation is not restrained.
symmetry
σx
boundary
conditions:
additional =0 v=0, φx=φz=0
nodes
Interlayer
u φx φy
x
v
12 a/2
y φz w
z
glass w0
tint
=0
b/2
symmetry Boundary conditions:

u=0, φy=φz=0
Figure 5.15: Finite element model for plate buckling.

The plate buckling behaviour of monolithic and laminated glass with PVB interlayer was
investigated in [241, 243, 333] with experimental studies and numerical simulations.
All tests demonstrated the significant post buckling capacity of glass plates allowing for
loads higher than the critical buckling load. The load carrying behaviour depends on
whether glass panels are subjected to pure compression or to shear. This is discussed in
the following.
Pure compression
Typical test results of monolithic glass subjected to a uniform pressure [241] are shown in
Figure 5.16. The ultimate load is twice as high as the critical buckling load. Depending on
the slenderness, initial imperfections are less critical for plate buckling when compared to
column buckling. The load carrying behaviour depends also on the applied load. Two
extreme loading conditions are shown in Figure 5.16. In model a) the load is applied as
uniform deformation of the glass edge. In model b) the load is applied as a uniformly
distributed compressive stress. In the test the load was applied by a steel beam and
with an aluminum layer between the glass edge and the steel beam. Therefore, the test

results are closer to model a) in terms of the slope of the curve, but plasticization of
the aluminium caused higher deflection wmax . Depending on the stiffness of the load
introduction materials, the load carrying behaviour lies somewhere between model a)
and model b). Due to the high elastic energy stored in the glass plate, the breakage
is explosive, the fracture patterns for both annealed and heat strengthened glass are
untypically very fine, and there is no post-breakage structural capacity.
300 Figure 5.16:
breakage
Plate buckling test on a mono-
a) lithic glass (HSG) with dimension
250
w center 1000 × 1000 mm and a thickness
b)
of 8 mm.
200
Applied force N [kN]
test 1
test 2
150 test 3
N cr = 116.7 [kN]
100
du σx
50 a) b)
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
Deflection w center [mm]
In all tests the failure origin occurred on the glass surface and in areas with tensile
stress. This means that the tensile strength of the glass surface governs the buckling
strength of glass plates. Due to the non-linear behaviour, the location of the maximum
in-plane principal stress depends on the load level. At higher loads, this location migrates
from plate center towards the corner (Figure 5.17).
Parametric studies showed that the shape of the initial imperfection has an influence
on the buckling strength of glass plates [241]. Unlike with column buckling and lateral
torsional buckling, the most critical shape for the initial imperfection may not be the
first eigenform. Several eigenforms have, therefore, to be checked in order to determine
the load carrying capacity. An example is given in Figure 5.18. The maximum in-plane
principal stress for an applied load of 400 kN is higher for a plate with a double half sine
imperfection (EF2) than for a plate with a single half sine imperfection. In other words,
EF2 is the most critical imperfection shape for the design of this glass plate if the tensile
strength exceeds 60 MPa.
Figure 5.17:
σ1,max σ1,max
σ1,max Typical maximum
principal stress
distribution on
σ1,max the surface of
a buckled glass
N = 1.0 Ncrit N = 1.5 Ncrit N = 1.7 Ncrit N = 2.0 Ncrit plate as a func-
2 2 2 2
σ1,max = 35 N/mm σ1,max = 82 N/mm σ1,max = 97 N/mm σ1,max = 149 N/mm tion of the load
level.

Figure 5.18: N [kN] a /b = 1.3 N [kN] a /b = 1.3

600 600
Influence of the buck- EF1
EF2
ling shape on the
load N as a function
of: a) the maximum 400 400
EF1 EF2
deflection wmax , b)
the maximum princi- N cr,P N cr,P
pal stress σ1,max . 200 a = 1300 mm 200
b = 1000 mm
t = 10 mm
0 0
0 10 20 30 0 100 200
2
a) w max [mm] b) σ 1,max [N/mm ]
Tests on 1000 × 1000 mm laminated glass elements showed only a slight influence
of the PVB interlayer on the buckling strength. The comparison with the numerical
simulations confirmed that a composite action can be activated, but the shear modulus
of the interlayer has to be relatively high to create a noticeable increase in buckling
strength [241]. Accordingly, a simple but safe approach for the plate buckling design
of laminated glass elements is to neglect the shear stiffness of interlayers. Nevertheless
new and stiffer interlayer materials provide a significantly higher shear modulus, thus
substantially improving the plate N [kN] a/b = 1.3 glass.N [kN] a/b = 1.3
600 buckling capacity of laminated 600
EF2 EF1
Shear
400 400
Wellershoff [333] demonstrated in experimental studies EF1 that typical diagonal tensionEF2
fields can be activated in glassNpanels
cr,P (Figure 5.19). The edge of Nthe
cr,Pglass panel is glued
200heat strengthened
in a steel frame. The size of the mmsplinters200
glass
a = 1300 is related to the stress
concentration at the moment of breakage Section b = 1000
3.4.mm
Three areas with higher surface
t = 10 mm
stress concentrations can be identified
0 0
u on the front side, along the diagonal,
0
10 20 30 0 100 200
u on the reverse side, in the
a) line of thewmaximum
max [mm] buckle bending,
b) σ 1,max [N/mm2]
u and in the anchor points of the diagonal tension field.

In order to determine the buckling resistance of a glass panel, the distribution of the
maximum principal stresses on the glass surface has to be known. Existing analytical
plate buckling models are not precise enough to describe the stress distribution due to the
non-linear behaviour. As long as design methods such as buckling curves do not exist for
glass, finite element models are recommended for design.
Finite element plate buckling analysis is very laborious in practice; therefore the
possibility of a design method based on buckling curves similar to the European steel
design code [140]) was investigated in [241, 333]. Typically a buckling curve gives a
reduction factor
ρ = ρ(λP ) , (5.30)

Figure 5.19:
Typical breakage pattern of a glass
panel under in-plane shear load.
which indicates the buckling resistance of the plate as a function of the slenderness ratio
λP , which again characterizes the risk of the plate to buckle. The slenderness ratio for a
plate subjected to in-plane compression is defined as
σRk t
r
λP = (5.31)
Nx,crit
and for in-plane shear loads as
τRk
r
λP = . (5.32)
τcrit
The characteristic buckling resistance of a glass panel may be defined as
NRk = ρσRk t b (5.33)
for pure compression and
VRk = ρτRk t b (5.34)
for shear loads. t is the glass thickness and b represents the width of the panel. The
slenderness and the reduction factor are based on the characteristic values of the ten-
sile strength σRk and of the shear stress resistance τRk . Wellershoff [333] proposes to
simplistically assume τRk = σRk .
The plate buckling verification is then performed with
NRk VRk
NEd ≤ and VEd ≤ (5.35)
γM γM
where NEd and VEd are the design values of the applied force and γM is the partial safety
factor for glass.
Reduction factors for different types of loading, glass geometries, initial deformations
w0 and boundary conditions were calculated by Luible [241] and Wellershoff [333] based
on finite element models and plotted in buckling diagrams (e. g. Figure 5.20). These
simulation results are a first step towards a future definition of plate buckling curves.

Figure 5.20: 1.6

Simulated plate critical buckling load
buckling reduction Winter
factors for mono- von Karman
1.2 simulation monolithic glass
lithic and laminated
Reduction factor ρ
simulation laminated glass
glass subjected to a
tests monolithic glass
uniform pressure on
0.8 tests laminated glass
the glass edge.
0.4
0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
Slenderness λP
Reduction factors for pure compression
The simulations in [241] showed that it is possible to establish buckling curves for glass
panels under pure compression. Furthermore the following conclusions can be drawn:
u The applied compressive edge stress σp can exceed the characteristic tensile glass
strength σRk because the compressive strength is much higher than σRk . As the
reduction factor is based on the tensile strength, ρ may become > 1. (The reduction
factors used for steel construction are based on the yield strength and thus always
< 1.)
u For a slenderness ratio λP > 1.5 the design curves are almost independent of the
initial deformation.
u For a slenderness ratio λP < 1.5 the initial deformation w0 has an influence on
the buckling strength. The curves in this slenderness range have, therefore, to be
defined as a function of the initial deformation.
u Plate buckling curves in steel construction are based on the assumption that the
vertical edges are restraint in the plane and that horizontal edges are subjected to a
uniform deformation. This cannot be assumed for glass panels. The vertical glass
edges (e. g. in a glazing bead) are not restraint laterally in the plane and the load
introduction (usually with soft materials) creates neither a uniform displacement
nor a constant pressure on the glass edge. Therefore, the real behaviour lies between
model a) and model b) in Figure 5.16. For this reason reduction factors for glass
tend to be smaller than their equivalents for steel.
u Further research is required before a definitive definition of buckling curves for
glass panels under pure compression is possible.
Reduction factors for shear loads
Reduction factors for glass panels under shear loads are studied in [333]. Based on the
Ayrton-Perry-Format (similar to EN 1993-1 [140]), the following reduction function is

proposed: 
1 for λP ≤ λ 0
ρ= p −1 (5.36)
 Φ + Φ2 − λ for λP > λ 0
with
1
Φ= 1 + α(λ − λ0 ) + λ (5.37)
2
Based on tests it is recommended to use λ0 = 0.8 and α = 0.49 for glass panes under
in-plane shear forces. For combined shear loads and lateral loads, a design method is
proposed in [333]. It is based on an interaction formula which was derived from finite
element simulations and accounts for the shear and bending capacity of the panel.

Chapter
6
Design Methods for Improved
Accuracy and Flexibility
6.1 Introduction
As mentioned in Section 4.6, many of the shortcomings of current standards, guidelines

and design methods can be addressed with the generalized lifetime prediction model
that was discussed in Section 3.3. This chapter provides an outline of this approach by
summarizing the recommendations of Haldimann [187]. For more details, the reader
should refer to this document.
6.2 Surface condition modelling
The lifetime prediction model described in Section 3.3 offers two alternatives for modelling
a glass element’s surface condition: a single surface flaw (SSF) and a random surface flaw
population (RSFP).
For structural design, it is essential to know which of these models to use and when.
The characteristics and particularities of these two surface condition models are, therefore,
discussed in the ensuing text. On this basis, recommendations for design and testing are
then given in Section 6.3.
6.2.1 Single surface flaw model

The surface condition of as-received glass can be characterized accurately by an RSFP, i. e.
a large number of flaws of random depth, location and orientation (cf. Section 3.3.5).
If, however, a glass element’s surface contains a single flaw (or a few flaws) that is
substantially deeper than the many small flaws of the RSFP, its resistance is likely to be
governed by this deep flaw because it will initiate failure.
If the surface condition of a glass element can be represented by a single surface flaw,
its lifetime can be predicted by simulating the growth of this flaw using the equations
derived in Section 3.3.4. A glass element is acceptable if a design flaw does not fail during
the service life when the element is exposed to the design action history. In order to
131
132 CHAPTER 6. DESIGN METHODS FOR IMPROVED ACCURACY AND FLEXIBILITY
determine the stress history that the design flaw is exposed to, its location must be known.
In some cases, it is possible to make a reasonable assumption about the location of the
most severe flaws (e. g. in the vicinity of the bolt holes in bolted glass elements). In other
cases, the location of the design flaw may be completely unknown. In such cases, it is
safe to assume the flaw is located anywhere on the surface, i. e. to simulate crack growth
using the ‘worst’ stress history (the one that causes the most crack growth) that exists on
the element’s surface.
The single surface flaw model caters for arbitrary geometries and loading conditions,
as long as sensible assumptions with regard to the location of the design flaw and the
crack opening stress history at this location can be made. Since the outcome of the model
is a function of the conditions at the location of the design flaw(s) only, it is not influenced
by the element’s size or by biaxial or non-homogeneous stress fields (in contrast to the
RSFP model, see Section 6.2.2). Because of the simple representation of the surface
condition, the model is intuitive, easy to use and numerical modelling is simple and
fast. Furthermore, no statistical representation of the surface condition is integrated into
the model. This is an advantage compared to random surface flaw population-based
modelling, because any statistical model (including discontinuous functions) considered
appropriate for a specific task at hand can be used.
6.2.2 Random surface flaw population model

With this approach, the surface condition of a glass element is represented by a random
surface flaw population, i. e. by a large number of flaws whose number, location, orienta-
tion and depth are all represented by statistical distribution functions (cf. Section 3.3.5).
The lifetime of a glass element is predicted by simulating the growth of its surface flaw
population under the influence of the design action history using the equations derived in
Section 3.3.5. An acceptable design is achieved when the probability of failure during the
service life is less than or equal to the target failure probability.
The model provides a good representation of as-received glass and glass with artificially
induced homogeneous surface damage. It may, however, be unrepresentative of in-service
conditions, especially if deep surface flaws are present on the glass surface or if glass
elements contain machining damage. The model caters for arbitrary geometries and
loading conditions, as long as the relevant crack opening stress history at all points on the
surface can be determined. The approach accounts for the element’s size and for biaxial
and non-homogeneous stress fields. Surface damage hazard scenarios (see Section 2.1.2),
however, cannot easily be modelled. Numerical modelling is generally complex and
computing time intensive.
Random surface flaw population-based modelling yields accurate results for medium
to high failure probabilities. The approach is, therefore, well-suited to the interpretation
of laboratory tests, however it is less appropriate for structural design. The notable
drawback is that extrapolation is required for the very low failure probabilities used in
structural design, which is very sensitive to the scatter of the underlying strength data
and the choice of the target failure probability. This inevitably leads glass designers to
adjust the target failure probability and the model parameters in order to obtain results
close to experience values rather than to design on a proper physical basis.1
1
This issue is well illustrated by European and North American standards. The two standard families adopt

6.3. RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN 133
6.3 Recommendations for design
Structural design of glass elements with the lifetime prediction model generally involves
the following steps (cf. Figure 6.1):
1. Decide whether a single surface flaw (SSF) or a random surface flaw population
(RSFP) is the more suitable surface condition model for the task at hand.
2. Determine the design crack depth ai,d (SSF) or the surface condition parameters
θ0 and m0 (RSFP) by testing at inert conditions (see Section 6.4) or using another
suitable method (engineering judgement, flaw detectability criteria, etc.).
3. Make conservative assumptions for the crack velocity parameters (n, v0 ), the fracture
mechanics parameters (KIc , Y ) and the residual surface compression stress (σr ).
4. Define a design action history and establish the action/stress relationship (normally
by finite element analysis) for the location of the design flaw (SSF) or for all points
on the element’s surface (RSFP).
5. Assess the structural performance of the glass element and modify the design if
required.
The following paragraphs explain how the above-listed design steps may be applied to
glass elements encountered in practice. It will be seen that only a few cases actually
require all of the above-mentioned steps to be carried out.
Exposed glass surfaces
u Definition. Exposed surfaces are glass surfaces that may be exposed to accidental
impact, vandalism, heavy wind-borne debris or other factors that result in surface
flaws that are substantially deeper than the ‘natural’ flaws caused by production
and handling. Such flaws will be called ‘severe damage’ hereafter.
u Surface condition model. Structural design of glass elements with exposed sur-
faces should be based on a design flaw, which is a realistic estimation of the potential
damage caused by surface damage hazards. Accordingly, the surface condition
should be represented by a single surface flaw (cf. Section 6.2.1).
u Long-term loading. Long-term inherent strength2 in the presence of a deep design
flaw is generally low (see Figure 3.7), has a large scatter and depends on many
external influences (see Section 3.2). Therefore:
very different target failure probabilities. GFPM-based methods use a high target failure probability in
combination with ambient strength data from weathered window glass specimens. European methods
use the low target failure probability required by EN 1990:2002 [133]. Therefore, the latter cannot
use strength data from weathered window glass, because this would yield an unrealistically low design
resistance. To avoid this problem, the European methods employ ambient strength data from specimens
with artificially induced homogeneous surface damage are used. Compared to the damage on weathered
window glass, the homogeneous damage reduces the scatter of strength data markedly. As a consequence,
the surface condition parameter m0 becomes high enough to allow for the use of a low target failure
probability without obtaining unrealistic results. In real terms these adjustments yield very similar results
at low probabilities of failure as the design initial crack depths that the standards implicitly assume to be
present on the surface of a glass element are in fact very similar.
For a detailed discussion of this issue, see [187, Section 8.3.2].
2
Definition, see Section 3.3.2.

Material model Structural model Action model
KIc support
geometry
fracture toughness conditions
material
σr Ei
imper- loading
residual stress
fections conditions
v0 , n
env.
σp
crack growth external constraints
ai nonlinear finite
surface condition
single flaw
initial crack size element analysis

action history
(FEA)
Y generator
geometry factor
RSFP
θ0, m0 E (τ)
FEA data
surface condition (action intensity history)
Lifetime prediction model Pf
no Pf ≤ Pf,target yes
ls
oo
sT
as
not acceptable acceptable

Gl
Figure 6.1: Structural design of glass elements with the lifetime prediction model [187].
Annealed glass should not be relied upon for structural glass elements with
long-term tensile loads and exposed surfaces. If annealed glass must be used
for some reason (cost, optical quality, tolerances, element size, etc.), failure
consequences have to be evaluated very carefully. Protection of building
occupants in the case of glass breakage, post-breakage structural capacity,
structural redundancy and easy accessibility for the replacement of broken
glass elements become key aspects.
In the case of heat strengthened or fully tempered glass, the inherent strength
in the presence of a design flaw is low compared to the residual stress, so
that it provides only a minor contribution to the effective resistance. In view
of this limited structural benefit and the complex time-dependent behaviour,
it is reasonable to ignore the inherent strength entirely and to design the
glass element such that surface decompression is prevented at all points on
the surface and during the entire service life (cf. Section 3.3.2). Because
the residual stresses are independent of service-life conditions such as stress
history, environmental conditions etc., this kind of design is extremely simple.
u Impact and short-term loading. While neglecting the inherent strength when
designing heat strengthened or fully tempered glass is safe, it may in some cases
be deemed too conservative for impact and short-term loads. In these cases, the
inherent strength can be estimated as described above for annealed glass.
u Quality control and inspections. In critical applications it may be possible to use
information from inspections for periodically assessing the strength of the glass
elements. This information may be obtained by undertaking periodic inspections
during the entire service life. In the case of heat treated glass it is more effective and
economical to improve the quality control measures during the tempering process
and ignore the inherent glass strength (with or without inspection).

6.4. TESTING 135
Non-exposed glass surfaces

u Definition. Non-exposed surfaces are glass surfaces that are permanently and safely
protected in all relevant hazard scenarios, so that they do not undergo any surface
damage from external influences. Examples are inwardly oriented faces of laminated
glass and insulating glass units, the surfaces of inner sheets of triple laminated glass
and surfaces of glass elements that are installed in sheltered locations.
u Surface condition model. RSFP-based modelling (cf. Section 6.2.2) is suitable for
glass elements with non-exposed surfaces as long as loading conditions are rather
simple and failure away from the edges is relevant. If edge failure is relevant or if
complex loading conditions make the RSFP-based model too complex to be used
with reasonable effort, SSF-based modelling is a conservative and much simpler
alternative.
u Quality control and inspections. Less conservative design is possible if it is based
on a relatively low maximum surface flaw depth, which is ensured by inspection, and
if required replacement, of the structural elements immediately after installation.
Although the inherent strength is much higher compared to that of exposed elements,
improving quality control measures during the tempering process is likely to be a
more economical means of improving the design strength of the glass elements.
Machining damage
Since the orientation and, more importantly, the location of the flaws are often not of
a random nature, an RSFP-based model could produce unsafe results if glass elements
contain significant machining damage. It is, therefore, recommended to design such
elements using a design flaw that accounts for both machining damage and surface
damage hazard scenarios.
Non-structural glass elements
If failure and replacement of an element in the case of severe surface damage is accepted,
non-structural elements can be designed as non-exposed structural elements. If non-
structural elements have to withstand mainly lateral loads, design is, especially for heat
strengthened or fully tempered glass, often governed by deflection criteria.
6.4 Testing
6.4.1 Introduction
Testing is required mainly for two reasons:
1. To determine parameters of predictive models and design methods.
2. To verify or augment the predictive calculation. This typically related to cases
where structural glass design cannot be solely based on predictive modelling. The
difficulties with modelling arise mainly in the following areas:
a) Glass is extremely sensitive to stress concentrations. Numerical models, how-
ever, often cannot provide reliable information on stress fields and particularly
stress concentrations. This lack of confidence in the numerical models often

arises when there is limited information about the materials being modelled
(e. g. liners, gaskets, bushings etc.) and / or when the assembly process may
cause stress raising imperfections (e. g. misalignment, large tolerances etc.).
b) Despite recent advances in the field [229], the post-breakage structural capacity
often cannot be reliably predicted by predictive modelling.
c) There is not much experience and quantitative information available concern-
ing the surface damage caused by various hazard scenarios.
d) The response of structural elements or entire sub-structures to impact loads is
difficult to model.
e) Building owners, insurers and authorities generally have little confidence in
glass structures and often ask for full scale tests.
In particular the following issues should be considered:
u It is very important that design and interpretation of tests are based on a thorough
understanding of the material behaviour. The fact that results from tests at ambient
conditions represent a combination of both surface condition and time-dependent
crack growth is particularly crucial. It is unfortunate that much project-specific
testing is performed without taking time-dependent effects properly into account.
u If testing at ambient conditions is unavoidable, subcritical crack growth during the
tests must be modelled. While this can efficiently be done using the model from
Section 3.3, dependence of the crack velocity parameters on the environmental
conditions and the stress rate still diminishes the accuracy and reliability of the
results.
u The problems related to subcritical crack growth in laboratory tests can be addressed
by the near-inert testing procedure summarized in Section 6.4.2. By preventing
sub-critical crack growth during tests, it allows substantial improvement in the
accuracy and safety of test results.
u Tests on as-received specimens or on specimens with artificially induced homoge-
neous surface damage are unsuitable for assessing the structural performance of
glass elements in surface damage hazard scenarios. Such elements should be tested
with realistic design flaws. This issue is discussed in Section 6.4.3.
6.4.2 Determination of surface condition parameters

Introduction
Reliable surface condition parameters (θ0 , m0 ) form the basis of random surface flaw
population-based modelling and must be derived from glass strength data. The testing
procedures used today to obtain glass strength data were explained in Section 3.5.2. While
European and North American design methods are based on fundamentally different
testing procedures (see also Table 4.8), all current design methods use strength data
obtained at ambient conditions, i.e. in normal, humidity containing air. This strength
data depends on a specimen’s surface condition and on the subcritical growth of the
surface flaws during the tests. It was shown in Section 3.2.3 that the relationship
between stress intensity and crack velocity varies widely and depends strongly on the
environmental conditions, on the residual stress in the glass and on the stress rate at

6.4. TESTING 137
which a specimen is loaded. This prevents accurate estimation of the growth of surface
flaws during experiments. Inaccurate estimation, however, can result in unsafe design
parameters. Glass surface condition data should, therefore, be obtained from laboratory
testing in near-inert conditions.
Creating near-inert conditions in laboratory tests
Considering the chemical background of stress corrosion (see Section 3.2), inert conditions
can be achieved in various ways:
1. Testing in a vacuum or in a completely dry environment.
2. Testing in a normal environment with a hermetic coating.
3. Testing in a normal environment at very rapid stress rates.
4. Testing at a sufficiently low temperature, at which the kinetics of environmentally
induced reactions are arrested.
Not all possibilities outlined above are equally suitable for structural applications. Options
1. and 4. are difficult and expensive, especially for full-scale testing on large specimens.
Options 2. and 3., in contrast, are comparatively simple and inexpensive provided that the
conditions do not need to be fulfilled perfectly. Haldimann [187] showed that near-inert
conditions in laboratory tests can be achieved by combining a near-hermetic surface
coating and a relatively rapid stress rate. The latter reduces the effect of the former’s
imperfection and vice versa. The proposed testing procedure is as follows:
1. Drying. The specimens are dried in an oven at 100 ± 5 ◦ C for 48 ± 6 hours. The
humidity in the oven is maintained below 5% RH by a high performance molecular
sieve desiccant.
2. Hermetic coating. To achieve a hermetic coating, a silicone grease is applied to
the tension face of the specimens. This grease is highly hydrophobic, impermeable
and its viscosity is high enough to ensure that the coating remains intact during
handling and testing.
3. Adoption. Specimens are kept at ambient conditions for 2 hours to allow them to
adopt ambient temperature.
4. Destructive testing. The specimens are loaded to failure using a high stress rate
(about 20 MPa/s is recommended).
If some subcritical crack growth occurs during near-inert tests, the results are conservative.
This is a major advantage over ambient testing, in which overestimation of the crack
growth during the tests leads to too optimistic surface condition parameters and therefore
to unsafe design.
Interpretation of experimental inert strength data
The experimentally determined failure stresses at inert conditions represent the material’s
inert strength. The surface condition parameters can be obtained from such data as
follows:
u For tests with simple stress fields, such as coaxial double ring tests or four point
bending tests, simple analytical equations can be used (see [187, Section 5.3.3]).
Fitting of the Weibull distribution to test results can be done by simple parameter
estimation or maximum likelihood fitting.

u For tests with complex stress fields, such as tests on large rectangular glass plates, the
general lifetime prediction model described in Section 3.3 should be used. Failure
loads and stresses are influenced by the non-linear load/stress relationship and the
location-dependent stress history caused by the complex stress field. Experimental
data, which at best provides information about the stress history at a few discrete
points on the surface, will therefore generally not follow a Weibull distribution,
such that a distribution-independent fitting method such as least-squares fitting
or maximum likelihood fitting should be used to determine surface condition
parameters.
An example of how this can be done as well as the required algorithms and their
implementation in computer software are provided in [187].
Using strength data from ambient tests
If no inert strength data is available, the derivation of surface condition parameters from
ambient strength data may be useful. Equations required for this purpose are given
in [187]. They are derived from Equation (3.42) by narrowing its range of validity to
constant stress or constant and moderate stress rate, uniform stress fields, a constant
principal stress ratio and constant crack velocity parameters.
6.4.3 Obtaining strength data for design flaws

Current design methods rely on strength data obtained from specimens with as-received
surfaces, specimens with artificially induced homogenous surface damage or weathered
specimens. Specimens with such surface conditions are useful when adopting a random
surface flaw population-based approach (see Section 6.2 and 6.3). Such strength data
is, however, unsuited for design flaw-based design (see the same two sections). To
obtain strength data for this approach, i. e. to quantify the damage caused by a surface
damage hazard scenario (design flaw) and to assess the structural performance of glass
elements that contain such damage, tests need to be performed on specimens with deep
close-to-reality flaws. Such flaws have to meet two conflicting requirements:
1. They should be as similar as possible to the surface damage that structural glass
elements are likely to undergo in in-service conditions. This includes accidental
damage (e. g. due to handling, cleaning, impact of vehicles, tools falling down or
impact of heavy wind-borne debris) as well as malicious damage (vandalism).
2. They should be as reproducible as possible.
In order to achieve an optimal compromise between these requirements, Haldimann
[187] suggests to use a specially developed surface scratching device. This device may be
used to induce long surface cracks on the glass surface by applying a constant force to
a 0.33 carat dressing diamond. This scratching tip was found to be well suited because
it does not show much wear and because its relatively large opening angle causes some
widening of the scratch, which is an effect that is likely to happen with objects commonly
used by vandals (e. g. diamond rings). A steel plunger holds the diamond tip. A casing
guide ensures that the plunger is positioned exactly perpendicular to the glass plate. Ball
bearings are used to minimize the sliding friction between the plunger and the guide. The
plunger can be loaded with steel blocks of known weight and creates a constant contact

6.5. OVERVIEW OF MATHEMATICAL RELATIONSHIPS 139
pressure between the scratching tip and the specimen. In dry diamond on glass scratching,
the regularity of the surface flaws is problematic. An evaporating glass cutting oil makes
depth and geometry of the flaws more uniform and allows higher loads to be applied.
The following should be considered with regard to deep surface flaw testing (for more
details, see [187, 188]):
u The scatter of the strength of deep surface flaws is extremely high.
u The locally fractured glass zone around a surface scratch is significantly deeper than
the open, visible depth. The effective nominal flaw depth that governs strength
is, therefore, significantly deeper than the optically measured flaw depth. This
phenomenon is less pronounced in heat treated glass where the residual compressive
stresses hinder fracture of the glass beyond the zone that is in direct contact with
the scratching tip. Therefore, the strength reduction caused by a given surface
damaging influence is much less severe in heat treated glass than it is in annealed
glass.
u When testing specimens with deep surface flaws, the time to failure is so short that a
high stress rate is sufficient to ensure near-inert conditions (see Figure 6.2). Strength
measurements obtained this way, i. e. without drying and hermetic surface coating,
can be interpreted as inert strength data without being excessively conservative.
This makes such laboratory testing simple and inexpensive, even in the case of large
structural elements.3
u The key factor for meaningful results is a close match between the design flaw and
potential in-service damage.

100 100
v0 = 6 mm/s v0 = 0.01 mm/s
Stress rate:
80 inert 80
200 MPa/s
Failure stress, σf (MPa)

Failure stress, σf (MPa)
20 MPa/s
60 2.0 MPa/s 60
0.2 MPa/s
40 40
20 20
(Y = 1.12, KIc = 0.75 MPa m0.5, n = 16)

0 0
50 100 150 200 250 300 50 100 150 200 250 300
Initial crack depth, ai (µm) Initial crack depth, ai (µm)
Figure 6.2: Failure stress of surface flaws in constant stress rate tests. In common laboratory
conditions (right graph), the strength of deep surface flaws measured at ambient conditions and
with a stress rate of 20 MPa/s or above is virtually identical to the inert strength. This was
confirmed by experiments in [187].
6.5 Overview of mathematical relationships
An overview of the mathematical relationships to be used in the different cases is provided

in Table 6.3.
3
Because of the longer time to failure and the small crack depth, the same is not true for as-received glass
specimens.

Table 6.3: Table of mathematical relationships (SSF = single surface flaw, RSFP = random surface flaw population).
140
Structural design (simplified design equations)

1/n
2
SSF σ t 0 ≤ σR,t 0 σR,t 0 = t1 −n p (n−2)/2 → Equation (3.23)
0 (n−2) · v0 · KIc · (Y π)n · a
i1/n
1 J
RT
n
1/n i P h
σ t 0 = t 0 σ (τ) dτ ≈ t1 j=1
σ ntj · t j → Equation (3.22)
0 0
1/m̄ t −1/n 1/n

(n−2)/n
RSFP σ̄ < f0 f0 = − ln(1 − Pf,t ) · U · θ0n−2 = f0,inert · tU → Equation (3.50)
0 0
General cases:
SED ‘Structural use of Glass’

1
R
m̄ m̄
1/m̄ P 1/m̄
σ̄ = A1 A σ1,t 0
dA ≈ A i A i · σ1,t 0 ,i
→ Equation (3.46)
0 0

1/n J h i 1/n
1 1
RT
n n
P
σ1,t 0 ,i = t 0 σ1,i dτ ≈ t σ1,τ j ,i · τ j → Equation (3.43)
0 0
j=1
Simplification if the decompressed surface area remains constant and the major principal stress is
proportional to the load at all points on the surface and during the entire loading history:
−1/m̄
R P
σ̄ = A0 · X t 0 · Ā 1/m̄ with Ā = A c(~r)m̄ dA ≈ Ai cim̄ → Equation (3.53)
i (

RT 1/n PJ h i 1/n σ̆ for stresses
X t 0 = t1 0 Xn (τ) dτ ≈ t1 Xntj · t j with X = → Equation (3.57)
0 0 q for loads
j=1
Interpretation of tests (general equations for predictive modelling)

2
2−n
p n−2
σn (τ) · Y π n−2 −n p n Rτ n
SSF ãc ãc (τ) = K
+ 2
· v0 · K Ic
· (Y π) · 0
σn
(τ̃) dτ̃ → Equation (3.21)
Ic
RSFP Pf General cases:  

1
  m0
 n−2  n−2
 σn (τ,~r,ϕ) 
π/2 +
    
 
2
R R    
τ
θ0 Z
Pf (t) = 1 − exp − A1 π
 max    dAdϕ → Equation (3.42)
 0 1  
A
τ∈[0,t]   

 ϕ=0  
U · θ0n−2
σnn (τ̃,~r, ϕ) dτ̃  

0
For simplifications for common test setups with uniform stress fields and for testing at inert conditions,
DRAFT (November 11, 2007)

CHAPTER 6. DESIGN METHODS FOR IMPROVED ACCURACY AND FLEXIBILITY
see [187, Section 5.3.3].

Chapter
7
Glass Connections
7.1 Introduction
The traditional approach for dealing with connections between glass and other materials
was to avoid direct contact between the glass and other harder materials thereby diverting
loads or movement away from the glass. Although this sound engineering advice still
holds true today, the past 25 years has seen an increasing architectural trend to maximize
transparency when using glass. This trend can be traced through the chronological
development of glass connections: from the linearly supported glazing associated with
the curtain walls developed in the mid 20th century, to the patch plate friction fittings
developed in the mid 1970’s, to the bolted point supports developed in the 1980’s and
1990’s (Figure 7.1).
These developments show a gradual reduction in the size of the glass support and
an increase in the magnitude and types of loads that are transmitted to the glass. In all
linearly supported structural silicone sealant local edge supports local point supports
(e.g. pressure caps) (SSG support) (clamps) (point fixings)
carrier
frame
Figure 7.1: Summary of common glass support types.
141
142 CHAPTER 7. GLASS CONNECTIONS
these connections the direct contact (or hard spots) between glass and harder materials
should still be avoided by employing intermediate materials. These intermediate materials
often have a smaller or comparable stiffness to glass, but should have the necessary
material strength and stiffness to transfer the loads and also have an adequate durability.
Suitable intermediate materials are plastic, resins, neoprene, injection mortars, aluminum
or fibrous gaskets.
More recently there have been promising developments in chemical or glued connec-
tions in glass. This has opened up a range of exciting possibilities that was not possible
with mechanical connections, but at the same time a series of associated problems such as
durability of the adhesive joints must now be considered.
These developments in glass connections mean that the engineer is now faced with
a wide range of possible techniques and products for connecting glass-to-glass or glass
to other materials. The aim of this chapter is to provide a general overview of these
techniques and to provide guidelines on their correct application.
For the purposes of this document it is convenient to distinguish between two main
types of connections, namely, mechanical connections and adhesive connections. In some
cases the connection may be a combination of a mechanical and an adhesive connection.
Such combined connections may improve the performance of the joint, however, in cases
where stiff adhesives are employed, the adhesive element of the joint is often substantially
stiffer than the mechanical part of the joint. Consequently the adhesive will carry the
majority of the loads and the mechanical connection will only come into effect once the
capacity of the adhesive has been exceeded.
7.2 Mechanical fixings

Christoph HAAS, Benjamin BEER
7.2.1 Linearly supported glazing
Linearly supported glazing is often used in framed constructions, such as curtain wall
systems, where rectangular glass panels are supported along two or four edges. The
self-weight of the glass is transferred to the frame through plastic setting blocks located
at the horizontal bottom glass edge. Alternatively the self-weight may be transmitted
through neoprene layers with a Shore A hardness ranging between 60 and 80.
Lateral loads, normally arising from wind pressure and suction may be resisted
mechanically by clamping the glass between the frame system on one side and a glazing
bead or a capping / pressure plate on the other side (Figure 7.2). The loads are transferred
from the glass to the framing system through 8 mm to 15 mm neoprene, EPDM or silicone
gaskets (Figure 7.2). These supports allow a good degree of rotation of the glass edge
and may consequently be considered as simple supports for the purposes of analytical and
numerical modelling.
In framed systems, the frame size is larger than the glass pane. This clearance
should be sufficiently large to accommodate both the induced deviations that result from
manufacturing or construction tolerances and the inherent deviations that result from
post-installation dimensional changes.

7.2. MECHANICAL FIXINGS 143
Aluminum
Figure 7.2:
extrusion mullion Typical linear glass support
with EPDM gaskets and glazing
beads.
EPDM gasket Thermal barrier
Insulated glass unit
EPDM gasket
Glazing bead
An alternative connection to mechanical fixing, also used in framed systems, is struc-

tural silicone glazing, which involves gluing the glass onto the frame system. This is
discussed in further detail in Section 7.3.2.
Although less common, linear glass edge supports may also be used to transmit in
plane loads into the glass. This requires a higher degree of care and engineering at both
design and construction stages and generally involves a bespoke system. In these cases
the following recommendations should be considered:
u The areas close to the corners of heat treated glass suffer from lower residual
stresses. In order to prevent the glass corners from breaking, the load should
therefore be introduced introduced at a certain distance from the weaker corners
(at least 2 times the glass thickness for HSG and FTG and at least 100 mm for ANG).
u The glass edges should be chamfered and ground or polished to avoid local stress
concentration and premature failure of the glass.
u The compressive stress distribution on the glass edge is not constant but depends
on the modulus of elasticity of the intermediate material and the sub-structure.
u Thermal movement of the sub-structure and the glass pane may create additional
tensile stresses on the glass edge.
u The edge of laminated safety glass made of heat strengthened or tempered glass
is normally not perfectly flush. The glass layers are tempered before laminating
and mechanical edge treatment of tempered glasses is not possible afterwards. This
leads to an asymmetric load introduction into the glass edge. In case of setting
blocks, only one single glass layer would be supported while the other is not in
contact with the setting block. A better solution is to employ steel shoes, where the
space between the steel shoe and the glass edge is filled with a special injection
mortar (i. e. epoxy resin) or high strength glue to adjust the glass edges. In such a
system all glass layers are supported. Nevertheless, variations in the thickness of
the filling material may cause additional load eccentricities which has to be taken
into account for the design of the laminated glass unit [241].
7.2.2 Clamped and friction-grip fixings

Clamped fittings were developed in order to minimize the visual impact of linear sup-
porting frames and pressure cap profiles. Panel edges are fixed to the sub-structure at
discrete locations by means of clamps (Figure 7.4) which may be fixed back to an interior

Figure 7.3:
Typical glass edge of annealed PVB
and heat strengthened or tem-
glass
pered laminated glass with possi-
ble load introduction. gap
setting block injection mortar
Annealed glass with Typical tempered Typical tempered

edge treatement laminated glass laminated glass
after laminating and edge with setting edge with injection
setting block block mortar
Figure 7.4: local clamping

Typical low-friction clamp fix-
ing. clamping
plate
sub-
structure
setting block
glass
neoprene or
EPDM
glass
Clamped facade Vertical section clamping
sub-frame or possibly to glass fins. Clamped fixings also facilitate the draining of water
from overhead glazing where obstructions above the glass should be kept to minimum.
Low friction clamped fixings are mainly used to transfer loads perpendicular to the glass
pane. Setting blocks on the bottom glass edge allow for dead load support. In such
clamped fittings the metal clamping plate simply holds the glass in place and is separated
from the glass by a soft intermediate material such as neoprene or EPDM.
Other clamped fixings, however, are also able to transfer in-plane loads by clamping
the fixings tightly to create a friction-grip connection. Friction-grip connections are theo-
retically well suited for the introduction of in-plane tensile loads because they distribute
the load over a larger surface area than, say, a bolt-only arrangement and thus avoid
major stress concentrations. Typically, the set-up consists of the glass pane, steel plates
on both sides, gaskets between the steel plates and the glass and bolts which clamp the
steel plates together. Direct contact between the glass and the steel parts are avoided
by having oversized bolt holes and by employing the gaskets which act as an interlayer
material between the glass and the steel plates (Figure 7.5. The gasket must be strong
enough to withstand the normal stresses induced by the pre-stressed bolts without oozing
out of the joint and must also resist the shear stresses induced by the in-plane force. At
the same time it must not be too hard such as to damage the glass and it must also be
sufficiently flexible to allow for fabrication tolerances between the glass and the steel
plates. Additionally it should exhibit very low creep to prevent normal forces in bolts from
decreasing over time. Typical gasket materials are pure aluminium or fibre gasket and are
in the order of 1 mm thick.
Special care should be taken when designing friction-grip connections in laminated
safety glass. Interlayer materials in laminated safety glass such as PVB are unable to

Figure 7.5:
F/2 Typical friction grip connec-
F tions: monolithic and lami-
F/2 nated glass.
steel monolithic
glass
aluminium sheet pre-stressed bolt laminated

safety glass
local aluminium
interlayer F/2
F/2
F/2
F/2
PVB interlayer
withstand the clamping forces induced by the connection without oozing out and they
suffer from large creep deformations which reduces the prestress over time. Consequently
the interlayer in the region of the clamped connection is often removed and replaced by a
stiffer, non-viscous material (e. g. aluminum sheets) with the same thickness (Figure 7.5).
The force that can be transferred by friction depends on the geometry of the connection,
the stiffness of the materials involved, the lowest coefficient of friction between the various
interfaces and the long-term load bearing capacity of the various components.
Panait [267] carried out experimental and theoretical studies on friction-grip bolted
connections with monolithic glass and aluminum interlayer plates. In a first step the
dry friction between glass and aluminum was investigated experimentally. The resulting
friction grip resistance turned out to be time and temperature dependent. The coefficient
of friction increases with the time and with increasing temperature. These experimental
findings were used to construct and validate numerical models of friction-grip connections.
Although research is ongoing in the field of friction grip connections several appli-
cations for fins in facades [250] or beams (e. g. Glasgow Medical School) have been
constructed with this type of connection. In general these projects employ a combination
of rules of thumb, finite element analysis and project-specific testing in order to determine
the load bearing capacity of these connections. Further infromation on this approach is
provided in Section 8.1.
It is important to note that, depending on the glass geometry and clamp location,
clamps may cause local rotational restraints in the glass which in turn result in stress
concentrations at these locations. Unless a free rotation of the glass edge in the clamp
fixing can be achieved in practise (i. e. by adopting a sufficiently thick and soft intermediate
material) the restraint from the clamp must be considered in the analysis model.
7.2.3 Bolted supports

The use of discrete bolted connections is clearly not the most efficient way to transfer
loads through a notoriously brittle material such as glass. This type of connection is often
driven by aesthetic requirements to minimize the visual impact of the glass panel supports.

Over the last 20 years, there have been various developments and refinements of bolted
connections for glass structures. This has resulted in a wide variety of bolted connections.
However, there are many similarities between the various bolted connections available.
The first part of this section therefore provides general information and recommendations
that apply across the board, this is followed by a description of some specific types of
bolted connections.
If the members joined by a bolted connection consist of elasto-plastic materials (e. g.
steel) the connection is generally able to redistribute the high bearing stresses around
the bolt holes by yielding locally and thus exhibiting a high redundancy and a high load
bearing capacity. If this is extended to multiple bolts the elasto-plastic materials also
ensure a uniform load distribution on all bolts in the connection. In the case of brittle
materials such as glass, the material is unable to redistribute local stress concentrations
by yielding, consequently the high local stress concentrations in the bolt hole constitute a
major problem.
Therefore one of the key challenges of structural detailing in glass is to devise a
connection in which the high stress concentrations and direct steel-to-glass contact are
avoided. This is in part achieved by intermediate materials in the form of bushings or liners
that have a lower modulus of elasticity than glass. The materials used for these bushings
should therefore be sufficiently strong and stiff to transfer loads to and from the glass
without breaking or oozing out of the joint, but at the same time they should be esuriently
soft to redistribute stress concentrations. An adequate resistance to creep and cyclic
loading as well as a good UV-resistance is also important. Materials commonly used for
bushings are aluminum, plastics such as EPDM (ethylene propylene diene monomer), POM
(polyoximethylen) or polyamide or injected resin or mortar (e. g. HILTI HIT [193]). In this
way the intermediate material is able to redistribute the compressive stress concentrations
before they reach the glass. However, it is important to note that although such am
approach has a major affect on the compressive stresses at the location of contact, it only
has a minor affect on the tensile stresses caused by the elongation of the hole.
General performance and recommendations for bolted connections
The engineer must endeavour to reduce the stress concentrations by design whenever pos-
sible. Overend [260] and Maniatis [245] investigated the influence of several parameters
on the structural behaviour of bolted connections with different bushing materials and for
monolithic glass:
u The closeness of fit i. e. the bolt diameter relative to the hole diameter is directly
related to the major principle stresses around the bolt hole. A larger clearance leads
to higher maximum stresses in the glass hole and causes a shift in the position of
the maximum stress. Compared to a tight-fit connection a clearance of 2 mm leads
to an increase of the maximum principle tensile stress in the glass of about 66% for
aluminium and 39% for POM-C bushings.
u The geometry of the glass panel particularly the glass thickness and the edge and
end distances from the bolt hole to the glass perimeter have a major influence on
the stress distribution around the glass hole. A thinner glass panel and small edge
or end distances reduce the cross-sectional area of glass available to resist the load
and thereby resulting in higher stresses.

u The bushing material has an influence on the magnitude of the maximum maximum
principle tensile stress around the glass hole, however this influence is reduced to a
negligible level for tight-fitting connections.
u The friction between bushing material and glass has an influence on the maximum
principle stress.
u An eccentric load application may also significantly increase the maximum principle
stress in the glass hole.
The quality of the glass surface and the residual stress in the hole (cf. Section 3.6)
also has a major influence on the load bearing capacity of bolted glass panels. Since the
maximum tensile stress often occurs close to the holes, a realistic analysis model and
careful detailing are essential for the design of bolted glass.
It is rarely possible to determine the stress distribution around the bolt holes by using
simple formulae or charts. However, when the bolted connection is subjected to simple
horizontal shear (e. g. when the splice is subjected to direct tension or compression such
as with through bolt connections, see Section 7.2.3) the maximum principle stresses may
be determined by applying stress concentration factors [270].
However, these stress concentration factors simply provide a single value for the
maximum principle stress and do not provide information such as the stress distribution
around the hole or at a distance from the hole edge, which is essential for determining
the load bearing capacity of the glass connection in an accurate manner. A 3-dimensional
finite element model may be used to provide the full stress distribution around and away
from the the bolt hole. Advice on the use of finite element method is beyond the scope of
this document and readers should refer to the numerous publications on the subject such
as Zienkiewicz and Taylor [347] and Cook [72]. However, Siebert [310] and todo [320]
give some guidelines for good modelling, which are summarized here:
u The entire bolted assembly including the intermediate material and their respective
mechanical properties should be modelled.
u Gap or contact elements should be used around the bolt hole to ensure that only
compressive bearing forces are transferred to the glass and no tension is transmitted
from the bolt to the glass. This in turn implies that a non-linear finite element
analysis is required.
u Tetrahedral elements should not be used.
u The mesh density should endeavour to match the expected stress concentrations
i. e. the density should be large around the hole (minimum of 32 elements) and
gradually reduce away from the hole.
u Conical bore holes have to be modelled with solid 3-dimensional elements.
u Cylindrical bore holes may be modelled either with solid 3-dimensional elements or
or 2-dimensional shell elements.
u Any metal plates and the intermediate materials must be modelled with solid
elements.
u A convergence analysis of the finite element model should be carried out to ensure
that the results are accurate and that they not overly sensitive to user defined
parameters such as mesh density, non-linear convergence criteria etc.

Once the stress distribution is obtained it is then possible to adopt the complex but
flexible design method described in Chapter 6 or the more conservative, but simpler
allowable stress based methods described in Section 4.2. In the latter case, it is common
practise to adopt the tempering stress around the bolt hole as the glass strength and to
ignore the inherent glass strength. This is a conservative, yet simplified approach as it
eliminates complex considerations of surface condition, stress history and area effects.
Material selection and detailing are other key considerations in the design of bolted
connections in glass. As far as the glass is concerned it recommended to use either HSG
or FTG, as the strength of ANG in the bore hole area is very poor. Furthermore, when
laminated heat treated glass is used there is often a misalignment in the hole region,
consequently resin or injection mortar is preferred to hard bushings as the latter are
unable to create an homogeneous load distribution in all glass layers.
Through bolt connection
The earliest and generally strongest type of bolted connection is the through bolt con-
nection where the connection is subjected to in-plane tension or compression which is
translated as shear in the bolts. This type of connection is derived directly from steel and
timber construction and is particularly useful in glass as it can provide structural continu-
ity between separate glass elements which are limited in size due to the manufacturing
process. This type of connection may therefore be used in splices (e. g. spliced beams,
spliced fins etc.) to construct large structural assemblies.
The through bolt connection in Figure 7.6 is constructed by drilling a hole in the
members to be connected and inserting a bolt through the hole so that it transfers the
forces across the joint. The bolt is subjected to shear forces, whereas the connected
members are locally subjected to high bearing stresses which are evident as compressive
stresses at the location of contact with the bolt and tension stresses on the sides of the bolt
hole with a peak tensile stress normal to the point of contact. The latter tension stresses
are due to the elongation of the hole in the direction of the applied force.
Figure 7.6:
Example of a through bolt connec- F/2
tion; top: monolithic glass, bottom: F
laminated safety glass. F/2
glass
bushing steel
bolt
aluminium bushing laminated
injection mortar safety glass
F/2
F/2
F/2
F/2

Point supports
Point supports are essentially bolted connections which are used in glass-to-glass connec-
tions or to connect glass to a subframe without creating a lap joint as discussed above.
The removal of the lap joint has the benefit of reducing the visual impact of the connection
and most point supports have evolved further in this regard by having a countersunk bolt
which eliminates all protrusions beyond one surface of the glass.
Typical point supports are not suitable for the transfer of high in plane loads into the
glass pane except the dead load of the glass itself in case of vertical glazing. For the
transfer of high in plane loads, it is preferable to use through bolt fixings (see above).
Point fixing must often cater for some degree of lateral loading on the glass panels.
The original point fixings provided a rotationally stiff connection to the subframe which
often resulted in higher stresses in the bolt hole area. Later versions provided a stiff
connection that endeavoured to match the stiffness of the glass thus reducing the stress
concentrations from the rotational restraint. The more recent point supports include a
ball and socket joint, known as articulated bolts, which allow for a free rotation of the
panel.
To allow easy assembly and to avoid unfavourable in-plane constraints (e. g. due to
temperature), the point-support pins should be tightened carefully (i. e. torque screw
moment < 30 Nm) and fixed into slotted / oversize holes in the sub-structure with suitable
low-friction interlayers (e. g. teflon) according to Figure 7.8. Point supported glass should
have a minimum thickness of 8 mm and the distance of holes to the glass edges must not
be less than 2.5 times the glass thickness [200].
In addition to the parameters listed in Section 7.2.3, the stress distribution around the
holes of a point supported connection is also influenced by:
u The position of the point fixing in the glass panel.
u The type of point support i. e. rotationally stiff, flexible or fully articulated.
u The geometry of the bore hole e. g. cylindrical bore holes for points fixings with steel
Figure 7.7:
a)
Point support type: a) with a free rotation of the
panel, b) with a stiff connection between point
support and glass panel.
b)
Figure 7.8:
Example of a point-
supported glazing panel
and its support condi-
tions (sub-structure).

Cylindrical hole Conical hole Conical hole

SADEV® FXR 1003 SADEV® FXR 1001 SADEV® FXR 1001A
Figure 7.9: Example of point supports with cylindrical hole (left), conical hole monolithic glass
(center) and conical hole with insulated glass unit (right).
disks on each glass surface or conical holes for point supports with countersunk
bolts.
u The applied torque on the fixing bolt.
Recommendations for scheme design
Well made through bolt connections in good quality FTG should be able to resist a bearing
load of 0.7 kN per mm of glass thickness [272]. However, it is advisable to carry out more
detailed analysis as discussed in Section 7.2.3.
The design charts shown in Figures 7.10, 7.11 and 7.12 are reproduced from todo
[320] and provide useful preliminary sizing for horizontal and vertical point supported
glass panels fitted with articulated bolts.
Figure 7.10: Design chart for vertical point fixed glass panels with Wk = 0.6 MPa.

7.3. GLUED CONNECTIONS 151
Figure 7.11: Design chart for vertical point fixed glass panels with Wk = 1.0 MPa.
Figure 7.12: Design chart for overhead point fixed glass panels.
7.3 Glued connections

Dr. Lucio BLANDINI, Christoph HAAS, Prof. Dr.-Ing. Werner SOBEK, Dr. Frank WELLERSHOFF
7.3.1 General
Most engineers are relatively unfamiliar with adhesive technology and terminology. The
aim of this section is therefore to briefly introduce the general principles of adhesive
bonding. Further detailed information on structural adhesives is provided in specialized
publications on the subject such as [5, 218].
Glued connections provide the opportunity to distribute the loads arising from the
connections in a more uniform manner when compared to bolted connections. This is
clearly an advantage in glass connections, which because of the brittle nature of the

material are sensitive to stress concentrations. Another advantage of adhesive connections

in glass is that glass provides a surface that is flat and easy to clean, thereby making
glued connections relatively easy to construct and virtually eliminate the need for pre-
treatment of the glass surface. Generally two types of glued connections are used for glass
applications:
u soft elastic adhesive connections (i. e. structural-silicone-sealant connections);
u rigid adhesive connection (i. e. acrylic adhesives, epoxy adhesives and polyester
resin).
Adhesives are polymer materials that consist of simple monomer units recurrently chained
to macromolecules. The atoms in each macromolecule are chemically bonded and the
macromolecules are physically or chemically bonded to each other and intertwining is
inevitable (Figure 7.13).
Polymers can be classified according to their thermomechanical properties that are con-
trolled by the molecular structure. Silicone adhesives and one component polyurethanes
are for example typical elastomers. Two component polyurethanes are more likely ther-
mosets with a high cross-link density.
Thermoplastics Relatively weak intermolecular forces hold molecules together in a

thermoplastic together, so that the material softens when exposed to heat, but returns to
its original condition when cooled. Thermoplastic polymers can be repeatedly softened
by heating and then solidified by cooling - a process similar to the repeated melting and
cooling of metals. Most linear and slightly branched polymers are thermoplastics. All the
major thermoplastics are produced by chain polymerization.
Elastomers Elastomers are rubbery polymers that can be stretched easily to several
times their unstretched length and which rapidly return to their original dimensions when
the applied stress is removed. Elastomers are cross-linked, but have a low cross-link
Figure 7.13:
Molecular structure of polymers.
linear branched cross-linked intertwined
Figure 7.14:
Classification of polymer Polymer adhesives
adhesives [186].
Thermoplastics Elastomers Thermosets
Linear or branched Long cross-linked High cross-linked

chains polymer chains polymer chains
Silicone (inorganic) Acrylic adhesive

PVB
Polyurethane (organic) Polyester resin, Epoxy

density. The polymer chains still have some freedom to move, but are prevented from
permanently moving relative to each other by the cross-links.
Thermosets A thermosetting plastic solidifies or "sets" irreversibly when heated and

further heating cannot reshape this material. Thermosets consist of three-dimensional
networked polymers with a high degree of cross-linking between polymer chains. The
cross-linking restricts the motion of the chains and leads to a rigid material.
Under external forces three different deformation types, which have to be superimposed,
could be identified:
A. Spontaneous elastic deformation (spontaneous reversible) due to changed valence
bond angles of atoms in chemical bonding.
B. Time dependent viscoelastic deformation (time dependent reversible) due to stretched
molecular chains.
C. Time dependent viscoplastic deformation (time depending irreversible) due to
movement of molecular chains.
The ratio of the deformation type A, B or C depends on the molecular structure of the
adhesive. For low cross-linked polymers the deformation types B and C are more important
than deformation type A.
Strong atomic bridges between the adhesive and the glass surface result in a strong
adhesive joint. The glass surface consists of silicon atoms saturated with OH-groups
and some metal ionic (i. e. Na) as shown in Figure 7.15 and it is therefore desirable to
establish strong Si-O-Si bonds between the glass surface and the adhesive. This may be
achieved by applying a silanized primer to the surface and an adhesive with a compatible
molecular structure. The primer has the dual function of providing a reactive group for
the glass surface in addition to a reactive group for the adhesive. [280]
The atomic bonding happens in three steps:
1. Hydrolysis of the silane in the primer to a silanol is enabled by the humidity on the
glass surface.
2. Hydrogen bonds arise between the OH-molecules of the silanol and the glass surface.
3. By splitting of water some hydrogen bonds change into chemical Si-O-Si bonds.
Mechanical behaviour of adhesives
Behaviour under short term loads and small strain The deformation of an adhesive
layer between to bonded elements is shown in Figure 7.16. The relation between the
shear modulus G, the shear deformation tan γ and the shear stress τ are defined as
v
tan γ = (7.1)
d
τ
G= (7.2)
tan γ
where v is the shear displacement and d is the adhesive thickness.

Figure 7.15:
Hydrolysis of the bond- Si O Polymer Y-(CH2)n-Si(OR)3 Glass
H
ing agent and atomic (bonding agent)
bonding at the glass
+H2O OH
surface. Si O
H Characteristic
Y-(CH2)n-Si(OR)3 (CH2)n-Si OH
of the glass - ROH OH
Si O
Na surface
Hydrolysis of the bonding agent
H
Si O
surface
surface
Glass
Glass
OH H
H
Y (CH2)n Si O O Si
Y (CH2)n Si O O Si
H
OH H
O
OH H Y (CH2)n Si O Si
Y (CH2)n Si O O Si
OH
H
OH
Step 1 Step 2
Atomic bonding at the glass surface
Figure 7.16: F
γ
Adhesive deformation under shear force.
Behaviour under long term loads and small strain Long-term loads are e. g. those
due to self weights. A common approximation for the time-dependent elasticity I is
tan γ
I= = B · tα (7.3)
τ
where B and α are material parameters. The change in shear deformation over time is
best expressed by a double logarithmic plot(Figure 7.17). Three different regions may be
defined each representing varying degrees of creep:
I Primary region: The creeping is provoked by the stretching of the molecular chains.
II Secondary region: The creeping provoked by sliding of the molecular chains. The
lost physical bondings between the molecular chains and the gained physical bond-
ings are in balance.
III Tertiary creeping: The lost physical bonding become prevalent and the connection
breaks.
The parameters γI0 , γII0 and γIII0 are the shear strains at the beginning of the deformation
in regions I, II and III. ∆t I , ∆t II and ∆t III are the time intervals in the respective regions.
γB and t B are the ultimate limit values. For design purposes, γIII0 should not be reached
because the failure of the connection is initialized at this level.

ln (tan γ ) Figure 7.17:

Time-dependent load carry-
tan γB ing behaviour under long term
loads.
I II III
tan γIII 0
∆γ
tan γII 0 ∆t
tan γI
0
∆t I ∆ t II ∆ t III tB ln t
7.3.2 Structural silicone sealant connections

Structural silicon sealants were originally applied to bond glass panes to aluminum
subframes in curtain wall facades of high rise buildings (structural sealant glazing systems,
SSGS). However, structural silicones are increasingly being used to achieve soft structural
connections between glass and aluminum or stainless steel or between glass and glass.
These connection are employed to create ‘transparent’ glass structures where mechanical
fixings are replaced by structural silicone joints (e. g. glass corners, glass fins bonded to
fully glazed vertical glass). Two different types of structural silicone sealants are available:
u One-component silicones start curing as soon as they come into contact with moisture
in the air. Optimum conditions for application are 24 ◦ C at minimum 50% relative
humidity. The diffusion-controlled curing process imposes practical limits on the
geometry of the seal: recommended thickness > 6 mm, maximum width < 15 −
20 mm. The ratio of joint thickness to joint width must be at least 1 : 1 but no more
than 1 : 3. A ratio of 1 : 2 is ideal. Depending on the thickness curing times up to 3
weeks have to be considered. If the seal is too thick, the interior parts may never
cure completely.
u Two-component silicones are cured by the polymerization reaction that is triggered
by the mixing of the two components that consist of a base compound (about 90%
by volume) and a catalyst (about 10% by volume). The curing does not require
outside chemical components. Diffusion lengths among the two components are
very small and curing will progress relatively quickly (curing time less than 3 days),
homogeneous and independent of the joint size. The recommended minimum
thickness is 6 mm, the maximum width is 50 mm. Depending on manufacturer
recommendations or design codes a maximum ratio of of joint thickness to joint
width of 1 : 4 is allowed. Proper mixing is very important and must be checked
frequently during application. Therefore application of two-component silicones on
the building site is generally problematic and should be avoided.
Material properties may differ from one manufacturer to another common values are
given in Table 7.18. In small-scale short-term laboratory testing structural silicone sealants
typically achieve tensile strengths of around 0.8 MPa to 1.8 MPa for dynamic loading,
depending on the temperature. However, allowable stresses for wind loads are usually
much lower. Creep is initiated under long-term loading stresses equivalent to roughly

10% of the short term strength. Long-term strains in excess of creep levels will lead to
relaxation. This will reduce the stresses but no failure will occur, as long as permissible
strains are not exceeded. Structural silicone joints are normally designed in terms of
allowable stresses (Table 7.18) which are in turn based on the ultimate strength and a
safety factor of 6. This means that the allowable design strain range is ±12.5% of the
ultimate strains. At these relatively low level of strains used for design purposes it is
sensible to assume an elastic behaviour.
The very low modulus of elasticity constitutes both an advantage and a disadvantage.
On one hand it reduces stress concentrations, but on the other hand structural silicone
sealants are not suitable to transfer high shear forces required for built-up sections of
glass (e. g. T-section, H-section).
When used in combination with with laminated safety glass, structural silicone sealants
show good behaviour in case of protective glazing (i. e. where facades are subjected to
impact or blast loads). This is due to the soft material behaviour which has a capacity to
absorb high amounts of energy.
The design of a structural silicone joint must allow for sufficient load-carrying strength
in order to transfer the applied loads. At the same time the allowable strain of the
silicone sealant must not be exceeded. The maximum strain is particularly critical if two
materials with different coefficients of thermal expansion are bonded together. For this
reason joint geometries with adhesion to three surfaces such as L-shaped joints have small
displacement capacities (Figure 7.19) and should be avoided for example when the glass
panel is glued with all edges onto an aluminium frame in a curtain wall facade element.
The influence of SSG joints on the load carrying behaviour of glass panels is studied in
[327]. In case of a high glass edge rotation due to glass deformations in combination with
large structural sealant joints the resulting additional tensile stress in the joint has to be
taken into account. Due to the Poisson’s ratio µ of nearly 0.5 the stiffness of a structural
sealant joint depends strongly on the geometry of the joint - this explains the recommended
Table 7.18: Typical material properties of structural silicone sealants (manufacturers data).
Allowable tensile stress, short term loads σall,short MPa 0.14

Allowable tensile stress, long term loads σall,long MPa 0.014
Allowable shear stress, short term loads τall,short MPa 0.070-0.128
Allowable shear stress, long term loads τall,long MPa 0.007-0.011
Young’s modulus of elasticity, short term loads Eshort MPa 1.0-2.5
Maximum allowable strain [213] "all – ±12.5%
Poisson’s ratio ν – 0.49
Figure 7.19: a allowable

allowable deformation t/2 deformation 12.5% a
Example of a good (two sided)
and a poor (L-shaped) structural
silicone sealant joint.
t 12.5% t
t
structural glass structural glass
silicone sealant silicone sealant
Good structural Poor structural silicone

silicone sealant joint sealant joint

width to thickness ratios given by manufacturers. For structural applications, i. e. the

fixing of glass fins or any in plane load introduction, different joint configurations are
shown in Figure 7.20. The load carrying behaviour depends on the ratio between face
side bond length and lateral bond length. The load is mainly transferred over the face side
joint which is subjected to tension. Due to the lateral elongation restraint in the U-channel
the lateral bond length has only a small influence on the joint stiffness. Approved design
methods for these types of connections do not yet exist and research is still ongoing
[54, 186].
F F F Figure 7.20:
Structural Different structural silicon joints.
silicone
a) U-shape joint b) T-shape joint c) L-shape joint
In some countries such as Germany or France structural silicone sealant cannot be

used to carry permanent loads (i. e. dead load) and SSGS facades require additional
mechanical fixings to prevent the glass from falling once the silicone fails.
Furthermore, the chemical compatibility of all materials in contact with the silicone
must be ensured in order to ensure long-term performance and prevent damage. The
compatibility of any material that the structural silicone adhesive comes in contact
with (e. g. gaskets, spacers, backer materials, setting blocks) has to be approved by the
manufacturer or should be tested in the laboratory. EPDM, neoprene, bitumen, asphalt
and other organic-based membranes, coatings and gaskets often cause discoloration of
light coloured silicone sealants. These materials are often approved for incidental contact
with the structural silicone but are not approved for full contact as a structural spacer
material [7].
The design values provided by manufacturers are based on the assumption that the
sealant fails due to loss of cohesion (i. e. failure within the silicone) rather than adhesion
(i. e. failure at the silicone-adherend interface). Adhesion quality is mainly affected by
the surface quality of the connected materials (adherends). Flat surfaces such as glass
provide the best conditions while surfaces with pores are unfavourable as they only allow
adhesion to the local peaks in the material. Aluminum, anodized aluminum, stainless
steel (not brushed or with satin finish) and some powder coatings offer good conditions
for adhesion. Some glass coatings (e. g. most self-cleaning coatings) are not suitable with
structural silicone. All surfaces have to be primed prior to the silicone application [86].
In Europe the application of SSGS are regulated in [52, 74, 161]. A European Technical
Approval (ETA) for any silicone used in structural applications is needed. EOTA 1998
[161] defines permissible stresses for loading in dynamic (short-term) tension, dynamic
shear and in permanent shear (but not for permanent tension). For dynamic tension it
requires that the 5%-fractile value of the strengths measured on small scale tests must
exceed the permissible stress by a factor of 6. For permanent shear a minimum creep

factor of 10 is defined. Therefore permissible stresses for permanent shear loads are
usually 10 to 15 times lower than for dynamic shear loads. The design method given
in EOTA 1998 [161] is limited to four side supported glass (SSGS glued or mechanical
fixed) panels with a linear SSGS joint over the entire glass edge. This quite rough design
approach does not take into account the stiffness of the supporting frame or the non linear
stress distribution along the glass edge in the SSGS joint due the deformation of the glass
panel. An application of [161] for any structural silicone sealant connection is therefore
not useful. [161] requires all SSGS connections to be made in the factory rather than on
site. This is because proper execution of an SSGS joint requires a controlled climate and
clean surroundings. However, in all-glass structures some SSGS joints may have to be
applied on-site. This will require special measures to ensure a proper environment and
even more stringent quality assurance procedures. Even so, it should be noted that the
structural quality of an SSGS joint cannot be tested non-destructively.
In the Unites States, SSGS applications are regulated by [1, 14]. The design principle
is similar to the European approach. Dow Corning provides a detailed design guide and
examples on detailing [85].
7.3.3 Rigid adhesive connections

The search for connection elements with a minimal visual impact has led to intense
research in the field of rigid glued connections. Structural silicon is the only adhesive
product with a proven track record in glass architecture, however this product is un-
suitable for small discrete adhesive confections as it is neither strong nor stiff enough
for this application. Epoxies and acrylics, that been used successfully for decades in the
aeronautical and automotive industries, are the most promising stiff adhesives for glass
construction, however, their performance is largely untested and there are a number
of challenges in transferring the technology from other industries to glass construction
[315].
Parameters affecting performance
There are many aspects to be considered in the design of a rigid adhesive joint, including
the selection of a suitable adhesive, the geometry of the bonded area, the temperature
range in which the adhesive must perform and the durability of the adhesive joint.
Some of the first choices to be made in designing an adhesive joint are those relating
to the geometry of the adhesive bond. The thickness of the adhesive layer is a primary
consideration in this respect. At this stage it is important to distinguish between contact
adhesives that require a small adhesive thickness often below 1 mm and gap-filling adhesives
that are able to perform at thicknesses in excess of 5 mm. Although annealed glass is a
relatively flat product, heat treating the glass causes roller wave distortions and fixing
two or more pieces of glass will sometimes require further assembly tolerances. With
tolerances in excess of 1 mm it is recommended to use epoxy-based adhesives which have
gap filling properties. With lower tolerances it may be possible to use contact adhesives
such as acrylic-based adhesives.
UV-curing acrylics have already been used successfully in the furniture industry to
assemble pieces made entirely of glass and have been shown to achieve a good joint.
Unfortunately, they do not cure effectively in thick layers, because the UV radiation is

not able to reach all the monomers to activate the polymerization. Such adhesives are
promising for their use with glass because they are transparent and once cured they are
resistant to UV radiation. One of the most interesting applications in architecture to date
is the 2001 renovation of the Austrian IBM head office in Vienna: here for the first time a
stiff adhesive, instead of structural silicon, is used to structurally bond the façade to the
underlying metal structure.
The perimeter shape of the adhesive joint is also an important geometrical con-
sideration. One of the disadvantages in using stiff adhesives is their limited capacity
to redistribute stress concentrations and to absorb deformation. It is therefore neces-
sary to avoid geometrical singularities and sharp edges of the adherents: these lead to
stress concentrations [3] and in some cases can be avoided by rounding the edges. If
a FE-calculation of the joint is pursued, it is important to include such rounding in the
geometrical model, since FE-models could overestimate the stress concentration around
points of singularity.
Another aspect to be considered is the temperature range that the connection has
to withstand during its service life. If the temperature is above the glass transition
temperature of the adhesive Tg , the chain segments of a macromolecule can move, thus
leading to a reduction in stiffness and strength. Below Tg such movements are frozen.
The glass transition temperature depends on the chemical composition and on the cross-
linking rate of the adhesive. Epoxies often have a Tg higher than acrylics and are therefore
generally more suitable for application at higher temperatures. Both the short term
and the long term joint behaviour are influenced by the Tg : the value of the force the
joint carries is generally lower when approaching Tg and the viscous component of the
deformations increases as the temperature gets closer to the glass transition temperature
[287, 290]. When Tg is reached, the change in the fundamental quantities is not abrupt,
but gradual [4]. Moreover, the adhesion forces are lower at high temperatures, so the
same product may exhibit a cohesion failure at low temperatures and an adhesion failure
at high temperatures [42].
The need for a surface treatment to improve adhesion on glass depends on the kind
of adhesive. The glass surface to be bonded can be treated by means of mechanical or
chemical processes or with the use of primers, which may provide a more receptive layer
to the adhesive. Initial information on certain products as well as on certain treatments is
available, but this field needs further investigation [239].
The last important aspect to be taken into account is durability [226]. There is a
lack of research on the long term performance of glass adhesives [239], so the following
information draws from the experience gained in the field of metal adherents. The
influence of service time on adhesives depends on their chemical composition and on
their cross-linking rate [185]. It has been found that the mechanical properties of an
adhesive joint, which depends on the adhesive layer itself, as well as on the interface
adhesive-adherents, may deteriorate upon exposure to its service environment: water, in
liquid or vapour form, is the most hostile environment for structural adhesive joints that is
commonly encountered. The influence of water on the adhesive is generally reversible, so
that any deterioration is recovered upon drying. All polymers absorb greater quantities of
water when their temperature is above Tg , so that rubbery materials tend to show greater
water absorption than rigid adhesives [248]. Other parameters affecting environmental
durability are temperature, stress rate and distribution in the adhesive layer as well as
surface characteristics and pretreatment of the adherents. Accelerated weather tests have

been set up in laboratories to accurately model the complex deterioration process within a
reasonable range of time [83, 126, 142, 143, 156–159]. These are obtained by increasing
the presence of certain agents above their natural rates: UV radiation, moisture or water
and temperature. Specimens may also be immersed in acids or salt solutions. The results
obtained should preferably be compared to published information on natural weathering
behaviour.
In addition to the influence of aging, the effect of each of the previously described
described parameters has to be investigated by means of tests which could be carried out
on bulk specimens or on the whole joint. Similar tests are carried out for overlapping
metal joints [18, 19, 82] so that in certain cases it is possible to adapt the existing tests
for glass applications.
In general specific research on the use of glass and stiff adhesives has focused on
assembling all-glass systems or on developing mixed structures. The former includes
proposals for glass adhesive T-beams composed of two glass panes [277], for a glass cruci-
form column composed of three pieces of glass [261] and for a glass shell (Figure 7.21)
assembled by means of adhesive butt joints [42]. The latter includes research on com-
posite beams made of a wood frame glued onto glass which has a stiffening function
[189, 231, 257] and glass-fibre-reinforced plastic profiles glued on glass plates [227].
This innovative research provides a glimpse of the opportunities offered by using stiff
adhesives, but it is important to note that there is still a lack of understanding of the
basics in glass adhesion. therefore a substantial amount of further research is required in
this field for glass adhesion to become an accepted and mainstream form of construction.
Figure 7.21:
Example of a glass shell with butt
adhesive joints. (designed and built
by Sobek and Blandini, University of
Stuttgart, Germany)
Limit state design
According to the limit state analysis, the safety factors used in the design of adhesive joints
must take into account the uncertainties associated with the fabrication and analysis of the
joint (effects of workmanship, uncertainties concerning the assumed stress distribution in
the joint) and the changes in material with time. Suggestions for the values of the safety
factors are given in the EUROCOMP Design Code and Handbook [67] (Table 7.22). In this
proposal it is assumed that the adhesion to glass is adequate, so that only the behaviour of
the adhesive itself is considered. With this premise, the material safety factor is calculated
as

Table 7.22:
Source of adhesive properties γm1
Recommended values for
Typical or textbook values 1.5 partial safety factors to
Values obtained by testing 1.25 be applied to adhesive
Source of adhesive properties γm2 properties [67].
Manual application, no adhesive thickness control 1.5

Manual application, adhesive thickness control 1.25
Established application procedure with repeatable and 1.0
controlled process parameters
Type of loading γm3
Long-term loading 1.5
Short-term loading 1.0
Environmental conditions γm4
Service conditions outside test conditions 2.0
Adhesive properties determined for the service condi- 1.0
tions
Fatigue loading γm5
Adhesive subjected to significant fatigue loading 1.5 − 3.0
Loading basically static 1.0
¨
Y 2 for connections designed by testing,
γm = γmi ≥ (7.4)
4 for connections subjected to long-term loading.
For the design of adhesive joints in case of fire it will be necessary to carry out a heat
flow analysis and determine the capacity of the joint under the design temperature [218].
However, where fire is a major design consideration, a pure adhesive joint will not be
appropriate, unless the adhesive can be effectively insulated.
Wellershoff [333] suggests the following approach for the design of glued connections
τEd τEk · γF
= ≤1 (7.5)
τRd τRk · fT,t
γM
where τEk represents the characteristic value of the shear stress, τRk the characteristic
value of short term shear strength, fT,t a reduction factor which is a function of the material
temperature T and the load duration t (represented schematically in Figure 7.23), γF
is load safety factor (according to national code) and γM is the material safety factor
(according to national code).
Experimental studies have been carried out on the time and temperature dependant
behaviour of adhesives which are used in glass construction and diagrams were developed
for the reduction factor fT,t [333]. Additionally creep effects under a constant material
temperature T may be quantified using Equation (7.3) and Equation (7.5)
α
BT · t T,I0 α

IT,I0 0, 1
fT,III0 = fT,I0 · = fT,I0 · = fT,I0 · (7.6)
IT,III0 B T · t T,III0 α t T,III0

Figure 7.23: t [h]

Schematic representa-
tion of the reduction
10 6
factor fT,t . f T,t
10 5
4
1.0 10
3
10
2
10
10
f T,I0
1
0.1
20 40 60 80 T [°C]
where IT,I0 is the creep resistance at the beginning of deformation region I with tempera-
ture T and IT,III0 is the creep resistance at the beginning of deformation region III with
temperature T . For other stresses in glued connections the method is similar.
7.4 Recent developments and trends

Prof. Dr. Mick EEKHOUT, Dr. Jürgen NEUGEBAUER, Prof. Dr. Geralt SIEBERT, Ronald VISSER
It is evident that there is still a lack of knowledge concerning glass connections and the
current connections are largely an adaptation of pre-existing connections in steel and
timber construction. As structural glass becomes even more popular it is necessary to
devise new and more suitable connections and develop design methods that enable the
structural engineer to perform simple yet accurate calculations. The objective of new
connection types has to be focused mainly on:
u The improvement of the load carrying behaviour.
u The improvement of the load bearing capacity after partial or total failure of a glass
member.
u The development of new connection systems that are more suitable for the brittle
material behaviour of glass.
u The development of connections that provide some structural redundancy, thereby
increasing the safety of glass structures.
u The combination of various connection types in order to compensate unfavourable
properties of one connection type by favourable properties of an other.
7.4.1 Increasing the post-breakage structural capacity with fabric embeds

A new concept that increases the post-breakage structural capacity of laminated safety
glass in overhead glazing is to reinforce the PVB interlayer locally with fabric. Neugebauer
[255] provides some ideas on how this fabric might be employed for different support
conditions. In simply supported overhead glazing with glazing beads the fabric is em-
bedded into the PVB-interlayer between the glass panes near the edges, and the fabric
protrudes from the edge of the glass (Figure 7.24a). The overlapping fabric is cast into a

7.4. RECENT DEVELOPMENTS AND TRENDS 163
plastic fastening border, or is welded to a metal profile which is fixed to the substructure
with screws. In the event that the laminated glass is broken the fabric prevents the glass
from falling out.
Figure 7.24:
Fabric reinforcement of lami-
nated safety glass supports.
This reinforcement concept may also be applied to reduce the risk of post-breakage
tear out in point supported overhead glazing (Figure 7.24b). In this case a round fabric is
embedded into the PVB-interlayer around the bolt hole in the glass. The fabric is cast into
a plastic hollow shaft or welded to a metal hollow shaft which is then fixed to the point
fitting. In undercut point fittings a conical hole is drilled only in one glass pane of the
laminated safety glass. A round fabric may be embedded into the PVB-interlayer between
the glass panes and is then welded to the special conical glass fitting (Figure 7.24c). The
whole system, consisting of fabric and conical undercut glass fitting, should be embedded
during the lamination process.
7.4.2 Increasing the post-breakage structural capacity with new geometries

New geometries of point supports may increase the post-breakage structural capacity. In
case of point supported glass elements, this capacity depends on the type of point fixture.
In some countries, countersunk fixings are not allowed for overhead glazing as they show
a very poor post-breakage load bearing capacity. Due to the small contact area between
countersunk and glass the panel risks to tear out of the countersunk bolt and fall down.
This problem might be mitigated when standard bolts are used where the raised head
provides a bigger contact area. Usually, with raised head fixtures, the through hole is
between 16 mm and 30 mm. The plate diameter is between 50 mm and 80 mm, thus
offering an ample amount of contact area for support even after breakage. Nevertheless
architectural demand for flush glass surfaces means that despite their better post-breakage
performance such connections are not very popular.
A solution might be a safe countersunk (SCS) fixing [312] which – at first glance –
looks like any ordinary countersunk point fixture (Figure 7.25). It has an aluminium
countersunk sleeve, a stainless steel fastening head, a plastic washer, a stainless steel
body plate, a threaded bolt, nuts and washers. The main difference is a special bore hole

Figure 7.25:
Safe countersunk fixing with
increased post-breakage
structural capacity.
geometry that allows a countersunk for a flush design and a through hole for residual
load-bearing capability. The important factor here is to have the interlayer (PVB) run all
the way to the 22 mm through hole to allow a clamping of the PVB and the upper glass
ply. This creates the necessary support to achieve an adequate post-breakage structural
capacity.
7.4.3 High capacity adhesive connections

Despite their popularity, bolted connections are not the ideal type of connection for glass.
Firstly, glass is a brittle material, which is why local stress concentrations around the bolt
cannot be reduced through stress redistribution. This makes bolted connections relatively
inefficient from a structural point of view. Secondly, the surface flaws in glass caused
by the drilling of holes and the distortions of the tempering stresses around holes (cf.
Section 3.6) mean that bolted connections are inducing the highest stress concentrations
in the weakest possible area of the glass panel.
Research carried out by Overend [260] investigates the strength of steel-to-glass
adhesive joints that eliminate the need to drill through the glass. A circular 60 mm
diameter adhesive area was used and three different adhesive were tested. The best
performing adhesive was an acrylic based adhesive and achieved an average load bearing
capacity of 85 kN. A series of equivalent 60 mm diameter through bolt connections were
also tested for comparison, these archived an average capacity of 29 kN. These tests
showed that with the correct surface preparation and adhesive selection it is possible to
provide an adhesive connection that would improve the short term strength of bolted
connections by close to 300 percent.
A further development in this area is the combination of a glued connection and a
pretensioned bolted connection (Figure 7.26). This connection consists of two stainless
steel adhesive discs, which are glued exactly opposite of each other on either side of a fully
tempered glass plate. The discs are connected with each other by means of a stud bolt
that fits tightly in the discs but goes through a clearance hole in the glass thereby bearing
onto the steel discs but not the glass. The discs have an annular area for the adhesive
that is clear of the relatively weak hole edges in the glass. The stud bolt is pretensioned
after the adhesive has completely set. This reduces the deleterious effects caused by the

7.4. RECENT DEVELOPMENTS AND TRENDS 165
peel stresses. The hole in the glass is large enough to cope with the tolerances of the
glass manufacturer and to allow the bolt to bend. The adhesive has the function of an
intermediate material and is being used for the transfer of the shear force between the
steel discs and the glass surface and consists of a thin layer (0.1 mm) that guarantees a
stiff and creep resistant joint. The pre-stressing of this connection is only possible if the
discs are glued to monolithic glass. When laminated glass is required, the discs should
be connected to only one of the glass layers, normally the one which is protected from
weathering and vandalism.
This connection has been tested at the Faculty of Civil Engineering, Delft University of
Technology. For the tests a 19 mm fully tempered middle layer glass and stainless steel
discs with a diameter of 120 mm, a thickness of 15 mm and a bolt diameter M24 has
been used. The specimen failed by local overload of the glass cross-section just below the
stainless steel discs. The adhesive joint survived in all the tests. The average strength
of the connections was 230 kN. The stud bolt through the connection showed a visible
plastic deformation before the glass failed. Such a behaviour might be used in practice as
an early warning mechanism in case of overloading.
Figure 7.26:
Pretensioned adhesive connection.

Chapter
8
Special Topics
8.1 Design assisted by testing

Benjamin BEER, Dr. Iris MANIATIS, Prof. Dr. Geralt SIEBERT
8.1.1 Introduction
Despite advances in the field of computational analysis, the design of complex glass
structures can not be based solely on numerical simulation. The reasons why full scale
prototype testing remains an integral part of the design process of innovative glass
structures, as well as the main issues that should be considered when testing glass
elements, were discussed in Section 6.4.1.
Computational modelling, typically finite element models verified by rules of thumb,
are required to predict the structural behaviour with an acceptable level of accuracy. The
results from these calculations are often the basis for the first test prototype or specimen.
Geometrical imperfections as well as tolerances should be taken into account to achieve a
realistic test setup. A comparison between test results and the corresponding predicted
values given by the model should be carried out. If major discrepancies are found, both
the test setup and the model should be checked.
The fracture strength of heat treated glass is the sum of the absolute value of the
residual (compressive) surface stress and the inherent glass strength (see Section 3.3.2).
Only the latter is influenced by subcritical crack growth and depends, therefore, on time
and environmental conditions. The residual stress is constant. Consequently, results
from experiments with heat treated glass (HSG or FTG) in ambient conditions depend
significantly less on time and environmental conditions than the results from tests on
annealed glass.
General guidelines for design assisted by testing are given in the annex of EN
1990:2002 [133]. The engineer must, however, bear in mind that this standard has not
been specifically written for glass structures. Detailed reviews of the countless national
standards, regional standards, building regulations and recommendations for project
167
168 CHAPTER 8. SPECIAL TOPICS
specific glass testing is beyond the scope of this document. For any project, the testing
procedure has to be chosen to suit the project specific needs as well as of the requirements
defined by building owners, insurers and authorities. Nevertheless, in order to provide the
reader with a general idea, a few examples are discussed in the following.
8.1.2 Post-breakage structural capacity

Project specific testing is the common approach to ensure that a given glass assembly
provides sufficient structural capacity after failure for a certain period of time. Such test
require fewer test specimens than strength tests.
The following testing procedure, which is based on a German recommendation, is often
used in Western Europe for determining the post-breakage performance of a laminated
glass plate that is placed horizontally and loaded laterally. It is reproduced here as one
example from the many testing procedures which are currently used.
Before testing, the specimen is loaded to the greater of half the service load or
0.5 kN/m2 . For accessible glazing, the load should be applied using 1 kN weights applied
to areas of 200 mm × 200 mm. With the load still applied, all the sheets of the laminated
glass panel are fractured at several locations by means of a hole punch and a hammer. The
laminated glass panel is deemed to pass the test if the specimen does detach itself from
the supports and no dangerous glass fragments fall down within 24 hours from testing.
8.1.3 Impact testing

Examples for railings and balustrades
u Europe — EN 12600 [101]. The test simulates human body impact using a 50 kg
mass wrapped by two rubber tires (soft pendulum test). The test is intended to
classify flat glass products according to their impact resistance performance and
mode of breakage.
The test setup, including the geometry of the test frame and the impact body, is
specified in detail. The impact body must have a weight of 50 ± 0.1 kg, the tire
pressure is 0.35 ± 0.02 MPa. The specimen’s dimensions are 876 ± 2 mm × 1 938 ±
2 mm (independent from the size of the actual component). The glass type and
thickness have to comply with the ones used in the building.
Four similar specimens have to be tested. Each specimen has to be linearly supported
on four edges (elastomer support, 20 ± 2 mm wide, 10 ± 1 mm thick, Shore A
hardness 60 ± 5). The impact body is first dropped from a height of 150 mm onto
the center of the glass specimen. If the specimen does not fail, impact height is
gradually increased: 190 mm (Class 3), 450 mm (Class 2), 1 200 mm (Class 1). The
glazing is classified according to the highest drop height at which the test is passed.
For monolithic glass, the test is successful if the specimen does not break or if it
breaks, the glass fragments do not exceed a certain weight. For laminated glass, no
openings in the glass larger than 76 mm in diameter are allowed.
u Germany — TRAV 2003 [322]. As distinct from the other tests described in this
paragraph, the experimental setup and the specimen have to be equivalent to the
original building unit in terms of materials, support structure etc. Impact testing is
done with the standard pendulum according to EN 12600:2002 [101]. Depending

8.1. DESIGN ASSISTED BY TESTING 169
on the category of the glazing (cf. Section 2.4), the following drop heights are used:
Category A: 450 mm, category B: 700 mm, category C: 900 mm. The impact body
must hit the specimen on points that cause maximum glass and support damage. At
least two identic specimens have to be tested.
u UK — BS 6206 [49]. Impact tests are performed on specimens of 864 mm ×
1 930 mm using a 45.36 kg bag filled with lead shot. The impact classes are defined
in function of the drop height. Class C corresponds to a drop height of 305 mm,
class B to 457 mm and class A to 1 219 mm.
u USA — CPSC 16 CFR 1201 [73]. Test setup and testing procedure basically
correspond to the ones in BS 6206. The impact categories (classes), however, are
different: Category I corresponds to a drop height of 458 − 470 mm (18 − 18½ in),
category II to 1 219 − 1 231 mm (48 − 48½ in). In any case, the glass panels must
have a minimum thickness of ¼ in (≈ 6.4 mm).
Figure 8.1:
Impact testing of a broken laminated
glass panel; shortly after impact (left),
approx. 10 min after impact (right).
Examples for overhead glazing

u Germany — Normal overhead glazing. There is no specific standard that requires
impact testing of overhead glazing, but it is advisable to do such testing if there
is a risk of hard objects being dropped on the glass. The impact test is normally
performed using a steel sphere. Before testing, the glazing has to be loaded by
half the service load, but at least 0.5 kN/m2 . The experimental setup has to be
equivalent to the in-service conditions (full scale tests). In Germany, a 4.11 kg steel
sphere is dropped from heights between 1 and 3 m. The test is successful if the
specimen does not slide from the supports, the impact body does not penetrate the
laminated glass and no dangerous glass fragments fall down.
u Germany — Accessible overhead glazing. The following guidelines for impact
testing of accessible glazing are given in [77]: The experimental set-up has to be
equivalent to the in-service conditions (full scale tests). The impact test is performed
using a standardized cylindrical steel body weighting 40 kg. The tests are normally
done at room temperature, but if very high in-service temperatures are expected,
extra tests may be necessary. For the impact test, the specimen is loaded with half
of the working load. The load should be applied using 1 kN blocks applied to areas
of 200 mm × 200 mm. This set-up is meant to simulate people standing on the glass

surface. The impact body’s drop height is 800 mm. It has to hit the specimen on
locations that cause maximum glass and support damage. These are usually points
of maximum stress and deflection or near supports. The test is successful if the
specimen does not slide from the supports, the impact body does not penetrate the
laminated glass and no dangerous glass fragments fall down.
u Germany — Overhead glazing that is accessible for maintenance and cleaning
only. The impact body is a standardized bag filled with glass shot weighting 50 kg
[180]. Before testing, the specimen has to be loaded with a single load of 1 kN,
applied to an area of 200 mm × 200 mm. This should represent a single person
standing on the glass surface. After breakage of the uppermost glass sheet, the
whole glazing element stay on its supports for at least 15 minutes. After that, the
impact body must be dropped from a height of 1200 mm to 1800 mm and has to
hit the specimen on locations that cause maximum glass and support damage. The
criteria to pass the test are identic to the ones for glazing accessible to the public.
8.1.4 Testing connections

The testing procedure for connections should be chosen as a function of the project specific
needs as well as of the requirements defined by building owners, insurers and authorities.
The test regime may include a combination of static and cyclic loads to simulate the intend
application. As a minimum the failure load, load history, maximum deformations and the
mode of failure should be recorded. As an example, Figures 8.2 and 8.3 show a bolted
connection after failure and the typical failure mechanism.
Figure 8.2:
Example of a bolted connection after
failure (laminated glass, 2 × 8 mm, heat
strengthened).
8.2 Diagnostic interpretation of glass failures
The failure of architectural glass elements in buildings often impairs the safety and security
of a building and its occupants. The failure of glass also has a strong psychological effect
on people as broken glass is perceived as a major hazard and such an occurrence triggers
a sense of alarm particularly when the cause of failure is not immediately apparent
or when the failure seems to be disproportionate to the cause. There is, therefore, a
substantial demand for forensic investigations of glass failures. Such failures may be
generally classified under one of the following:

8.2. DIAGNOSTIC INTERPRETATION OF GLASS FAILURES 171
Figure 8.3:
Schematic representation
of the failure mechanism
of a bolted connection in a
laboratory test.
u Instability failure, i. e. the glass element lacks adequate lateral fixing or stability or is
susceptible to elastic buckling instability such as flexural buckling as encountered in
compression members or lateral torsional buckling in the case of flexural members.
u Overstressing of the glass in direct or indirect tension. The overstressing may be
caused by excessive uniform loads, blast, impact, thermal stresses or uneven /
inappropriate supports.
It is important to note that any macroscopic flaws or inclusions in the glass will often
cause premature failure of the glass at loads that are well within the load bearing capacity
expected for a sound glass element. These weaknesses in the glass may either be:
u surface defects (due to macroscopic scratches induced during manufacture or on
site surface damage);

u edge defects (due to poor handling or excessively feathered edges resulting from
poor cutting techniques);
u solid inclusions within the thickness of the glass. (This includes nickel sulfide inclu-
sions which are responsible for spontaneous breakage of tempered glass, however it
is important to note that both air bubbles and inclusions other than nickel sulfide
often cause failure patterns similar to nickel sulfide failures [191].)
In the event of glass failure it is often necessary to determine the cause so that liability
may be established and to ensure the reliability of the remaining sound glass elements in
the building in question and elsewhere. To this end a failure analysis should be undertaken.
This typically includes:
1. The collection and review of the history of the use of the glass component (e. g.
support conditions, environmental / loading conditions at instant of failure, oppor-
tunities for vandalism etc.).
2. A stress analysis model. Often finite element analysis techniques are used (cf. Sec-
tion 2.3.2).
3. An evaluation of the extent to which the component was used in conformity with
specifications.

4. A detailed investigation of the failed glass component (e. g. fractographic and / or

chemical analysis).
The first 3 points above follow standard forensic engineering procedures adopted
for most structures and materials and are therefore beyond the scope of this document.
Readers should refer to standard texts on this subject e. g. [9, 258]. On the other hand the
detailed investigation of the failed glass component (i. e. point 4 above) often requires the
broad understanding of the factors that influence the fracture patterns and the experience
of interpreting these failures.
Fractography, which is the study of fracture surface topography and its relationship
to crack propagation, may be very useful in the diagnostic interpretation of glass failure.
Fractography techniques normally involve the observation, measurement and interpreta-
tion of fracture surfaces in order to determine the origin of failure and the path of the
crack therefore giving some insight on the cause of failure. Some of these techniques date
back to the observations of Robert Hooke who first reported on the fracture surface of
limestone in his book ‘Micrographia’ published in 1665. An excellent review of the wider
applications of fractography is given in [197]. Specific fractography applications on glass
are given in [44].
8.2.1 Qualitative analysis of failed architectural glass

The first step in the investigation of the failed glass component is the on-site observation
and the piecing together of the fragments. This may seem an obvious task, however
the broken glass is often disposed by the building occupants or management and it is
important to try and salvage as many of the glass fragments as possible for further analysis.
As a minimum it should be possible for the building management to take a picture of the
glass before disposing of it.
From the failed specimen it is often possible to make some qualitative assessment of
the cause of failure by determining the following:
1. The failure origin, which helps identify the presence of large flaws or inclusions
in the glass, regions of high stress concentration and evidence of bad detailing or
possible deliberate damage.
2. The failure pattern, which gives and indication of the stresses at failure and the cause
of failure. Cracks in annealed glass often nucleate roughly perpendicular to the
major principal tensile stresses. The number of flaws or the extent of fragmentation
is related to the type of glass used, the surface stress at the instant of fracture, and
to the energy imparted to the glass by the action that caused failure (Figure 8.4).
3. Specific topographical features which may confirm or dismiss preliminary conclusions
reached from the above, e. g. the presence of localized crushing on the surface of
the glass close to the failure origin indicates impact from a hard object.
8.2.2 Quantitative analysis of failed architectural glass

It is desirable to carry out some form of empirical numerical verification of the conclusions
drawn from the qualitative analysis of glass failure. From the theoretical review of
dynamic fracture presented in Section 3.4, it is possible to obtain an approximation of
the surface stress immediately prior to failure. This is done by measuring the crack

8.2. DIAGNOSTIC INTERPRETATION OF GLASS FAILURES 173
a) thermal failure b) hard body impact c) soft (spherical) body impact
d) hard spot on the edge e) inclusion f) uniform lateral load, 2-edge

support, low load intensity
g) uniform lateral load, 2-edge h) uniform lateral load, 4-edge i) uniform lateral load, 4-edge
support, high load intensity support, low load intensity support, high load intensity
Figure 8.4: Schematic representation of typical glass failures [262].
mirror radius rm , the radius of the mist/hackle boundary rh , or the macroscopic branch
length 2rb (see Figure 3.8) from the failed glass component and using Equation (3.63) to
estimate the corresponding surface stress. From the three determining failure features
the crack branching length, 2rb , is the simplest one to measure. From the experimental
data available (cf. Section 3.4), it may be concluded that a branching constant of αb =
2.1 MPa m1/2 and an apparent residual stress σar,b = 11 MPa (annealed glass) would
provide good estimates for soda lime silica glass. In the absence of better scientific
evidence on how to define the apparent residual stress σar,b in heat treated glass, the
actual residual surface compression stress, which is an approximation for σar,b , should be
used. The resulting relationship between failure stress and macroscopic branch length
is plotted for all three glass types in Figure 8.5. The figure is based on typical residual
stress values for heat treated and fully tempered glass. Since the magnitude of residual
stresses can vary considerably, it is advisable to measure the actual residual stress in a
broken element of the glass being investigated.
In view of the present scientific evidence, the quantitative relationship between
fragment size and fracture stress yields useful results for estimations. However, this
should be used with caution as significant gaps in the present knowledge require further
research, namely:

Figure 8.5: One-half the macroscopic branch length, rb (mm)

Relationship between failure ∞ 16.00 4.00 1.78 1.00 0.64 0.44 0.33 0.25 0.20 0.16
300
stress and macroscopic branch
length.
250
200
Failure stress (MPa)

150
100
annealed glass (σar = 11 MPa)

50 heat strengthened glass (σar = 50 MPa)
fully tempered glass (σar =140 MPa)
0
0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
(One-half the macroscopic branch length, rb)-1/2 (mm-1/2)
u The existing experimental data on heat strengthened and fully tempered glass was
obtained on small and thin specimens. Furthermore, the effect of the glass thickness
on crack branching requires further investigation.
u Past research focuses on surface flaws. Failures in architectural applications may
however be caused by edge flaws. This case needs to be investigated both analyti-
cally and experimentally.
Glass specimens with long surface scratches, such as found in vandalized glass,
u
may exhibit distorted branching patterns. The macroscopic branch length may be
influenced by the scratch and thus produce inaccurate failure stress predictions.
The empirical calculation described above, combined with qualitative observations with
the naked eye, is often sufficient to perform a detailed investigation of the failed glass
component. In some cases, however, it may be necessary to carry out a second stage
of microscopy observations and / or chemical analysis. In glass these observations are
carried out by means of optical microscopy or scanning electron microscope (SEM). These
additional investigations provide crucial evidence of inclusions in the glass such as solid
inclusions and air bubbles. Further investigations such as an energy dispersive X-Ray
scan (EDX) will provide an analysis of the chemical composition of the inclusion (e. g. to
determine whether it is nickel sulfide or some other form of inclusion). Further details on
these techniques are provided in [191, 197].

Appendix
A
Notation, Abbreviations
A.1 General information
Variables are defined and explained on their first occurrence only. In case of doubt, readers
should refer to the symbol list below. It gives a short description of the variables as well
as references to the place where they are defined in the text.
Particularly unfamiliar or important terms are defined in the glossary (p. 181).
The present document follows current regulations on technical and scientific type-
setting, in particular [209], [210], [212] and [211]. Accordingly, italic symbols are
used only to denote those entities that may assume different values. These are typically
physical or mathematical variables. Symbols, including subscripts and superscripts, which
do not represent physical quantities or mathematical variables are set in upright roman
characters. (Example: The exponent ‘n’ (italic) in σnn is a physical variable, while the
index ‘n’ (roman) is an abbreviation for ‘normal’.)
A.2 Generally used indices and superscripts
XI, II, III related to crack mode I, II or III Xi i-th value, case or time period
Xadm admissible Xn normal, normalized, national
Xc critical
Xtest in laboratory testing, in laboratory
Xd design level
conditions
Xeff effective
σ(i) i-th value, case or time period
Xeq equivalent
(avoids σ1 and σ2 , which are the
Xf failure, at failure, related to fail-
principal stresses)
ure
Xi initial X(1) related to a single crack
(k)
Xinert in or for inert conditions X related to k cracks
175
176 APPENDIX A. NOTATION, ABBREVIATIONS
A.3 Functions and mathematical notation
[X] the unit of X Γ() the Gamma function

|X| the absolute value of X max() maximum
∀ for all (also ‘for each’ or ‘for ev-
min() minimum
ery’)
∃ there exists ln() natural logarithm
∝ proportional to P (X ) probability of the event X (0 ≤
much greater P (X ) ≤ 1)
much less Φ the cumulative distribution func-
k parallel to tion of the standard normal distri-
f(X) a function of the variable X bution
A.4 Abbreviations
4PB four point bending (test setup) IPP in-plane principal stress
ANG annealed glass LEFM linear elastic fracture mechanics
BSG borosilicate glass PVB polyvinyl butyral
CDF cumulative distribution function RSFP random surface flaw population
CDR coaxial double ring (test setup) SCG subcritical crack growth
FE finite element SIF stress intensity factor
FTG fully tempered glass SLSG soda lime silica glass
HSG heat strengthened glass SSF single surface flaw
A.5 Latin symbols
a 1. crack depth → p. 59; 2. longer edge length of a rectangular plate → p. 96

a0 lower limit of the crack depth → p. 63
ai initial crack depth → p. 59
ac critical crack depth → p. 58
af crack depth at failure → p. 59
b short edge length of a rectangular plate → p. 96
c dimensionless stress distribution function → p. 68
e eccentricity → p. 110
f0 reference ambient strength → p. 67
f0,inert reference inert strength → p. 64
fSd design value of the maximum tensile stress → p. 113
fRd design value of the maximum tensile strength → p. 113
h effective glass thickness → p. 96
i, j, k integer variables

A.5. LATIN SYMBOLS 177
k̄ combined parameter (used to simplify notation); → p. 67

k̃ first surface flaw parameter of the glass failure prediction model → p. 96
kV SG correction factor which takes into account the shear stiffness of the interlayer →
p. 123
kτ shear buckling coefficient → p. 123
m number of half sine waves of a buckled plate → p. 122
m0 second surface condition parameter (see also θ0 ) → p. 63
m̄ combined parameter (used to simplify notation) → p. 66
me second surface flaw parameter of the glass failure prediction model → p. 96
n exponential crack velocity parameter → p. 51
q pressure, uniformly distributed load
q̃ non-dimensionalized load → p. 97
r parameter of the PDF of the crack depth → p. 63
~r a point on a surface (defined by two coordinates x and y, ~r = ~r(x, y)) → p. 64
t 1. time; 2. glass thickness → p. 109
t0 reference time period → p. 61
t eff equivalent glass tickness → p. 111
tf 1. time to failure; 2. point in time when failure occurs; 3. lifetime
t int interlayer thickness in laminated glass → p. 111
u displacement → p. 118
v 1. crack velocity → p. 51; 2. lateral deflection of a beam → p. 116
v0 1. linear crack velocity parameter → p. 51; 2. initial lateral geometric deforma-
tion of a beam → p. 109
w deflection of a bar or a plate → p. 110
w0 initial deformation of a bar or a plate → p. 109
x, y coordinates of a point on a surface, cf. ~r
za distance between the center of gravity and the point where the load is applied
→ p. 115
A surface area (general)

A0 unit surface area (= 1 m2 ) → p. 64
Ared decompressed surface area → p. 88
B Weibull’s risk function → p. 96
E Young’s modulus → p. 56
E Iz,eff equivalent bending stiffness about the z-axis → p. 115
F̂ empirical cumulative distribution function → p. 193
G 1. shear modulus → p. 115; 2. energy release rate → p. 56
Gint interlayer shear modulus → p. 111
GKeff equivalent torsional stiffness → p. 115
I moment of inertia → p. 110

178 APPENDIX A. NOTATION, ABBREVIATIONS
Ii moment of inertia of layer number i → p. 111

IS portion of the moment of inertia of a sandwich cross section due to parallel axis
theorem → p. 111
IS,comp portion of the torsion moment of inertia due to sandwich behaviour → p. 116
Iz moment of inertia about the z-axis → p. 115
K torsion constant → p. 115
KI stress intensity factor for fracture mode I loading (opening mode) → p. 56
KIc fracture toughness (critical stress intensity factor) for fracture mode I loading →
p. 57
Kth threshold stress intensity factor → p. 52
L likelihood function → p. 194
Lcr critical buckling length → p. 110
LLT unrestrained beam length → p. 115
Mcr,LT critical torsional buckling moment of a beam → p. 115
MLT,Rd design value of the bending moment capacity of the glass beam buckling →
p. 120
MLT,Sd design value of the bending moment due to applied loads → p. 121
N 1. number of samples or other countable quantity; 2. axial compression load →
p. 110
Ncr elastic critical buckling load → p. 110
NEd design value of applied compression force → p. 127
Nx,crit critical plate buckling load per unit length → p. 122
Pf failure probability (= 1 − Ps ) → p. 63
Pf,t target failure probability → p. 67
Q force, point load, location- and orientation dependent failure probability
R resistance
S summed square of residuals → p. 195
T duration, time period or end of a time period starting at t = 0
U coefficient combining fracture mechanics and crack velocity parameters → p. 66
VEd design value of applied compression force → p. 127
W elastic section modulus → p. 110
p p p
Y geometry factor (caution: does not include π; it is KI = Y π · σn · a) →
p. 56

A.6. GREEK SYMBOLS 179
A.6 Greek symbols
α 1. interim parameter to determine the section properties of a sandwich cross

section → p. 111; 2. height to width ratio of a plate → p. 122; 3. imperfection
factor for buckling curves → p. 129
β 1. shape parameter of the Weibull distribution → p. 76; 2. interim parameter to
determine the section properties of a sandwich cross section → p. 111
γ 1. partial factor (specified more precisely in the index); 2. shear deformation →
p. 153
θ general Weibull scale parameter (specified more precisely in the index)
θ0 first surface condition parameter (see also m0 ) → p. 63
λLT slenderness ratio of a beam → p. 120
λP slenderness ratio of a beam → p. 127
µ mean
ν Poisson’s ratio → p. 56
ρ reduction factor for plate buckling factor → p. 126
σ 1. stress (details specified in the index); unless otherwise stated, compressive
stresses are negative and tensile stresses positive; 2. standard deviation
σ̇ stress rate (σ̇ = dσ/dt)
σ̄ equivalent reference stress → p. 67
σ̆ representative stress (often σmax ) → p. 68
σ̃ non-dimensionalized stress → p. 97
σ1 major in-plane principal stress (σ1 ≥ σ2 ) → p. 64
σ2 minor in-plane principal stress (σ1 ≥ σ2 ) → p. 64
σc inert strength of a crack (also called ‘critical stress’) → p. 58
σt0 t 0 -equivalent static stress → p. 61
σcr,LT critical lateral torsional buckling stress → p. 120
σE surface stress due to action(s) E → p. 57
σf stress at failure (also known as ‘failure stress’ or ‘breakage stress’)
σmax maximum principal stress in an element (geometric maximum) → p. 68
σn in-plane surface stress normal to a crack’s plane (also known as the crack opening
stress) → p. 64
σr residual surface stress due to tempering (sometimes called ‘prestress’; compres-
sive ⇒ negative sign) → p. 57
σR,t 0 t 0 -equivalent resistance → p. 61
σRk characteristic tensile strength → p. 120
σp 1. stress due to external constraints or prestressing → p. 57; 2. compressive edge
stress of a plate subjected to buckling → p. 128
ϕ crack orientation, angle → p. 64
τ 1. time (point in time); 2. shear stress (general)
τcrit critical buckling load of a plate subjected to shear → p. 123
ψ load combination factor → p. 100
χLT reduction factor for lateral torsional buckling → p. 120

Appendix
B
Glossary of Terms
Action General term for all mechanical, physical, Acoustical double glazing Two monolithic glass
chemical and biological actions on a structure or panels, set in a frame, with an air space between
a structural element, e. g. pressures, loads, forces, them.
imposed displacements, constraints, temperature, Acrylate resins Polymerization products of certain es-
humidity, chemical substances, bacteria and insects. ters of acrylic and methacrylic acid, such as methyl
Action history The description of an action as a func- or ethyl acrylate. Possess great optical clarity and
tion of time. high degree of light transmission. Nearest approach
to an organic glass.
Abhesive A material that resists adhesion; a film of
coating applied to surfaces to prevent sticking, heat Acrylic A group of thermoplastic resins or polymers
sealing, and so on, such as a parting agent or mold formed by polymerizing the esters of acrylic acid.
release agent. Action intensity The magnitude of an action, e. g. a
Abrasion (general) The wearing away of a material load intensity, a stress intensity or the magnitude of
surface by friction. an imposed deformation. See also ‘load shape’.
Abrasion (decorative glass) A method of shallow, Active solar heat gain Solar heat that passes
decoration grinding using a diamond wheel. through a material and is captured by mechani-
cal means.
Absolute humidity The weight of water vapour
present in a unit of air. Adduct A chemical addition product.
Accelerated ageing Any set of test conditions de- Adhere That property of a sealant/compound which
signed to determine, in a short time, the result measures its ability to bond to the surface to which
obtained under normal conditions of ageing. In it is applied.
accelerated ageing tests, the usual factors consid- Adhesion The clinging or sticking of two material sur-
ered are heat, light, and oxygen, either separately faces to each other. In rubber parlance, the strength
or combined. of the bond or union between two rubber surfaces
Accelerated weathering Machine-made means of or plies, cured or uncured. The bond between a
duplicating or reproducing weather conditions. cured rubber surface and non-rubber surface, e.g.,
Such tests are particularly useful in comparing a glass, metal, wood, or fabric.
series of products at the same time. No real correla- Adhesion failure (1) The separation of the two sur-
tion between test data and actual service is known faces with a force less than specified. (2) The sepa-
for resins and rubbers used in many products. ration of the two adjoining surfaces due to service
Acid etching A process, manly used for glass deco- conditions.
ration, where the glass surface is treated with hy- Adhesive setting Classifies the conditions to convert
drofluoric acid. Acid-etched glass has a distinctive, the adhesive from its packaged state to a more use-
uniformly smooth and satin-like appearance. ful form.
181
182 APPENDIX B. GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Adsorption The action of a body in condensing and As-received glass Glass as it is delivered to the client,
holding gases, dyes, or other substances. The ac- sometimes also called ‘new glass’. The surface con-
tion is usually considered to take place only at or tains only the small and random flaws introduced
near the surface. The power of adsorption is one by production, cutting, handling and shipping.
of the characteristic proper-ties of matter in the col- Aspect ratio The relationship between the long and
loidal state and is associated with surface energy the short edge lengths of a rectangular plate.
phenomena of colloidally dispersed particles.
Attenuation The reduction of sound pressure level,
Ageing A progressive change in the chemical and usually expressed in decibels.
physical properties of rubber, especially vulcanized
Autoclave A vessel that employs heat and pressure.
rubber, usually marked by deterioration. The verb
In the glass industry, used to produce a bond be-
is also used transitively to denote the setting aside
tween glass and PVB or urethane sheet, thus creat-
of rubber goods under specified conditions for the
ing a laminated sheet product.
purpose of observing their rate of deterioration.
Back-fill Placing material into the opening between
Ageing resistance Resistance to ageing by oxygen glass and glazing.
and ozone in the air, by heat, and by light.
Bait A webbed metal frame used to draw molten
Ageing tests Accelerated tests of rubber specimens glass.
to find out their endurance by heating them in air Bandage joint Sealant joint composed of bond-
under pressure or similarly in oxygen. breaker tape over the joint movement area with
Air infiltration The amount of air that passes be- an overlay of sealant lapping either side of the tape
tween a window sash and frame or a door panel sufficient to bond well to the surfaces; often used
and frame. where extreme movement occurs and conventional
joint design is not possible.
Air side In the float process, the upper side of glass
is called the air side. Batch The mixed raw materials which are used to
make glass.
Alkali Substance that neutralizes acid to form salt
Bead A sealant/compound after application in a joint.
and water. Yields hydroxyl (OH-) ions in water
Also a molding or stop used to hold the glass prod-
solution. Proton acceptor.
uct in position.
Ambient noise The all-encompassing noise associ-
Bent glass Flat glass shaped while hot into cylindrical
ated with a given environment, usually a composite
or other curved shapes.
of sounds from sources near and far.
Bevel or compound bead In glazing, a bead of com-
Ambient temperature The environmental tempera- pound applied to provide a slanted top surface so
ture surrounding the object. that water will drain away from the glass or panel.
Annealing The process which prevents glass from Bevelling The process of edge-finishing flat glass by
shattering after it has been formed. The outer sur- forming a sloping angle to eliminate right-angled
faces of the glass shrink faster than the glass be- edges.
tween the surfaces, causing residual stresses which Bifurcation buckling If the load applied on a struc-
can lead to shattering. This can be avoided by re- tural member exceeds the critical value, the straight
heating the glass and allowing it to cool slowly. position is unstable and a slight disturbance leads
Artificially induced surface damage Any kind of to large displacements and, finally, to the collapse
damage that is induced systematically and on pur- of the member by buckling. The critical point, after
pose, e. g. for laboratory testing. If it is homoge- which the deflections of the member become very
neous in terms of its characteristics and its distribu- large, is called the "bifurcation point" of the system.
tion on the surface, it is called ‘artificially induced Bite The dimension by which the edge of a glass prod-
homogeneous surface damage’ (e. g. surface dam- uct is engaged into the glazing channel.
age induced by sandblasting).
Body-tinted glass See tinted glass.
Antiwalk blocks Rubber blocks that prevent glass Blocks Rectangular, cured sections of neoprene or
from moving sideways in the glazing rabbet because other approved materials, used to position a glass
of thermal effects or vibration. product in a glazing channel.
Art glass Art glass goes by many names. It is called Bond (noun) (1) The attachment at the interface be-
opalescent glass, cathedral glass, or stained glass tween an adhesive and an adherent. (2) A coat of
and is usually produced in small batch operations. finishing material used to improve the adhesion of
Artificially induced damage Any kind of damage succeeding coats.
that is induced systematically and on purpose, e. g. Bond (verb) To join materials together with adhe-
for testing purposes. sives. To adhere.

183
Bond breaker A material to prevent adhesion at a Channel A three-sided U-shaped opening in sash or
designated interface. frame to receive pane or panel, with or without
Bond strength The force per unit area or length nec- removable stop or stops. Contrasted to a rabbet,
essary to rupture a bond. which is a two-sided, L-shaped section, as with face-
glazed window sash.
Bonding agents Substances or mixtures of sub-
stances used in attaching rubber to metal. Channel glazing The sealing of the joints around
panes or panels set in a U-shaped channel employ-
Bow A continuous curve of a glass sheet, either verti- ing removable stops.
cal or horizontal.
Chemically strengthened glass Glass with a resid-
Breather tube A small-diameter tube placed into the
ual compressive surface stress produced by a process
space of an insulating glass unit through the perime-
of ion exchange.
ter wall to equalize the air pressure within the unit.
These tubes are to be sealed on the job site prior to Chemical resistance The resistance offered by elas-
installation. tomer products to physical or chemical reactions
from contact with or immersion in various solvents,
Bronze glass A glare- or heat-reducing glass in-
acids, alkalies, salts, etc.
tended for applications where glare control and
reduction of solar heat are desired or where colour Clips Wire spring devices to hold glass in a rabbet
can contribute to design. sash, without stops or face glazing.
Buckling Buckling is a failure mode characterized by Coating A material, usually liquid, used to form a cov-
a sudden failure of a structural member that is sub- ering film over a surface. Its function is to decorate,
jected to high compressive stresses where the actual to protect the surface from destructive agents or
compressive stresses at failure are smaller than the environments (abrasion, chemical action, solvents,
ultimate compressive stresses that the material is corrosion, and weathering) and/or to enhance the
capable of withstanding. This mode of failure is also (optical, mechanical, thermal) performance.
described as failure due to elastic instability.
Coefficient of variation (CoV) A measure of disper-
Buckling curve Buckling curves afford a means of sion of a probability distribution. It is defined as the
design aid for stability critical structural elements ratio of the standard deviation σ to the mean µ.
taking into account geometrical, structural and ma-
terial imperfections. Coefficient of expansion The coefficient of linear ex-
pansion is the ratio of the change in volume per
Bullet-resistant glazing Security glazing affording a
degree to the length at 0 ◦ C. The coefficient of vol-
defined resistance against the firing of specified
ume expansion (for solids) is three times the linear
weapons and ammunition.
coefficient. The coefficient of volume expansion
Bull’s eye The round, whorl shape in the center of for liquids is the ratio of the change in volume per
old panes of glass. degree to the volume at 0 ◦ C.
Butt glazing The installation of glass products where Cohesive failure The splitting and opening of a
the vertical glass edges are without structural sup- sealant/compound within its body, resulting in wa-
porting mullions. ter penetration.
Butt joint A joint having opposing faces which may Cold resistant Withstands the effect of cold or low
move toward or away from one another; a joint in temperatures without loss of serviceability.
which the receiving surfaces stresses the sealant in
tension or compression. Colour cast glass Includes many kinds of cast and
rolled glass. There are more than 100 colours.
Butyl rubber A copolymer of about 98% isobutylene
and 2% isoprene. It has the poorest resistance to Column buckling Column buckling is defined as an
petroleum oils and gasolines of any rubber. Ex- instance of lateral bending of a bar due to a axial
cellent resistance to vegetable and mineral oils, to compressive load.
solvents, such as acetone, alcohol, phenol, and ethy- Computing time The time required to run an algo-
lene glycol, and to water and gas absorption. Heat rithm on a computer. While the actual value de-
resistance is above average. Sunlight resistance is pends on the performance on the computer, the
excellent. Its abrasion resistance is not as good a term is still useful for qualitative considerations and
natural rubber. Usually low permeability to gases. comparisons.
Chain polymerization A chain reaction in which the
Condensation Moisture that forms on surfaces colder
growth of a polymer chain proceeds exclusively
than the dew point.
by reaction(s) between monomer(s) and reactive
site(s) on the polymer chain with regeneration of Conduction The transfer of heat through matter,
the reactive site(s) at the end of each growth step. whether solid, liquid, or gas.

Consistency The viscosity or solidness of a semisolid Delamination Separation or splitting, usually lack of
or syrupy substance. It may be called the resistance adhesion in plied goods.
to deformation. That property of a body by which it Desiccants Porous crystalline substances used to ab-
resists deformation or permanent change of shape. sorb moisture and solvent vapours from the air
Constant stress rate loading A specimen is loaded space of insulating glass units. More properly called
such that the stress increases linearly with respect absorbents.
to time. Design See structural design.
Constant load rate loading The load on a specimen Design life The period of time during which a struc-
is increased linearly with respect to time. tural element is expected to perform according to
its specification, i. e. to meet the performance re-
Convection A transfer of heat through a liquid or gas,
quirements.
when that medium hits against a solid.
Dew point The temperature at which air is saturated
Crack In the present document, the term ‘crack’ refers with respect to a condensible component, such as
to the idealized model of a flaw having a defined water vapour or solvent.
geometry and lying in a plane.
Discoloration Staining. Changing or darkening in
Chromogenics Any visibly switchable technology colour from the standard or original.
useful for glazing, mirrors and transparent displays. Double glazing, double-glazed units See insulating
Cullet Recycled or waste glass. glass unit.
Cure To change the properties of a material by chem- Drawing tower Used in the sheet glass process for
ical reaction, which may be condensation, polymer- drawing molten glass.
ization, or vulcanization. Usually accomplished by Dual sealed system A primary seal of polyisobuty-
the action of heat and catalysts, alone or in combi- lene and a secondary seal of polysulphide,
nation, with or without pressure. polyurethane or silicone ensure the effective and
durable seal of double-glazed units.
Curtain walling Non-load bearing, typically alu-
minium, façade cladding system, forming an in- Edge clearance The distance between the edge of
tegral part of a building’s envelope. the glass and rebate.
Edge joint A joint made by bonding the edge faces of
Curved glass Glass, which is curved in form, pro-
two adherends.
duced by heating it to its softening point, so that it
takes the shape of the mould. Effective nominal flaw depth The depth of a flaw
that is calculated from its measured strength.
Damping The dissipation of sound energy in a
medium over time or distance. Elasticity The property of matter which causes it to
return to its original shape after deformation, such
Decompressed surface The part of an element’s sur- as stretching, compression, or torsion.
face where the tensile stress due to loading is
Elastomer A substance that can be stretched to at
greater that the residual compressive stress due to
least twice its original length and, after having been
tempering. On these parts of the surface, there is a
stretched and the stress removed, returns to approx-
positive crack opening stress.
imately its original length in a short time.
Defect A flaw that is unacceptable. Elongation Increase in length expressed numerically
Deflection The physical displacement of glass from as a fraction or percentage of initial length.
its original position under load. Emissivity The relative ability of a surface to absorb
and emit energy in the form of radiation. Emissivity
Deformation Any change of form or shape produced
factors range from 0.0 (0%) to 1.0 (100%).
in a body by stress or force.
Emittance Heat energy radiated by the surface of a
Degradation Deterioration, usually in the sense of a body, usually measured per second per unit area.
physical or chemical process, rather than a mechan-
ical one. Enamel A soft glass compound of flint or sand, soda
potash, and red lead. It is the colourful result of
Dehydration Removal of water as such from a sub- fusion of powdered glass to a substrate through
stance, or after formation from a hydrogen and hy- the process of firing, usually between 750 ◦ C and
droxyl group in a compound, by heat or dehydrating 850 ◦ C. The powder melts and flows to harden as a
substance. smooth, durable vitreous coating on metal, glass or
Delaminate To split a laminated material parallel to ceramic.
the plane of its layers. Sometimes used to describe Enamelled glass Enamelled glass is tempered or heat
cohesive failure of an adherent in bond strength strengthened glass, one face of which is covered,
testing. either partially or totally, with mineral pigments.

185
Energy absorptance The percentage of solar radiant Frosted glass Glass produced by acid etching or sand
heat energy absorbed and re-emitted externally and blasting. These surface modifications have the ef-
internally by the glass. fect of rendering the glass translucent, obscuring
Energy reflectance (RE) The percentage of solar ra- the view while still passing light.
diant heat energy reflected by glazing. Fully tempered glass Glass with a high residual com-
EPDM EPDM rubber (ethylene propylene diene pressive surface stress, varying typically between
monomer rubber) is an elastomer which is char- 80 MPa and 150 MPa in the case of soda lime silica
acterized by wide range of applications (i. e. as glass. According to ASTM C 1048-04 [11], fully
automotive weather-stripping and seals, glass-run tempered glass is required to have either a mini-
channel, garden and appliance hose, tubing, wash- mum surface compression of 69 MPa (10 000 psi)
ers, roofing membrane, geomembranes, rubber me- or an edge compression of not less than 67 MPa
chanical goods). (9 700 psi). In European standards, the fragmen-
tation count and the maximum fragment size is
Equibiaxial stress field The two in-plane principal specified [97, 98].
stresses are equal (σ1 = σ2 ). In this stress state,
the stress normal to a crack σn is independent of g Abbreviation or symbol for ‘solar factor’ according
the crack’s orientation ϕcrack , meaning that σn = to EN 410:1998 [145].
σ1 = σ2 ∀ϕcrack . An equibiaxial stress field is in Gas-filled units Insulating glass units with a gas
particular found within the loading ring in coaxial other than air in the air space to decrease the unit’s
double ring testing. thermal conductivity (U-value) and to increase the
Exterior glazed Glass set from the exterior of the unit’s sound insulating value.
building. Gasket Pre formed shape, such as a strip, grommet,
Exterior stop The removable molding or bead that etc., of rubber and rubber-like composition used to
holds the pane or panel in place when it is on the fill and seal a joint or opening, alone or in conjunc-
exterior side of the pane or panel, as contrasted tion with the supplemental application of a sealant.
with an interior stop located on the interior side of Glass A uniform amorphous solid material, usually
the pane. produced when a suitably viscous molten material
Extruded Forced through a die or continuous mold cools very rapidly to below its glass transition tem-
for shaping. perature, thereby not giving enough time for a reg-
ular crystal lattice to form. By far the most familiar
Face Describes the surfaces of the glass in numerical form of glass is soda lime silica glass. In its pure
order from the exterior to the interior. The exte- form, glass is a transparent, relatively strong, hard-
rior surface is always referred to as face 1. For a wearing, essentially inert, and biologically inactive
double-glazed unit, the surface of the outer pane material which can be formed with very smooth and
facing into the cavity is face 2, the surface of the impervious surfaces. Glass is, however, brittle and
inner pane facing into the cavity is face 3 and the will break into sharp shards. These properties can
internal surface of the inner pane is face 4. be modified, or even changed entirely, through the
Flat glass Pertains to all glass produced in a flat form. addition of other compounds or heat treatment.
Flaw General term describing a condition or change Glazing The securing of glass into prepared openings.
that indicates an abnormal condition or imperfec- It also refers to the collective elements of a building
tion in a material. Only flaws that are unacceptable comprising glass, frame and fixings.
are defects. Glazing bead A strip surrounding the edge of the
Float glass Transparent glass with flat, parallel sur- glass in a window or door; applied to the sash on
faces formed on the surface of a bath of molten tin. the outside, it holds the glass in place.
If no information with respect to heat treatment is Glazing channel A three-sided U-shaped sash detail
given, the term generally refers to annealed float into which a glass product is installed and retained
glass. by a removable stop.
Fogged unit An insulating glass unit with a perma- Glue Historically, glue only refers to protein colloids
nent deposit that contaminates its interior surfaces. prepared from animal tissues. The meaning has
Forming Shaping or molding into shape. been extended to any type of glue-like substances
Front putty The putty forming a triangular fillet be- that are used to attach one material to another.
tween the surface of glass and the front edge of the Greenhouse glass This is a translucent rolled glass
rabbet. with a special surface design to scatter light.
Frost point The temperature below 0 ◦ C at which vis- Guarding The prevention of people falling wherever
ible frost begins to deposit on the air-space surface there is a change in floor level by means of a perma-
of a sealed insulating glass unit. nent barrier.

Hardness Property or extent of being hard. Measured Intaglio A light engraving on the surface of glass.
by extent of failure of indentor point of any one of a
Integrity The ability of glazing to remain complete
number of standard testing instruments to penetrate
and to continue to provide an effective barrier (e. g.
the product.
to flames or people).
Heat-absorbing glass Glass (usually tinted) formu-
lated to absorb an appreciable portion of solar en- Interior glazed Glass set from the interior of the
ergy. building.
Heat-soak test (HST) A heat-treatment which is car- Interior muntins Decorative grid installed between
ried out after the tempering process in order to the glass panes that does not actually divide the
reduce the risk of spontaneous breakage of heat glass.
treated glass in service due to nickel sulfide inclu-
sions. Interior stop The removable molding or bead that
holds the pane in place, when it is on the interior
Heat strengthened glass Glass with a medium re-
side of the pane.
sidual compressive surface stress. Heat strength-
ened glass is required, according to [11], to Interlayer Very thin layer between two materials. In
have a residual compressive surface stress between laminated glass: a transparent, tough plastic sheet-
24 MPa (3 500 psi) and 52 MPa (7 500 psi). In Euro- ing material, such as PVB, that is able to retain the
pean standards, the fragmentation count and the fragments after fracture.
maximum fragment size is specified [131, 132].
Intumescence The swelling and charring of materials
Heat treated glass Glass that has been thermally when exposed to fire.
treated to some extent. The term includes heat
strengthened and fully tempered glass. Joint The location at which two adherents are held
together by an adhesive.
Heel bead Sealant applied at the base of channel, af-
ter setting pane or panel and before the removable Laminated glass Two or more panes of glass bonded
stop is installed. together with a plastic interlayer.
Homogeneous The opposite of heterogeneous. Con-
Lap joint A joint made by overlapping adjacent edge
sisting of the same element, ingredient, component,
areas of two adherents to provide facing surfaces
or phase throughout, or of uniform composition
which can be joined with an adhesive.
throughout.
Immersion Placing an article into a fluid, generally Lateral load Short form of ‘out-of-plane load’, often
so it is completely covered. also used as a short form for → uniform lateral load.
Impact The single instantaneous stroke or contact of Lateral torsional buckling Lateral torsional buck-
a moving body with another either moving or at ling is defined as an instance of lateral bending
rest. about the weak cross section axis of a bar due to
Impact strength Measure of toughness of a material, bending about the strong axis.
as the energy required to break a specimen in one Lehr Similar to an oven, used to anneal glass by re-
blow. heating it and allowing it to cool slowly.
Infill panel The glass panel underneath the handrail
Light reducing glass Glass formulated to reduce the
in a barrier that provides containment, but no struc-
transmission of visible light.
tural support to the main frame of the barrier.
Inherent strength The part of the tensile strength Light reflectance The proportion of the visible spec-
that is not due to compressive residual stresses but trum that is reflected by the glass.
to the resistance of the material itself. For float
Light transmittance The proportion of the visible
glass, this is approximately (even float glass has
spectrum that is transmitted through the glass.
some compressive residual stresses) the measured
Clear glass, depending on its thickness, allows 75 to
macroscopic resistance.
92% of visible light to pass through.
Inner pane The pane of a double-glazed unit which
faces the interior of a building. Lite Another term for a pane of glass.
Insulating glass unit (IGU) A piece of glazing con- Load duration factor The effect of a given load de-
sisting of two or more layers of glazing separated by pends not only on its intensity, but also on the du-
a spacer along the edge and sealed to create a dead ration of a glass element’s exposure to the load.
air space or a vacuum between the layers in order This is often accounted for by applying a duration-
to provide thermal insulation. The dead air space is dependent factor, the so called ‘load duration factor’,
often filled with inert gas (argon or, less commonly, either to the load intensity or to some reference re-
krypton). sistance.

187
Load shape Describes the geometric properties of a Ornamental glass Rolled glass with the surface fig-
load, e. g. whether it is a distributed load, a point ured by shaping or embossing rolls.
load, a line load, or a free-form load, where on a Outer pane The pane of a double-glazed unit which
structural element it is applied and whether it is faces the exterior of a building.
uniform, triangular or has some other shape. A
complete characterization of a load must include its Pane (of glass) A sheet of glass.
shape and intensity (cf. ‘action intensity’). Predictive modelling The creation of a new model
or the use of an existing model to predict the be-
Loading time The time period during which a load
haviour of a system, e. g. the mechanical behaviour
is applied.
of a structural glass element.
Low emissivity coating (low-e coating) A transpar- Passive solar heat gain Solar heat that passes
ent metallic or metallic oxide coating that saves through a material and is captured naturally, not by
energy and increases comfort inside a building by mechanical means.
reducing heat loss to the environment.
Patterned glass Rolled glass with an embossed pat-
Low iron glass Extra clear glass, which has a re- tern on one or both surfaces.
duced iron oxide content in order to lessen the green
Peeling The loosening of a rubber coating or layer
tinge inherent in ordinary clear float glass.
from a base material, such as cloth or metal, or
Metal spacers Roll-formed metal shapes used at the from another layer of rubber.
edges of an insulating glass unit to provide the des-
Permanent set The amount by which an elastomeric
ignated air-space thickness.
material fails to return to its original form after a
Mode I Loading condition that displaces the crack deformation.
faces in a direction normal to the crack plane, also Permeability The degree of water vapour or gas
known as the opening mode of deformation. transmission through a unit area of material of unit
Monotonously increasing If x(t) is monotonously thickness induced by unit vapour pressure differ-
increasing with t, it is x(t 2 ) > x(t 1 ) for any t 2 > t 1 . ences between two specific surfaces under specified
The increase may or may not be linear. temperature and humidity conditions.
Mullion A horizontal or vertical member that holds Permeance The time rate of water vapour or gas
together two adjacent panes of glass or units of sash transmission through a unit area of a body, normal
or sections of curtain wall. to specific parallel surfaces, under specific tempera-
ture and humidity conditions.
Multiple-glazed units Units of three panes (triple-
glazed) or four panes (quadruple-glazed) with two Plastics Natural and artificially prepared organic
and three dead air spaces, respectively. polymers of low extensibility, as compared with
rubber, which can be molded, extruded, cut, and
Muntin In sash having horizontal and vertical bars worked into a great variety of objects, rigid or non-
that divide the window into smaller panes of glass, rigid, and used as substitutes for wood, metals,
the bars are termed muntin bars. Similar to mullion glass, rubber, leather, fibers, and textile materials.
but lighter in weight. Many are also referred to as synthetic resins.
Neoprene A synthetic rubber with physical properties Plate buckling Plate buckling is defined as an in-
closely resembling those of natural rubber but not stance of out of plane bending of a plate due to
requiring sulfur for vulcanization. in plane compressive stress.
Nickel sulfide inclusion A rare, but naturally occur- Points Thin, fiat, triangular, or diamond-shaped
ring impurity present in all glass that can, in cer- pieces of zinc used to hold glass in wood sash by
tain circumstances, lead to spontaneous breakage driving them into the wood.
of heat treated glass in service. POM Polyoxymethylene (POM), also known as ac-
Non-uniform stress field A stress field in which the etal resin, polytrioxane, polyformaldehyde, and
stress varies from one point of the surface to another paraformaldehyde, is an engineering plastic used to
(cf. uniform stress field). make gears, bushings and other mechanical parts.
Off-line coating See sputtered coating. Potash Potassium oxide (a flux).

Primary seal A butyl-based sealant, for example poly-
On-line coating See pyrolytic coating.
isobutylene, applied to the edges of the spacer bar
Opaque glass Glass that transmits no light whatso- during assembly into double-glazed units, to ensure
ever. a watertight and airtight seal around the perimeter
Opaline glass This glass is closely related to opaque. of the unit.
It is an opaque cast with ground and polished sur- Primer A special coating designed to provide ade-
faces. quate adhesion of a coating system to a new surface.

Priming Sealing of surfaces to produce adhesion of Sandblasting A special glass treatment in which sand
sealants. is sprayed at high velocities over the surface of the
Profile glass Usually U-shaped, rolled glass for archi- glass.
tectural use. Sash A frame into which glass products are glazed,
Purlins Structural members, generally horizontal, on i. e., the operating sash of a window.
sloped glazing frames. Score side The upper side of glass coming off the
PVB (polyvinyl butyral) Polyvinyl butyral is a vis- float line, sometimes called the air side.
coelastic resin that is made from vinyl acetate Screen printed glass Tempered or heat strengthened
monomer as the main raw material. It provides glass, one face of which is covered, either partially
strong binding, optical clarity, adhesion to many or completely, with a mineral colour.
surfaces, toughness and flexibility. PVB is the most Sealant A material used to fill a joint, usually for the
commonly used interlayer material for laminated purpose of weather-proofing or waterproofing. It
glass. forms a seal to prevent gas and liquid entry.
Pyrolytic coating A metallic coating applied to the Sealants (for insulating glass units) Formulated
glass ‘on-line’ during the float glass manufacturing elastomeric compounds with specific application
process. The high temperatures involved result in and vapour transmission properties as well as
the metallic oxides fusing into the surface of the controlled adhesion, cohesion, and resiliency.
glass through pyrolysis.
Secondary seal A sealant, usually polysulphide,
R-value The resistance of conductive heat energy polyurethane or silicone, applied to the edges of
transfer of a specific insulating glass unit assembly. double-glazed units after the primary seal, to pro-
It is the reciprocal of the U-value (R = 1/U). vide effective and durable adhesion between the
Rafters Structural members; vertical in sloped glaz- glass components and spacer bar.
ing frames. Setting Placement of panes or panels in sash or
Radiation Energy released in the form of waves or frames.
particles because of a change in temperature within Setting blocks Small blocks of composition, lead,
a gas or vacuum. neoprene, wood, etc., placed under the bottom edge
Rebate The section of the frame surround which of the pane or panel to prevent its settling onto the
forms an angle into which the glass is placed and bottom rabbet or channel after setting, thus distort-
held. ing the sealant.
Reflective coating A metallic or metallic oxide coat- Shading coefficient The solar factor (total transmit-
ing applied to one side of the glass in order to signif- tance) of a glass relative to that of 3 mm clear float
icantly increase the amount of reflection of both the glass. Used as a performance comparison. The
visible and infrared range of the electromagnetic lower the shading coefficient, the lower the amount
spectrum. of solar heat transmitted. The short wave shad-
Relative heat gain An energy comparison factor for ing coefficient is the direct transmittance (T) of the
glass products combining the radiant and conduc- glass as a factor of the solar factor or total trans-
tive heat gain under specific conditions. mittance (g or TT) of 3 mm clear float glass. The
long wave shading coefficient is the internally re-
Residual stress The residual compressive surface radiated energy that the glass has absorbed as a
stress that arises from the tempering process. (The factor of the solar factor (total transmittance) of
term ‘prestress’ is, although widely used, somewhat 3 mm clear float glass. It is determined by subtract-
misleading and therefore not used in the present ing the direct transmittance from the solar factor
document.) (total transmittance) of the subject glass and then
Resin laminate Two or more sheets of glass assem- dividing by the solar factor (total transmittance) of
bled with one or more resin interlayers. 3 mm clear float glass.
Rheology Science of deformation and flow of matter. Silica Silica, also known as silicon dioxide (SiO2 ), is
Deals with laws of plasticity, elasticity, viscosity, and a very common mineral composed of silicon and
their connection with paints, plastics rubber, oils, oxygen. Quartz and opal are two forms of silica. In
glass, cement, etc. nature, silica is commonly found in sand.
Rigidity The property of bodies by which they can Silicates Silicates are minerals composed of silicon
resist an instantaneous change of shape. The recip- and oxygen with one or more other elements. Sili-
rocal of elasticity. cates make up about 95% of the Earth’s crust.
Rollerwave An optical phenomenon, generally no- Silicone seal Where the edges of double-glazed units
ticed in reflection, caused by contact between glass are unframed and exposed to direct sunlight, they
and rollers in the horizontal tempering process. are sealed with silicone for UV resistance.

189
Silvering A process used in the manufacture of mir- Instability is essentially a property of structures in
rors, whereby a silver coating is applied to one sur- their extremes of geometry; for example, long slen-
face of the glass. der struts, beams, thin flat plates or thin cylindrical
shells. In very general terms, stability may be de-
Skylight A glass and frame assembly installed into
fined as the ability of a physical system to return to
the roof of a building.
equilibrium when slightly disturbed.
Slenderness ratio The slenderness ratio is a means
Starved joint A joint that has an insufficient amount
of classifying structural members (columns, beams,
of adhesive to produce a satisfactory bond.
plates) with respect to their risk of failure due to
instability. Stepped-edge unit The edges of the double-glazed
unit are not flush. One pane is larger and overlaps
Sloped glazing Any installation of glass that is at a the other, to enable their use in roof glazing for
slope of 10◦ / 15◦ (depends on the standard) or more example.
from the vertical.
Stop Either the stationary lip at the back of a rabbet
Solar control coating A coating that absorbs or re- or the removable molding at the front of the rabbet
flects solar energy. serving to hold the pane or panel in sash or frame
Solar energy absorption The percentage of the solar with the help of spacers.
spectrum energy that is absorbed by a glass product. Strength The maximum stress required to overcome
Solar factor g The percentage of total solar radiant the cohesion of a material. Strength is considered
heat energy transmitted through glazing (the sum in terms of compressive strength, tensile strength,
of energy transmitted directly and energy absorbed and shear strength, namely the limit states of com-
and re-emitted to the interior). pressive stress, tensile stress and shear stress respec-
tively.
Solar heat gain Solar radiant heat, transmitted or re-
Stress rate The stress rate σ̇ is the increase in stress
emitted by glazing into a building, contributing to
per unit of time, or, in other words, the derivative
the build-up of heat.
over time of the stress: σ̇ = dσ/dt.
Sound reduction index A laboratory measure of the Structural design The iterative process of selecting a
sound insulating properties of a material or building structural element that meets a set of performance
element in a stated frequency band. requirements that depend on the specific applica-
Spacer, spacer bar Generally an aluminium bar tion. Common requirements for structural glass
along all edges of a double-glazed unit, filled with elements relate to aspects such as deformation, vi-
desiccant, which separates the two panes of glass bration, usability, aesthetics, acoustic or optical per-
and creates a cavity. formance, and, of course, load bearing capacity.
Spacers Small blocks of composition, neoprene, etc., Structural glazing Glass acting as a structural sup-
placed on each face of pane and panel to center port to other parts of the building structure. It can
them in the channel and maintain uniform width of also refer to glass that is fixed by means of bolted
sealant beads, preventing excessive sealant distor- connectors, although the glass is not acting as a
tion. structural element in this case.
Spall Small fragments of glass that are ejected from Structural sealant glazing An external glazing sys-
the surface of a laminated glass sheet when the tem in which the glass is bonded to a carrier
opposite surface is impacted. frame without mechanical retention. Often called
structural silicone glazing when a silicone adhe-
Spandrel, spandrel panel Glass cladding panels sive/sealant is used.
used in non-vision areas of a façade, commonly in
Sunlight The portion of solar energy detectable by
curtain walling. They generally comprise an enam-
the human eye; it accounts for about 44 percent of
elled or opacified glass to conceal building structure
the total radiation wavelength spectrum.
elements such as the edge of floor slabs.
Supercooled Frozen into shape.
Sputtered coating A coating applied to the glass ‘off-
line’ or after the float glass manufacturing process Tank A glass furnace.
by a technique called magnetron sputtering under Tempered glass Glass that has been thermally
vacuum conditions. treated to some extent. The term includes heat
strengthened and fully tempered glass.
SSG Structural sealant glazing.
Tensile strength The maximum amount of tensile
SSGS Structural sealant glazing systems.
stress that a material can be subjected to before
Stability Stability theories are formulated in order to failure. The definition of failure can vary according
determine the conditions under which a structural to material type, limit state and design methodol-
system, which is in equilibrium, ceases to be stable. ogy.

Thermal break A material with a low thermal con- Two-part compound A product which is necessarily
ductance used to separate exterior and interior ma- packaged in two separate containers. It is comprised
terials. The thermal break is intended to stop the of a base and the curing agent or accelerator. The
transfer of heat. two compounds are uniformly mixed just prior to
Thermal stress The internal stresses created when its use.
glass is subjected to variations in temperature across U-value The amount of conductive heat energy trans-
its area. If the temperature differentials in the glass ferred through 1 m2 of a specific insulating glass
are excessive, the glass may crack. This is referred unit for 1 K temperature difference between the in-
to as thermal breakage or fracture. door and outdoor air. It is the inverse of the R-value
Thermal transmittance See U-value. (U = 1/R). Synonym: thermal transmittance.
Thermoplastic Capable of being repeatedly softened Ultimate elongation The elongation at the moment
by heat and hardened by cooling. of rupture.
Time of loading The time period during which a load Uniaxial stress field The minor principal stress is
is applied. equal to zero. An uniaxial stress field is encoun-
Tin side The lower side of glass in the float process, tered for instance in four point bending tests.
i. e. the side that is in contact with the pool of Uniform lateral load Uniformly distributed out-of-
molten tin. plane load.
Tinted glass Transparent float glass with a consistent
Uniform stress field A stress field where the stress is
colour throughout its depth.
equal at all points on the surface (cf. non-uniform
Total heat gain The sum of the energy transmitted stress field).
into the building.
Vinyl glazing Holding glass in place with extruded
Total heat loss The sum of the energy transmitted to vinyl channel or roll-in type.
the outdoors.
Viscosity A measure of the resistance of a fluid to de-
Total transmittance See solar factor.
formation under shear stress. Viscosity describes
Toughened glass Term used in the UK for fully tem- a fluid’s internal resistance to flow and may be
pered glass (see Table 1.16). thought of as a measure of fluid friction.
Transient analysis An analysis that accounts for the Visible light transmittance The percentage of light
time-dependence of input parameters. in the visible spectrum range of 390 to 780 nm that
Translucent Transmitting light but obscuring clear is directly transmitted through glass.
vision.
Weep hole Opening at the base of a cavity wall to
Transmittance The fraction of radiant energy that collect moisture and dispense it or a breather tube
passes through a given material. put in sealant to relieve moisture.
Transparent Clear, permitting vision. Wire glass Glass having a layer of meshed wire com-
Transverse seam A seam joining two materials pletely embedded in the glass pane. It may have
across the width of the finished product. polished or patterned surfaces.
Main sources: [7, 175, 187, 288, 342]

191
192 APPENDIX C. STATISTICAL FUNDAMENTALS
Appendix
C
Statistical Fundamentals
C.1 Statistical distribution functions
Table C.1: Continuous statistical distribution functions.
Type PDF f (x ) Mean µ

CDF F (x ) Variance σ 2
1 x −µ 2

1

Normal f (x) = p exp − µ=µ
σ 2π 2 σ
Z x
F (x) = f (x) dx σ2 = σ2
−∞
1 ln x − λ 2 ζ2

1

Log-normal f (x) = p exp − µ = exp λ +
ζx 2π 2 ζ 2
Z x
F (x) = f (x) dx σ2 = µ2 exp(ζ2 ) − 1

0
1 a+b
Uniform f (x) = µ=
b−a 2
x −a (b − a)2
F (x) = σ2 =
b−a 12
a
ab ab
Pareto f (x) = µ=
x a+1 a−1
a
b ab2
F (x) = 1 − σ2 =
x (a − 1)2 (a − 2)
β x β−1
β
x 1

Weibull f (x) = · exp − µ = θ ·Γ 1 +
θ θ θ β
β
x 2 1

F (x) = 1 − exp − σ2 = θ 2 Γ 1 + − Γ2 1 +
θ β β

C.2. THE EMPIRICAL PROBABILITY OF FAILURE 193
Table C.2: Discrete statistical distribution functions.
Type PDF f (x ) Mean µ Notes

CDF F (x ) Variance σ 2
e−λ λ x
Poisson f (x) = µ=λ x = 0, 1, 2, . . .
x!
x
X −λ
e λ i
F (x) = σ2 = λ
i=0
i!
C.2 The empirical probability of failure
For some parameter estimation methods, for instance the least squares method (see
Section C.3), an empirical probability distribution function for test data is required. In
general, the probability density function (PDF) of the discrete random variable X is
defined as ¨
ˆ pi for x = x i (i = 1, 2, 3, . . .)
f (x) = (C.1)
0 for all other x
with pi being the probability that the random variable X takes on the value x i , which
means
Ni
pi = (C.2)
N
in which Ni is the number of occurrences of the value i (generally 1 for test results) and
N the total number of observations. The corresponding empirical cumulative distribution
function is: X
F̂ (x) = P(X ≤ x) = f (x i ) (C.3)
x i ≤x
If test results are ordered such that i is the rank of the value x i within all test results, the
most obvious estimator is:
i
F̂ (x i ) = (C.4)
N
While this estimator is very straightforward, it has at least two disadvantages. Firstly, the
highest value cannot be represented on probability graphs and causes numerical problems.
Secondly, it is very unlikely that the value with F̂ = 1.0 will be observed within relatively
small samples. The largest value observed will thus lie below 1.0.
Values on the ordinate of a probability graph are actually random variables with a
distribution of their own, which has a strong formal similarity to a beta distribution. The
expectation value (mean rank) of this beta-distributed variable for the i-th value is
i
F̂ (x i ) = (C.5)
N +1
and is independent of the observed values’ distribution. The use of Equation (C.5) is
recommended by many standard works on statistics. For large samples, the difference

194 APPENDIX C. STATISTICAL FUNDAMENTALS
between N + 1 and N becomes very small. If the median (median rank) of the beta
distribution is used instead of the expectation value, the estimator becomes1 :
i − 0.3
F̂ (x i ) = (C.6)
N + 0.4
There is no straightforward way of telling which estimator is more suitable. The difference
for practical application is small. In order to ensure consistency with the European stan-
dard on the determination of the strength of glass EN 12603:2002 [102], Equation (C.6)
was used within the present work.
C.3 Parameter estimation and fitting algorithms
C.3.1 Maximum likelihood method

The principle of the maximum likelihood method is that the parameters of the distribution
function are fitted such that the probability (likelihood) of the observed random sample is
maximized.
Let X be a random variable with the probability density function f (x, θ~ ) where
~
θ = (θ1 , θ2 , . . . , θK )T are the unknown constant parameters which need to be estimated.
With the vector ~x = (x̂ 1 , x̂ 2 , . . . , x̂ N ) containing the random samples from which the
distribution parameters θ~ are to be estimated, the likelihood function L(~x | θ~ ) is given by
the following product:
N
L(~x | θ~ ) = f (x̂ i , θ~ )
Y
(C.7)
i=1
The logarithmic likelihood function Λ, which is much easier to work with than L, is:
N
Λ(~x | θ~ ) = ln L(~x | θ~ ) = ln f (x̂ i , θ~ )
X
(C.8)
i=1
The maximum likelihood estimators of the parameters θ1 , θ2 , . . . , θK are obtained by

solving the following optimization problem:
min(−L(~x | θ~ )) or min(−Λ(~x | θ~ )) (C.9)

θ~ θ~
As can be seen from the equations, the maximum likelihood method is independent of any
kind of ranks or plotting methods (cf. Section C.2). The maximum likelihood estimators
have a higher probability of being close to the quantities to be estimated than the point
estimators obtained with the method of moments have. [166, 344]
C.3.2 Least squares method

To obtain the coefficient estimates, the least squares method minimizes the summed
square of residuals. The residual for the i-th data point ∆i is defined as the difference
between the observed response value yi and the fitted response value ŷi , and is identified
1
This is a good approximation, the exact solution can only be found through the roots of a polynomial.

C.3. PARAMETER ESTIMATION AND FITTING ALGORITHMS 195
as the error associated with the data. The summed square of the residuals (error estimate)
is given by:
XI I
X
S= ∆2i = ( yi − ŷi )2 (C.10)
i=1 i=1
in which I is the number of data points included in the fit. [247]
C.3.3 Method of moments

EN 12603:2002 [102], the European standard for the analysis of glass strength data,
is based on the method of moments. For uncensored samples, the following Weibull
parameter point estimates are given:
  !−1
N N s
1X 1 s X X
θ̂ = exp  ln x i + 0.5772  ; β̂ = N κN · ln x i − ln x i
N i=1 β̂ N −s i=s+1 i=1
(C.11)
θ̂ and β̂ are the point estimates for the shape and scale parameters respectively. N
is the sample size, x i is the i-th sample, s is the largest integer < 0.84N . The factor
κN is a function of N and is provided in a table (examples: N = 5 ⇒ κN = 1.2674,
N = 10 ⇒ κN = 1.3644, N = 20 ⇒ κN = 1.4192).
While the maximum likelihood method and the least squares method can be used
to estimate parameters of any model, the point estimators in Equation (C.11) can only
be used to estimate the parameters of a two-parameter Weibull distribution. Their main
advantage is their simplicity.

References
[1] AAMA CW-13-85. AAMA CW-13-85: Struc- Heat-Treated Flat Glass – Kind HS, Kind FT
tural Sealant Glazing Systems. American Archi- Coated and Uncoated Glass. American Society
tectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA), for Testing Materials, 2004.
Schaumburg, USA, 1985. [12] ASTM C 1172-03. Standard Specification for
[2] Abrams, M. B., Green, D. J. and Glass, S. J. Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. American
Fracture behavior of engineered stress pro- Society for Testing Materials, 2003.
file soda lime silicate glass. Journal of Non- [13] ASTM C 1376-03. Standard Specification for Py-
Crystalline Solids, 321(1-2):10–19, 2003. rolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat
[3] Adams, R. and Harris, J. The influence of local Glass. American Society for Testing Materials,
geometry on the strength of adhesive joints. 2003.
International Journal of Adhesion & Adhesives, [14] ASTM C 1401-02. Standard Guide for Struc-
7(2):69–80, 1987. tural Sealant Glazing. American Society for
[4] Adams, R. and Wale, W. Structural adhesive Testing Materials, 2002.
joints in Engineering. Elsevier, London, UK, [15] ASTM C 1422-99(2005). Standard Specifi-
1984. cation for Chemically Strengthened Flat Glass.
[5] Adams, R. D., Comyn, J. and Wake, W. C. Struc- American Society for Testing Materials, 2005.
tural Adhesive Joints in Engineering. 2nd Edi- [16] ASTM C 1464-06. Standard Specification for
tion. Chapman and Hall, London, 1997. Bent Glass. American Society for Testing Mate-
[6] Addington, M. and Schodek, D. Smart Materi- rials, 2006.
als and Technologies in Architecture. Architec- [17] ASTM C 1503-01. Standard Specification for
tural Press, 2004. ISBN 0750662255. Silvered Flat Glass Mirror. American Society
[7] Amstock, J. S. Handbook of Glass in Construc- for Testing Materials, 2001.
tion. McGraw-Hill, 1997. ISBN 0-070-01619-4. [18] ASTM D 1002-05. Standard test method for
[8] AS website. Angstrom Sciences website. 2006. apparent shear strength of single-lap-joint adhe-
URL http://www.angstromsciences.com/. sively bonded metal specimen by tension loading
[9] ASCE GFI 1989. Guidelines for Failure Inves- (metal-to-metal). American Society for Testing
tigation. Technical Council on Forensic Engi- Materials, 2005.
neering. American Society of Civil Engineers, [19] ASTM D 3528-96. Standard test method for
1989. ISBN 0872627365. strength properties of double lap shear adhesive
[10] ASTM C 1036-2001. Standard Specification joints by tension loading. American Society for
for Flat Glass. American Society for Testing Testing Materials, 1996.
Materials, 2001. [20] ASTM E 1300-03. Standard Practice for De-
[11] ASTM C 1048-04. Standard Specification for termining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings.
American Society for Testing Materials, 2003.
197
198 REFERENCES
[21] ASTM E 1300-04. Standard Practice for De- Building Envelopes – Final Report EU COST Ac-
termining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings. tion C13 (to be published). Delft University of
American Society for Testing Materials, 2004. Technology & Ecole polytechnique fédérale de
[22] ASTM E 1300-94. Standard practice for de- Lausanne EPFL, 2006.
termining the minimum thickness and type of [36] Belis, J., Van Impe, R., De Meester, B., Lagae,
glass required to resist a specific load. American G. and Katnam, K. B. Stability Approach of the
Society for Testing Materials, 1994. Dimensioning of Glass Beams. In Proceedings
[23] Atkins, A. G. and Mai, Y.-W. Elastic and Plastic of the International Symposium on the Applica-
Fracture. Ellis Horwood, 1988. ISBN 0-132- tion of Architectural Glass ISAAG 2004, 15-16
48196-0. November, Munich, Germany. 2004.
[24] Auradou, H., Vandembroucq, D., Guillot, C. [37] Belis, J., Van Impe, R., Lagae, G. and Van-
and Bouchaud, E. A probabilistic model for the laere, W. Enhancement of the buckling
stress corrosion fracture of glass. Transactions, strength of glass bemas by means of lateral
SMiRT 16, Washington DC, August 2001. restraints. Structutral Engineering and Mechan-
ics, 15(5):495–511, 2003.
[25] Ayyub, B. M. and McCuen, R. H. ????
[38] Bennison, S. J., Jagota, A. and Smith,
[26] Bakioglu, M., Erdogan, F. and Hasselman, D.
C. A. Fracture of Glass/Poly(vinyl bu-
P. H. Fracture mechanical analysis of self-
tyral) (Butacite®) Laminates in Biaxial Flex-
fatigue in surface compression strengthened
ure. Journal of the American Ceramic Society,
glass plates. Journal of Materials Science,
82(7):1761–1770, 1999.
11:1826–1834, 1976.
[39] Bennison, S. J., Smith, C. A., Van Duser, A.
[27] Bando, Y., Ito, S. and Tomozawa, M. Direct Ob-
and Jagota, A. Structural Performance of Lam-
servation of Crack Tip Geometry of SiO2 Glass
inated Glass Made with a "Stiff" Interlayer. In
by High-Resolution Electron Microscopy. Jour-
Glass in Buildings, ASTM STP 1434, V. Block
nal of the American Ceramic Society, 67(3):C36–
(editor). 2002.
C37, 1984.
[40] Bernard, F. Sur le dimensionnement des struc-
[28] Batdorf, S. B. and Crose, J. G. Statistical The-
tures en verre trempé: étude des zones de connex-
ory for the Fracture of Brittle Structures Sub-
ion. Ph.D. thesis, LMT Cachan, France, 2001.
jected to Nonuniform Polyaxial Stresses. Jour-
nal of Applied Mechanics, Transactions ASME, [41] Bernard, F., Gy, R. and Daudeville, L. Finite El-
41 Ser E(2):459–464, 1974. ement Computation of Residual Stresses Near
Holes in Tempered Glass Plates. Glass Technol-
[29] Batdorf, S. B. and Heinisch, H. L. Weakest
ogy, 43C, 2002.
Link Theory Reformulated for Arbitrary Frac-
ture Criterion. Journal of the American Ceramic [42] Blandini, L. Structural use of adhesives in
Society, 61(7-8):355–358, 1978. Glass Shells. Ph.D. thesis, D 93 University of
Stuttgart, Verlag Grauer, Stuttgart, 2005.
[30] Beason, W. L. A failure prediction model for win-
dow glass. NTIS Accession no. PB81-148421, [43] Blank, K. Dickenbemessung von vierseitig
Texas Tech University, Institute for Disaster Re- gelagerten rechteckigen Glasscheiben unter gle-
search, 1980. ichförmiger Flächenlast. Technical Report, Insti-
tut für Konstruktiven Glasbau, Gelsenkirchen,
[31] Beason, W. L., Kohutek, T. L. and Bracci, J. M.
1993.
Basis for ASTM E 1300 annealed glass thick-
ness selection charts. Journal of Structural [44] Bradt, R. C. Fractography of Glass. Kluwer
Engineering, 142(2):215–221, February 1998. Academic / Plenum Publishers, 1995. ISBN
0306448807.
[32] Beason, W. L. and Morgan, J. R. Glass Fail-
ure Prediction Model. Journal of Structural [45] BRL-A 2005. Bauregelliste A. German building
Engineering, 110(2):197–212, 1984. regulation, Deutsches Institut für Bautechnik
(DIBt), 2005.
[33] Behr, R. Architectural glass for earthquake-
resistant buildings. In Proceedings of Glass Pro- [46] Brown, W. G. A Load Duration Theory for Glass
cessing Days 2001, 18-21 June, Tampere, Fin- Design. Publication NRCC 12354, 1972.
land. 2001. [47] Brown, W. G. A practicable Formulation for
[34] Belis, J. Kipsterkte van monolithische en gelam- the Strength of Glass and its Special Application
ineerde glazen liggers. Ph.D. thesis, Ghent Uni- to Large Plates. Publication No. NRC 14372,
versity, Belgium, 2005. URL http://hdl.handle. National Research Council of Canada, Ottawa,
net/1854/5844. 1974.
[35] Belis, J. and Van Impe, R. Buckling-related [48] BS 6180:1999. Barriers in and about buildings –
problems of glass beams. In Glass & Interactive Code of practice. British Standard Institute BSI,

199
December 1999. [63] Carré, H. and Daudeville, L. Load-Bearing Ca-

[49] BS 6206:1981. Specification for impact per- pacity of Tempered Structural Glass. ASCE
formance requirements for flat safety glass and Journal of engineering mechanics, 125, No.
safety plastics for use in buildings. British Stan- 8:914–921, 1999.
dard Institute BSI, November 1981. [64] Charles, R. J. and Hilling, W. B. The kinetics of
[50] BS 6262-3:2005. Code of practice for glazing glass failure by stress corrosion. In Symposium
for buildings – Part 3: Code of practice for fire, on Mechanical Strength of Glass and Ways of
security and wind loading. British Standards Improving it, Charleroy, Belgium. 1962.
Institution BSI, October 2005. [65] Charles, Y., Hild, F. and Roux, S. Long-term
[51] BS 6262-4:1994. Code of practice for glazing reliability of brittle materials: The issue of
for buildings – Part 4. Safety related to human crack arrest. Journal of Engineering Materi-
impact. British Standard Institute BSI, August als and Technology, Transactions of the ASME,
1994. 125(3):333–340, 2003.
[52] BS 6262-6:2005. Code Of Practice For Glazing [66] Clark, A. B. and Irwin, G. R. Crack Propagation
For Buildings – Part 6: Code Of Practice For Spe- Behaviours. Experimental Mechanics, 6(6):321–
cial Applications. British Standards Institution 330, 1966.
BSI, October 2005. ISBN 0580467716. [67] Clarke, J. Structural design of polymer compos-
[53] BS 6399-1:1996. Loading for Buildings; Part ites – EUROCOMP design code and handbook.
1. Code of practice for dead and imposed Spon, London, 1996.
loads. British Standard Institute BSI, Septem- [68] Colvin, J. Look – No Frames! In Proceedings of
ber 1996. Glass Processing Days 2003, 15-18 June, Tam-
[54] Bucak, O. and Hagl, A. Kleben im Bauwesen – pere, Finland, pp. 208–210. 2003.
gestern, heute, morgen499-507. Stahlbau, [69] Colvin, J. Thermal Stress Breakage in Building
75(6):499–507, 2006. Glass, 2005. Workshop, Glass Processing Days
[55] Bucak, O. and Ludwig, J. J. Stand der Unter- 2005, 17-20 June, Tampere, Finland.
suchungen an grossformatigen TVG-Scheiben [70] Compagno, A. Intelligente Glasfassaden – Mate-
zur Erlangung einer bauaufsichtlichen Zulas- rial, Anwendung, Gestaltung / Intelligent Glass
sung. In Bauen mit Glas - VDI-Tagung in Baden- Façades – Material, Practice, Design. Birkhäuser
Baden 2000, pp. 677–706. VDI-Verlag, Düssel- Verlag, 2002. ISBN 3-7643-6694-X.
dorf, 2000. [71] Conway, J. C. and Mecholsky, J. J. Use of Crack
[56] Bunker, B. C. Molecular mechanisms for cor- Branching Data for Measuring Near-Surface
rosion of silica and silicate glasses. Journal of Residual Stresses in Tempered Glass. Journal
Non-Crystalline Solids, 179:300–308, Novem- of the American Ceramic Society, 72(9):1584–
ber 1994. 1587, 1989.
[57] Calderone, I. The Dangers of Using a Proba- [72] Cook, R. D. Finite Element Modelling For
bilistic Approach for Glass Design. In Proceed- Stress Analysis. Wiley, New York, 1995. ISBN
ings of Glass Processing Days 2005, 17-20 June, 0471107743.
Tampere, Finland, pp. 364–366. 2005. [73] CPSC 16-1201:2003. CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1201:
[58] Calderone, I. J. The Fallacy of the Weibull Safety standard for architectural glazing mate-
Distribution for Window Glass Design. In Pro- rials. USA Consumer Product Safety Commis-
ceedings of Glass Processing Days 2001, 18-21 sion, Code of Federal Regulations, 2003.
June, Tampere, Finland, pp. 293–297. 2001. [74] CSTB 3488. Vitrages extérieurs collés – Cahier
[59] CAN/CGSB 12.20-M89. Structural Design of des prescriptions techniques. Cahier du CSTB,
Glass for Buildings. Canadian General Stan- Livraison 444, Cahier 3488, November 2003.
dards Board, December 1989. [75] CWCT 2004. Safety & fragility of glazed roofing.
[60] Carré, H. Le verre trempé un nouveau matériau Technical Note No. 42, Centre for Window and
de structure. Ph.D. thesis, Centre scientifique Cladding Technology (CWCT), Bath, UK, 2000.
et technique du bâtiment - CSTB, Paris, 1997. [76] De Gaetano, S. Design for Glazing Protection
[61] Carré, H. and Daudeville, L. Numerical Simu- Against Terrorist Attacks. In Proceedings of
lation of Soda-Lime Silicate Glass Tempering. Glass Processing Days 2005, 17-20 June, Tam-
Journal de Physique IV, 6:175–185, 1996. pere, Finland. 2005.
[62] Carré, H. and Daudeville, L. Thermal temper- [77] DIBt 2001. Merkblatt "Anforderungen an bege-
ing simulation of glass plates: inner and edge hbare Verglasungen; Empfehlungen für das Zus-
residual stresses. Journal of Thermal Stresses, timmungsverfahren". Fassung März 2000, Mit-
21:667–689, 1998. teilungen des Deutschen Instituts für Bautech-

200 REFERENCES
nik (DIBt), Berlin, 2001. [92] EN 1051-2:2003. Glass in building – Glass

[78] DIN 1249-10:1990. Flachglas im Bauwesen – blocks and glass paver units – Part 2: Evalu-
Teil 10: Chemische und physikalische Eigen- ation of conformity. CEN, 2003.
schaften. DIN, 1990. [93] EN 1096-1:1998. Glass in building – Coated
[79] DIN 18516-4:1990. Außenwandbekleidungen, glass – Part 1: Definitions and classification.
hinterlüftet – Einscheiben-Sicherheitsglas – Teil CEN, January 1999.
4: Anforderungen, Bemessung, Prüfung. DIN, [94] EN 1096-2:2001. Glass in building – Coated
1990. glass – Part 2: Requirements and test methods
[80] DIN 4426:2001. Sicherheitstechnische An- for class A, B and S coatings. CEN, 2001.
forderungen an Arbeitsplätze und Verkehrswege – [95] EN 1096-3:2001. Glass in building – Coated
Planung und Ausführung. DIN, September glass – Part 3: Requirements and test methods
2001. for class C and D coatings. CEN, 2001.
[81] DIN 52292-2:1986. Teil 2: Prüfung von Glas [96] EN 1096-4:2004. Glass in building – Coated
und Glaskeramik. Bestimmung der Biegefes- glass – Part 4: Evaluation of conformity / Prod-
tigkeit, Doppelring-Biegeversuch an plattenför- uct standard. CEN, 2004.
migen Proben mit grossen Prüfflächen. DIN, [97] EN 12150-1:2000. Glass in building – Ther-
1986. mally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass –
[82] DIN 53286:2006. DIN 53287: Testing of ad- Part 1: Definition and description. CEN, 2000.
hesives for metals and adhesively bonded metal [98] EN 12150-2:2004. Glass in building – Ther-
joints – Determination of the resistance to liq- mally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass –
uids. 2006. Part 2: Evaluation of conformity / Product stan-
[83] DIN 54456:2006. DIN 54456: Testing of struc- dard. CEN, 2004.
tural adhesives – Test of resistance to climatic [99] EN 12337-1:2000. Glass in building – Chemi-
conditions. 2006. cally strengthened soda lime silicate glass – Part
[84] DIN 55303-7:1996. Statistische Auswertung 1: Definition and description. CEN, 2000.
von Daten – Teil 7: Schätz- und Testverfahren [100] EN 12337-2:2004. Glass in building – Chemi-
bei zweiparametriger Weibull-Verteilung. DIN, cally strengthened soda lime silicate glass – Part
1996. 2: Evaluation of conformity / Product standard.
[85] DowCorning 2005. Dow Corning Americas CEN, 2004.
Technical Manual. Dow Corning, 2005. URL [101] EN 12600:2002. Glass in building – Pendulum
www.dowcorning.com. test – Impact test method and classification for
[86] DowCorning 2006. Dow Corning: Silicone flat glass. CEN, 2002.
Structural Glazing Manual, 2006. URL http: [102] EN 12603:2002. Glass in building – Procedures
//www.dowcorning.com/. for goodness of fit and confidence intervals for
[87] DTU 39 - A1. DTU 39 – Travaux de miroi- Weibull distributed glass stength data. CEN,
terie – Vitrerie Partie 1 : Cahier des charges 2002.
techniques – Amendement A1 sur la "casse ther- [103] EN 1279-1:2004. Glass in building – Insulating
mique" des vitrages (NF P 78-201-1/A1). Asso- glass units – Part 1: Generalities, dimensional
ciation Française de Normalisation (AFNOR), tolerances and rules for the system description.
May 1998. CEN, 2004.
[88] Duckworth, W., Shetty, D., Rosenfield, A. and [104] EN 1279-2:2002. Glass in building – Insulating
Siskos, W. Influence of Stress Gradients on glass units – Part 2: Long term test method and
the Relationship Between Fracture Stress and requirements for moisture penetration. CEN,
Mirror Size for Float Glass. Glass Technology, 2002.
24(5):263–273, 1983.
[105] EN 1279-3:2002. Glass in building – Insulating
[89] DuPont 2003. SentryGlas Plus – The Interlayer glass units – Part 3: Long term test method and
for Structural Laminated Glass. DuPont, 2003. requirements for gas leakage rate and for gas
[90] Dwivedi, P. and Green, D. J. Determination concentration tolerances. CEN, 2002.
of Subcritical Crack Growth Parameters by In [106] EN 1279-4:2002. Glass in building – Insulat-
Situ Observations of Identation Cracks. Journal ing glass units – Part 4: Methods of test for the
of the American Ceramic Society, 78(8):2122– physical attributes of edge seals. CEN, 2002.
2128, 1995.
[91] EN 1051-1:2003. Glass in building – Glass glass units – Part 5: Evaluation of conformity.
blocks and glass paver units – Part 1: Defini- CEN, 2005.
tions and description. CEN, 2003.

201
glass units – Part 6: Factory production control [124] EN 14321-2:2005. Glass in building – Ther-
and periodic tests. CEN, 2002. mally toughened alkaline earth silicate safety
[109] EN 1288-1:2000. Glass in building – Determi- glass – Part 2: Evaluation of conformity / Prod-
nation of the bending strength of glass – Part 1: uct standard. CEN, 2005.
Fundamentals of testing glass. CEN, 2000. [125] EN 14449:2005. Glass in building – Laminated
[110] EN 1288-2:2000. Glass in building – Determi- glass and laminated safety glass – Evaluation of
nation of the bending strength of glass – Part 2: conformity / Product standard. CEN, 2005.
Coaxial double ring test on flat specimens with [126] EN 1465:1995. EN 1465: Adhesives – Determi-
large test surface areas. CEN, 2000. nation of tensile lap-shear strength of rigid-to-
[111] EN 1288-3:2000. Glass in building – Determi- rigid bonded assemblies. CEN, 1995.
nation of the bending strength of glass – Part 3: [127] EN 1748-1-1:2004. Glass in building – Special
Test with specimen supported at two points (four basic products – Borosilicate glasses – Part 1-1:
point bending). CEN, 2000. Definitions and general physical and mechanical
[112] EN 1288-5:2000. Glass in building – Determi- properties. CEN, 2004.
nation of the bending strength of glass – Part 5: [128] EN 1748-1-2:2004. Glass in building – Special
Coaxial double ring test on flat specimens with basic products – Borosilicate glasses – Part 1-2:
small test surface areas. CEN, 2000. Evaluation of conformity / Product standard.
[113] EN 13024-1:2002. Glass in building – Ther- CEN, 2004.
mally toughened borosilicate safety glass – Part [129] EN 1748-2-1:2004. Glass in building – Special
1: Definition and description. CEN, 2002. basic products – Glass ceramics – Part 2-1 Def-
[114] EN 13024-2:2004. Glass in building – Ther- initions and general physical and mechanical
mally toughened borosilicate safety glass – Part properties. CEN, 2004.
2: Evaluation of conformity / Product standard. [130] EN 1748-2-2:2004. Glass in building – Special
CEN, 2004. basic products – Part 2-2: Glass ceramics – Eval-
[115] EN 13123-2:2004. Windows, doors, and shut- uation of conformity / Product standard. CEN,
ters – Explosion resistance – Requirements and 2004.
classification – Part 2: Range test. CEN, 2004. [131] EN 1863-1:2000. Glass in building – Heat
[116] EN 13124-1:2001. Windows, doors and shut- strengthened soda lime silicate glass – Part 1:
ters – Explosion resistance; Test method – Part Definition and description. CEN, 2000.
1: Shock tube. CEN, 2001. [132] EN 1863-2:2004. Glass in building – Heat
[117] EN 13124-2:2004. Windows, doors and shut- strengthened soda lime silicate glass – Part 2:
ters – Explosion resistance – Test method – Part Evaluation of conformity / Product standard.
2: Range test. CEN, 2004. CEN, 2004.
[118] EN 13541:2005. Glass in building – Security [133] EN 1990:2002. Grundlagen der Tragwerkspla-
glazing – Testing and classification of resistance nung. CEN, 2002.
against explosion pressure. CEN, 2005. [134] EN 1991-1-1:2002. Eurocode 1: Einwirkungen
[119] EN 14178-1:2004. Glass in building – Basic auf Tragwerke; Teil 1-1: Allgemeine Einwirkun-
alkaline earth silicate glass products – Part 1: gen auf Tragwerke. CEN, 2002.
Float glass. CEN, 2004. [135] EN 1991-1-7:2006. Eurocode 1. Actions on
[120] EN 14178-2:2004. Glass in building – Basic structures. General actions – Accidental actions.
alkaline earth silicate glass products – Part 2: CEN, 2006.
Evaluation of conformity / Product standard. [136] EN 1991-2-3:1996. Eurocode 1: Einwirkungen
CEN, 2004. auf Tragwerke; Teil 2-3: Schneelasten. CEN,
[121] EN 14179-1:2005. Glass in building – Heat 1996.
soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate [137] EN 1991-2-4:1995. Eurocode 1: Einwirkun-
safety glass – Part 1: Definition and description. gen auf Tragwerke; Teil 2-4: Windlasten. CEN,
CEN, 2005. December 1996.
[122] EN 14179-2:2005. Glass in building – Heat [138] EN 1991-2-5:1997. Eurocode 1: Einwirkungen
soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate auf Tragwerke; Teil 2-5: Temperatureinwirkun-
safety glass – Part 2: Evaluation of conformity / gen. CEN, January 1999.
Product standard. CEN, 2005. [139] EN 1991-2-7:1998. Eurocode 1: Einwirkun-
[123] EN 14321-1:2005. Glass in building – Ther- gen auf Tragwerke; Teil 2-7: Aussergewöhnliche
mally toughened alkaline earth silicate safety Einwirkungen. CEN, July 2000.
glass – Part 1: Definition and description. CEN, [140] EN 1993-1-1:1993. Eurocode 3: Bemessung
2005. und Konstruktion von Stahlbauten; Allgemeine

202 REFERENCES
Bemessungsregeln, Bemessungsregeln für den termination of creep behaviour. CEN, 2003.

Hochbau. CEN, January 1993. [159] EN ISO 9142:2004. EN ISO 9142: Adhesives –
[141] EN 1993-1-1:2005. Eurocode 3: Design of steel Guide to the selection of standard laboratory
structures – Part 1-1: General rules and rules ageing conditions for testing bonded joints. CEN,
for buildings. CEN, 2005. 2004.
[142] EN 2243:2006. EN 2243: Aerospace series – [160] Englhardt, O. and Bergmeister, K. Structural
Non-metallic materials – Structural adhesives – Behaviour of Plane Glass Surface Structures
Test method. CEN, 2006. Under Compression StressNumerical and Ex-
[143] EN 2667:1997. EN 2667: Aerospace series – perimental Investigation. In Proceedings of
Non-metallic materials; foaming structural ad- Glass Processing Days 2005, 17-20 June, Tam-
hesives, test methods. CEN, 1997. pere, Finland. 2005.
[144] EN 356:1999. Glass in building – Security [161] EOTA 1998. Leitlinie für die europäische technis-
glazing – Testing and classification of resistance che Zulassung für geklebte Glaskonstruktionen
against manual attack. CEN, 2000. (Structural Sealant Glazing Systems – SSGS).
ETAG Nr. 002 (Fassung Juli 1998), EOTA - Eu-
[145] EN 410:1998. Glass in building – Determination
ropean Organisation for Technical Approvals,
of luminous and solar characteristics of glazing.
Brüssel, 1998.
CEN, 1998.
[162] Evans, A. G. A General Approach for the Sta-
[146] EN 572-1:2004. Glass in building – Basic soda
tistical Analysis of Multiaxial Fracture. Journal
lime silicate glass products – Part 1: Definitions
of the American Ceramic Society, 61(7-8):302–
and general physical and mechanical properties.
308, 1978.
CEN, 2004.
[163] Evans, A. G. and Wiederhorn, S. M. Proof test-
ing of ceramic materials – an analytical basis
lime silicate glass products – Part 2: Float glass.
for failure prediction. International Journal of
CEN, 2004.
Fracture, 10(3):379–392, 1974.
[164] Exner, G. Erlaubte Biegespannung in
lime silicate glass products – Part 3: Polished
Glasbauteilen im Dauerlastfall: Ein
wire glass. CEN, 2004.
Vorhersagekonzept aus dynamischen Labor-
[149] EN 572-4:2004. Glass in building – Basic soda Festigkeitsmessungen. Glastechnische Berichte,
lime silicate glass products – Part 4: Drawn sheet 56(11):299–312, 1983.
glass. CEN, 2004.
[165] Exner, G. Abschätzung der erlaubten Bieges-
[150] EN 572-5:2004. Glass in building – Basic soda pannung in vorgespannten Glasbauteilen.
lime silicate glass products – Part 5: Patterned Glastechnische Berichte, 59(9):259–271, 1986.
glass. CEN, 2004.
[166] Faber, M. Risk and Safety in Civil Engineer-
[151] EN 572-6:2004. Glass in building – Basic soda ing. Lecture Notes, Swiss Federal Institute of
lime silicate glass products – Part 6: Wired pat- Technology ETH, Zürich, 2003.
terned glass. CEN, 2004.
[167] Fink, A. Ein Beitrag zum Einsatz von Float-
[152] EN 572-7:2004. Glass in building – Basic soda glas als dauerhaft tragender Konstruktionswerk-
lime silicate glass products – Part 7: Wired or stoff im Bauwesen. Ph.D. thesis, Technische
unwired channel shaped glass. CEN, 2004. Hochschule Darmstadt, 2000.
[153] EN 572-8:2004. Glass in building – Basic soda [168] Fischer-Cripps, A. C. and Collins, R. E. Archi-
lime silicate glass products – Part 8: Supplied tectural glazings: Design standards and failure
and final cut sizes. CEN, 2004. models. Building and Environment, 30(1):29–
[154] EN 572-9:2004. Glass in building – Basic soda 40, 1995.
lime silicate glass products – Part 9: Evaluation [169] Freund, L. B. Dynamic Fracture Mechanics.
of conformity / Product standard. CEN, 2004. Cambridge University Press, 1990. ISBN 0-
[155] EN 673:1997. Glass in building – Determination 521-30330-3.
of thermal transmittance (U value) – Calcula- [170] Gehrke, E., Ullner, C. and Hähnert, M. Ef-
tion method. CEN, 1997. fect of corrosive media on crack growth of
[156] EN ISO 291:2005. EN ISO 291: Plastics – Stan- model glasses and commercial silicate glasses.
dard atmospheres for conditioning and testing. Glastechnische Berichte, 63(9):255–265, 1990.
CEN, 2005. [171] Gehrke, E., Ullner, C. and Hähnert, M. Fa-
[157] EN ISO 527:1996. EN ISO 527: Plastics – De- tigue limit and crack arrest in alkali-containing
termination of tensile properties. CEN, 1996. silicate glasses. Journal of Materials Science,
[158] EN ISO 899:2003. EN ISO 899: Plastics – De- 26:5445–5455, 1991.

203
[172] Georg, A. A chemical solar eclipse in your tural Glass Elements – Analytical and numer-
window. Press Release, Fraunhofer-Institut für ical modelling, testing and design. Thèse EPFL
Solare Energiesysteme ISE, Freiburg, Germany, No 3671, Ecole polytechnique fédérale de Lau-
2002. sanne (EPFL), 2006. URL http://icom.epfl.ch/
[173] GGF 2000. Non-vertical overhead glazing: publications/pubinfo.php?pubid=561.
Guide to the selection of glass from the point [188] Haldimann, M. and Crisinel, M. Improving test-
of view of safety. Architecural glazing systems, ing procedures to obtain more reliable strength
Section 7, Glass & Glazing Federation, London, data for structural glass design. In Proceedings
2000. of Glass Processing Days 2007, 15-18 June, Tam-
[174] Glass Guide 2000. Glass Guide. Saint Gobain pere, Finland, 2007. 2007.
Glass UK, 2000. [189] Hamm, J. Tragverhalten von Holz und Holzw-
[175] GlassOnWeb. GlassOnWeb – Glass manual. erkstoffen im statischen Verbund mit Glas. Ph.D.
2006. URL http://www.glassonweb.com/ thesis, Ecole polytechnique fédérale de Lau-
glassmanual/. sanne (EPFL), Switzerland, 1999.
[176] Gough, M. and Yandzio, E. Protection of Build- [190] Hand, R. J. Stress intensity factors for surface
ings Against Explosions. The Steel Construction flaws in toughened glasses. Fatigue and Frac-
Institute, 1999. ISBN 1859420893. ture of Engineering Materials and Structures,
23(1):73–80, 2000.
[177] Green, D. J., Dwivedi, P. J. and Sglavo, V. M.
Characterization of subcritical crack growth [191] Harris, R., Lilly, R. and Willmott, T. A Consul-
in ceramics using indentation cracks. British tants Toolbox for Investigating Nickel Sulfide
Ceramic Transactions, 98(6):291–295, 1999. Failures in Toughened Glass. In Proceedings of
Glass Processing Days 2003, 15-18 June, Tam-
[178] Grenet, L. Mechanical Strength of Glass. Enc.
pere, Finland, pp. 680–682. 2003.
Industr. Nat. Paris, 5(4):838–848, 1899.
[192] Hess, R. Glasträger. Forschungsbericht des
[179] Griffith, A. A. The Phenomena of Rupture and
Instituts für Hochbautechnik, vdf Hochschul-
Flow in Solids. Philosophical Transactions, Se-
verlag AG der ETH Zürich, Zürich, 2000.
ries A, 221:163–198, 1920.
[193] Hilti HY-50 2003. Konstruktiver Glasbau mit
[180] GS-BAU-18:2001. Grundsätze für die Prüfung
Hilti Injektionsmörtel HIT-HY 50. Hilti Deutsch-
und Zertifizierung der bedingten Betretbarkeit
land GmbH, 2003.
oder Durchsturzsicherheit von Bauteilen bei
Bau- oder Instandhaltungsarbeiten (Prüfgrund- [194] Hirt, M. A. and Bez, R. Stahlbau: Grundbe-
sätze GS-BAU-18). Technical Report, Hauptver- griffe und Bemessungsverfahren. 1998.
band der gewerblichen Berufgenossenschaften [195] Hénaux, S. and Creuzet, F. Kinetic fracture
HVBG, February 2001. of glass at the nanometer scale. Journal of
[181] GSA 2003. GSA Standard Test Method for Glaz- Materials Science Letters, 16(12):1008–1011,
ing and Window Systems Subject to Dynamic 1997.
Overpressure Loadings. U.S. General Services [196] HomeOffice 2005. Design for Glazing protec-
Administration, 2003. tion. Guideline document with restricted avail-
[182] Güsgen, J. Bemessung tragender Bauteile aus ability, Home Office Scientific Development
Glas. Ph.D. thesis, RWTH Aachen / Shaker Branch, UK, 2005.
Verlag, 1998. [197] Hull, D. Fractography: Observing, Measur-
[183] Guin, J.-P. and Wiederhorn, S. Crack growth ing and Interpreting Fracture Surface Topogra-
threshold in soda lime silicate glass: role of phy. Cambridge University Press, 1999. ISBN
hold-time. Journal of Non-Crystalline Solids, 0521646847.
316(1):12–20, 2003. [198] IBC 2003. International Building Code (IBC).
[184] Gy, R. Stress corrosion of silicate glass: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2003. ISBN 1-892-
a review. Journal of Non-Crystalline Solids, 39556-8.
316(1):1–11, 2003. [199] Inglis, C. E. Stresses in a plate due to the pres-
[185] Habenicht, G. Kleben. Grundlagen, Technolo- ence of cracks and sharp corners. Transactions
gie, Anwendungen. Springer, Berlin, Germany, of the Institution of Naval Architects, 55(219),
1997. 1913.
[186] Hagl, A. Die Innovation – Kleben – Aktuelles [200] Interpane Glas Industrie AG 1997. Gestalten
aus der Arbeitsgruppe Kleben des Fachverban- mit Glas. 5. Auflage, Lauenförde, Interpane
des Konstruktiver Glasbau – FKG. Stahlbau, Glas Industrie AG, 1997.
75(6):508–520, 2006. [201] Irwin, G. Analysis of Stresses and Strains near
[187] Haldimann, M. Fracture Strength of Struc- the End of a Crack Traversing a Plate. Journal

204 REFERENCES
of Applied Mechanics, 24:361–364, 1957. Use of Adhesives. The Institution of Structural

[202] Irwin, G. R., Krafft, J. M., Paris, P. C. and Wells, Engineers, London, 1999.
A. A. Basic Aspects of Crack Growth and Frac- [219] Johar, S. Dynamic fatigue of flat glass – Phase
ture. NRL Report 6598, Naval Research Labo- II. Technical Report, Ontario Research Founda-
ratory, Washington D.C., 1967. tion. Department of Metals, Glass and Ceram-
[203] ISO 12543-1:1998. Glass in building – Lami- ics, Missisagua, Canada, 1981.
nated glass and laminated safety glass – Part 1: [220] Johar, S. Dynamic fatigue of flat glass – Phase
Definitions and description of component parts. III. Technical Report, Ontario Research Foun-
ISO, 1998. dation. Department of Metals, Glass and Ce-
[204] ISO 12543-2:2004. Glass in building – Lami- ramics, Missisagua, Canada, 1982.
nated glass and laminated safety glass – Part 2: [221] Johnson, N. International standards for blast
Laminated safety glass. ISO, 2004. resistant glazing. In Proceedings of Glass in
[205] ISO 12543-3:1998. Glass in building – Lami- Buildings 2, 7-8 April 2005, Centre for Win-
nated glass and laminated safety glass – Part 3: dow & Cladding Technology (CWCT), Bath, UK.
Laminated glass. ISO, 1998. 2005.
[206] ISO 12543-4:1998. Glass in building – Lami- [222] Kasper, R. Tragverhalten von Glasträgern. Ph.D.
nated glass and laminated safety glass – Part 4: thesis, RWTH Aachen / Shaker Verlag, 2005.
Test methods for durability. ISO, 1998. URL http://www.shaker.de/.
[207] ISO 12543-5:1998. Glass in building – Lami- [223] Keiller, A., Walker, A., Ledbetter, S. and Wol-
nated glass and laminated safety glass – Part 5: muth, W. Guidance on glazing at height. CIRIA
Dimensions and edge finishing. ISO, 1998. Publication C632, CIRIA, London, 2005.
[208] ISO 12543-6:1998. Glass in building – Lami- [224] Kerkhof, F. Bruchmechanik von Glas und
nated glass and laminated safety glass – Part 6: Keramik. Sprechsaal, 110:392–397, 1977.
Appearance. ISO, 1998. [225] Kerkhof, F., Richter, H. and Stahn, D. Festigkeit
[209] ISO 31-0:1992. Quantities and units – Part 0: von Glas – Zur Abhängigkeit von Belastungs-
General principles. ISO, 1992. dauer und -verlauf. Glastechnische Berichte,
54(8):265–277, 1981.
[210] ISO 31-0:1992/Amd.2:2005. Quantities and
units – Part 0: General principles – Amendment [226] Kinloch, A. Durability of Structural Adhesives.
2. ISO, 2005. Applied Science Publishers, London, 1983.
[211] ISO 31-11:1992. Quantities and units – Part [227] Knippers, J. and Peters, S. GFK-Glas-
11: Mathematical signs and symbols for use in Verbundsysteme, in Transluzente Materialien.
the physical sciences and technology. ISO, 1992. pp. 36–38, 2003.
[212] ISO 31-3:1992. Quantities and units – Part 3: [228] Ko, N., You, K. and Kim, Y. The effect of non-
Mechanics. ISO, 1992. gaussian local wind pressures on a side face of
a square building. Journal of Wind Engineering
[213] ISO 9047:2003. ISO 9047:2003, Building con-
and Industrial Aerodynamics, 93(5):383–397,
struction. Jointing products. Determination of
2005.
adhesion/cohesion properties of sealants at vari-
able temperatures. 2003. [229] Kott, A. Zum Trag- und Resttragverhalten von
Verbundsicherheitsglas. Ph.D. thesis, Eidgenös-
[214] ISO/DIS 16933:2004. Glass in building –
sische Technische Hochschule Zürich (ETH) -
Explosion-resistant security glazing – Test and
Institut für Baustatik und Konstruktion (IBK),
classification by arena air-blast loading. CEN,
Zurich, Switzerland, 2006.
2004.
[230] Kott, A. and Vogel, T. Safety of laminated glass
[215] ISO/DIS 16934:2004. Glass in building –
structures after initial failure. In Proceedings
Explosion-resistant security glazing – Test and
of the IABSE Symposium Shanghai, September
classification by shock tube loading. CEN, 2004.
22-24. 2004.
[216] IStructE 1995. The structural engineer’s re-
[231] Kreher, K. Tragverhalten und Bemessung von
sponse to blast loading. The Institution of
Holz-Glas-Verbundträgern unter Berücksichti-
Structural Engineers, London, November 1995.
gung der Eigenspannungen im Glas. Thèse EPFL
ISBN 1-874266-20-4.
2999, Ecole polytechnique fédérale de Lau-
[217] IStructE 1999. Structural use of glass in build- sanne (EPFL), 2004.
ings. The Institution of Structural Engineers,
[232] Kutterer, M. Verbundglasplatten – Schub-
London, December 1999. ISBN 1-874266-51-
verbund und Membrantragwirkung – Teil 1.
4.
Stahlbau, 74(1):39–46, January 2005.
[218] IStructE Adh 1999. Guide to the Structural
[233] Lampert, C. M. Chromogenic smart materials.

205
Materials Today, 7(3):28–35, 2004. engineering. Cambridge University Press, Cam-

[234] Laufs, W. 4. Forschungsbericht Fachverband Kon- bridge, 1992.
struktiver Glasbau, Arbeitskreis Punktgestützte [249] Mays, G. C. and Smith, P. D. Blast effects on
Gläser. Technical Report, Fachverband Kon- Buildings. Thomas Telford Publishers, 1995.
struktiver Glasbau, Arbeitskreis Punktgestützte ISBN 0727720309.
Gläser, Aachen, 2000. [250] McClelland, N. Not Just Glass Fins – MIT Brain
[235] Laufs, W. Ein Bemessungskonzept zur Festigkeit and Cognitive Science Project. In Proceedings
thermisch vorgespannter Gläser. Ph.D. thesis, of Glass Processing Days 2005, 17-20 June, Tam-
RWTH Aachen / Shaker Verlag, 2000. pere, Finland, pp. 480–484. 2005.
[236] Lawn, B. Fracture of brittle solids. Second [251] Menčík, J. Strength and Fracture of Glass and
Edition. Cambridge University Press, 1993. Ceramics, Glass Science and Technology, vol-
[237] Levengood, W. C. Effect of origin flaw charac- ume 12. Elsevier, 1992.
teristics on glass strength. Journal of Applied [252] Michalske, T. A. and Freiman, S. W. A Molecu-
Physics, 29(5):820–826, 1958. lar Mechanism for Stress Corrosion in Vitreous
[238] Lindner, J. and Holberndt, T. Zum Nachweis Silica. Journal of the American Ceramic Society,
von stabilitätsgefährdeten Glasträgern unter 66(4):284–288, 1983.
Biegebeanspruchung. Stahlbau, 75(6):488– [253] Montgomery, D. C. and Runger, G. C. ????
498, 2006. [254] Mott, N. F. Brittle fracture in mild steel plates.
[239] Lotz, S. Untersuchung zur Festigkeit und Engineering, 165(16), 1948.
Langzeitbeständigkeit adhäsiver Verbindungen [255] Neugebauer, J. A Special Fixation With Which
zwischen Fügepartnern aus Floatglas. Ph.D. The Broken Laminated Safety Glass Is Prevent
thesis, Universität Kaiserslautern, Fachbereich From Falling Down. In Proceedings of Glass
Maschinenwesen, 1995. Processing Days 2005, 17-20 June, Tampere,
[240] Luible, A. Lasteinleitungsversuche in Glaskan- Finland, pp. 105–109. 2005.
ten. Rapport ICOM 463, Ecole polytechnique [256] Nghiem, B. Fracture du verre et heterogeneites
fédérale de Lausanne (EPFL), 2004. a l’echelle sub-micronique. Ph.D Thesis Nr 98
[241] Luible, A. Stabilität von Tragelementen aus PA06 6260, Université Paris-VI, 1998.
Glas. Thèse EPFL 3014, Ecole polytech- [257] Niedermaier, P. Shear strength of glass panel
nique fédérale de Lausanne (EPFL), 2004. elements in combination with timber frame
URL http://icom.epfl.ch/publications/pubinfo. constructions. In Proceedings of Glass Process-
php?pubid=499. ing Days 2003, 15-18 June, Tampere, Finland,
[242] Luible, A. and Crisinel, M. Buckling Strength of pp. 262–264. 2003.
Glass Elements in Compression. Structural En- [258] Noon, R. K. Forensic Engineering Investigation.
gineering International, 14(2):120–125, 2004. CRC Press, 2001. ISBN 0849309115.
[243] Luible, A. and Crisinel, M. Plate Buckling of [259] Oakley, D. R. Crack branching in float glass
Glass Panels. In Proceedings of Glass Processing subjected to biaxial loading. Journal of Non-
Days 2005, 17-20 June, Tampere, Finland, pp. Crystalline Solids, 196:139–143, 1996.
476–479. 2005.
[260] Overend, M. The Appraisal of Structural Glass
[244] Luible, A. and Crisinel, M. Lateral Torsional Assemblies. Ph.D. thesis, University of Surrey,
Buckling of Glass Beams. In Proceedings of March 2002.
the 11th International Conference on Metal
[261] Overend, M. Optimising connections in struc-
Structures (ICMS’2006), 14-16 June, Rzeszow,
tural glass. In Proceedings of Glass in Build-
Poland. 2006.
ings 2, 7-8 April 2005. Centre for Window &
[245] Maniatis, I. Numerical and Experimental Investi- Cladding Technology (CWCT), Bath, UK, 2005.
gations on the Stress Distribution of Bolted Glass
[262] Overend, M., De Gaetano, S. and Haldimann,
Connections under In-Plane Loads. Ph.D. thesis,
M. Diagnostic Interpretation of Glass Fail-
Technische Universität München (TUM), 2006.
ure. Structural Engineering International SEI,
[246] Marlière, C., Prades, S., Célarié, F., Dalmas, D., 17(2):151–158, 2007.
Bonamy, D., Guillot, C. and Bouchaud, E. Crack
[263] Overend, M. and Koumpli, E. Smart Trans-
fronts and damage in glass at the nanometre
parency – The use of chromogenic switchable
scale. Journal of Physics: Condensed Matter,
glazing in responsive facades. In International
15:2377–2386, 2003.
Conference on "Transparency and Architecture:
[247] Matlab Doc 2005. Documentation for Matlab Challenging the Limits", Thessaloniki, Greece.
7.1. The MathWorks, Inc., 2005. 2006.
[248] Mays, G. and Hutchinson, A. Adhesives in civil [264] Overend, M., Vassallo, C. and Camillieri, K.

206 REFERENCES
The Design, Assembly & Performance of Glass [279] Raicu, A. and Wilson, H. R. Enhanced Energy
Columns. In Proceedings of Glass Processing Savings in Buildings with Thermotropic Protec-
Days 2005, 17-20 June, Tampere, Finland, pp. tion Against Overheating. In EuroSun ’96, pp.
287–291. 2005. 1297–1302. International Solar Energy society,
[265] Overend, M. and Zammit, K. Wind loading Freiburg, Germany, 1996.
on cladding and glazed façades. In Proceed- [280] Röder, T. Klebstoffkonstruktionen in
ings of the 2nd International Symposium on the Verbindung mit Kfz-Verglasung. In 4.
Application of Architectural Glass ISAAG 2006, Fachkongress Innovatives Bauen mit Glas.
Munich, Germany. 2006. Bauzentrum München, 1996.
[266] Palumbo, D., Palumbo, M. and Mazzucchelli, [281] Reed, D. A. and Bradt, R. C. Fracture Mirror-
M. A new roof for the XIIIth Century Loggia de Failure Stress Relations in Weathered and Un-
Vicari based on structural glass trusses. A case weathered Window Glass Panels. Journal of the
study. In Proceedings of Glass Processing Days American Ceramic Society, 67(11):C227–C229,
2005, 17-20 June, Tampere, Finland. 2005. 1984.
[267] Panait, A. Etude expérimentale et numérique des [282] Reid, S. G. Flaws in the failure prediction
problèemes de contact unilatéral et de frottement model of glass strength. In Proceedings of the
sec dans les assemblages verriers. Ph.D. thesis, 6th Intemational Conference on Applications of
Université de Marne-la-Vallée, France, 2004. Statistics and Probability in Civil Engineering,
[268] PBS-BSTW. Public Buildings Service – Build- Mexico City, pp. 111–117. 1991.
ing Security Technology Website. 2006. URL [283] Reid, S. G. Model Errors in the Failure Pre-
http://www.oca.gsa.gov/. diction Model of Glass Strength. In 8th ASCE
[269] Petzold, A., Marusch, H. and Schramm, B. Specialty Conference on Probabilistic Mechan-
Der Baustoff Glas: Grundlagen, Eigenschaften, ics and Structural Reliability, Alberta, Canada.
Erzeugnisse, Glasbauelemente, Anwendungen. 3. 2000.
Aufl. Verlag Karl Hofmann, Schorndorf, 1990. [284] Richter, H. Experimentelle Untersuchun-
ISBN 3-7780-1181-2. gen zur Rissausbreitung in Spiegelglas im
[270] Pilkey, W. D. Peterson’s Stress Concentration Geschwindigkeitsbereich 10E-3 bis 5 10E3 mm/s.
Factors. 2nd Edition. Wiley, New York, 1997. Ph.D. thesis, Institut für Festkörpermechanik
ISBN 0471538493. Freiburg, 1974.
[271] Pilkington Planar 2005. Pilkington Planar. [285] Ritter, J. E., Service, T. H. and Guillemet, C.
Product documentation, W&W Glass, USA, Strength an fatigue parameters for soda-lime
2005. URL http://www.wwglass.com/pdf/ glass. Glass Technology, 26(6):273–278, De-
2005Catalog.pdf. cember 1985.
[272] Pilkington Rec. Design of Glass – Recommen- [286] Roik, K., Carl, J. and Lindner, J. Biegetorsion-
dations for the design of glass, -. Pilkington sprobleme gerader dünnwandiger Stäbe. Ernst
UK Ltd, Undated. & Sohn, Berlin, 1972.
[273] Pilkington TechDoc. Pilkington – Technical [287] Ruttert, D. Bestimmung des mechanischen
documentation. 2006. URL http://www. Verhaltens von Klebstoffen im Zugscherversuch
pilkington.com/. unter Kurz- und Langzeitbeanspruchung. VDI
Berichte, Reihe 5, Universität für Bodenkultur,
[274] Porter, M. Aspects of Structural Design with
Wien, Austria, 1990.
Glass. Ph.D. thesis, University of Oxford, 2001.
[288] Saint-Gobain. Saint-Gobain website. 2006.
[275] prEN 13474-1:1999. Glass in building – Design
URL http://www.saint-gobain-glass.com/.
of glass panes – Part 1: General basis of design.
CEN, 1999. [289] Sanderson, K. D., Hurst, S., McKittrick, T., Rim-
mer, D. and Ye, L. Photocatalytic Coatings for
[276] prEN 13474-2:2000. Glass in building – Design
Self Cleaning Glass. In Proceedings of Glass
of glass panes – Part 2: Design for uniformly
Processing Days 2003, 15-18 June, Tampere,
distributed load. CEN, 2000.
Finland, pp. 321–325. 2003.
[277] Pye, A. J. The Structural Performance of Glass-
[290] Schlimmer, M. Zeitabhängiges mechanisches
Adhesive T-Beams. Ph.D. thesis, University of
Werkstoffverhalten. Springer, Berlin, Germany,
Bath, 1998.
1984.
[278] Quinn, J. B. Extrapolation of Fracture Mirror
[291] Schmitt, R. W. Entwicklung eines Prüfver-
and Crack-Branch Sizes to Large Dimensions in
fahrens zur Ermittlung der Biegefestigkeit von
Biaxial Strength Tests of Glass. Journal of the
Glas und Aspekte der statistischen Behandlung
American Ceramic Society, 82(8):2126–2158,
der gewonnenen Messwerte. Ph.D. thesis, RWTH
1999.
Aachen, 1987.

207
[292] Schneider, J. Festigkeit und Bemessung punkt- [305] Shelby, J. E. Introduction to glass science and
gelagerter Gläser und stossbeanspruchter Gläser. technology. Cambridge: Royal Society of Chem-
Ph.D. thesis, TU Darmstadt, Institut für Statik, istry, 1997. ISBN 0-85404-533-3.
2001. [306] Shen, X. Entwicklung eines Bemessungs- und
[293] Schneider, J. and Wörner, J. Glass Strength of Sicherheitskonzeptes für den Glasbau. Ph.D. the-
Annealed and Tempered structural glass in the sis, Technische Hochschule Darmstadt, 1997.
area of drilled holes. In Proceedings of Glass [307] Shetty, D. K., Rosenfield, A. R. and Duckworth,
Processing Days 2001, 18-21 June, Tampere, W. H. Crack Branching in Ceramic Disks Sub-
Finland. 2001. jected to Biaxial Flexure. Journal of the Ameri-
[294] Schober, H. Freeform Glass Structures. In Pro- can Ceramic Society, 66(1):C10–C12, 1983.
ceedings of Glass Processing Days 2003, 15-18 [308] SIA 260:2003 (e). SIA 260: Basis of struc-
June, Tampere, Finland, pp. 46–50. 2003. tural design. Schweizerischer Ingenieur- und
[295] Scott Norville, H., Harvill, N., Conrath, E. J., Architektenverein, Zürich, 2003.
Shariat, S. and Mallonee, S. Glass-related in- [309] SIA 261:2003 (e). SIA 261: Actions on Struc-
juries in Oklahoma city bombing. Journal of tures. Schweizerischer Ingenieur- und Architek-
Performance of Constructed Facilities, pp. 50–56, tenverein, Zürich, 2003.
May 1999.
[310] Siebert, B. Beitrag zur Berechnung punktgehal-
[296] SecurityService 2006. Protecting against tener Gläser. Ph.D. thesis, Technische Univer-
terrorism. On-line document published by sität Müchen (TUM), 2004.
the UK security service MI5, 2006. URL
[311] Siebert, G. Beitrag zum Einsatz von Glas als tra-
http://www.ukresilience.info/publications/
gendes Bauteil im konstruktiven Ingenieurbau.
protecting.pdf.
Ph.D. thesis, Technische Universität München
[297] Sedlacek, G., Blank, K., Laufs, W. and Güsgen, (TUM), 1999.
J. Glas im Konstruktiven Ingenieurbau. Ernst &
[312] Siebert G., R. W. New Generation of Point
Sohn, Berlin, 1999. ISBN 3-433-01745-X.
Fixings – Architecture and Safety Aspects. In
[298] Sglavo, V., Gadotti, M. and Micheletti, T. Cyclic Proceedings of Glass Processing Days 2005, 17-
loading behaviour of soda lime silicate glass 20 June, Tampere, Finland, pp. 530–533. 2005.
using indentation cracks. Fatigue and Frac-
[313] Simiu, E., Reed, A., Yancey, C. W. C., Martin,
ture of Engineering Materials and Structures,
J. W., Hendrickson, E. M., Gonzalez, A. C.,
20(8):1225–1234, 1997.
Koike, M., Lechner, J. A. and Batts, M. E. Ring-
[299] Sglavo, V., Prezzi, A. and Zandonella, T. En- on-ring tests and load capacity of cladding glass.
gineered stress-profile silicate glass: High NBS Building Science Series 162, U.S. Depart-
strength material insensitive to surface defects ment of Commerce - National Bureau of Stan-
and fatigue. Advanced Engineering Materials, dards, 1984.
6(5):344–349, 2004.
[314] Smith, D. Glazing for injury alleviation under
[300] Sglavo, V. M. ESP (Engineered Stress Profile) blast loading – UK Practice. In Proceedings of
Glass: High Strength Material, Insensitive to Glass Processing Days 2001, 18-21 June, Tam-
Surface Defects. In Proceedings of Glass Process- pere, Finland. 2001.
ing Days 2003, 15-18 June, Tampere, Finland,
[315] Sobek W., B. L. Konstruktive Verklebungen
pp. 74–77. 2003.
– Prototyp einer Glasschale, in Transluzente
[301] Sglavo, V. M. and Green, D. J. Subcritical Materialien. pp. 30–32, 2003.
growth of indentation median cracks in soda-
[316] Stamm, K. and Witte, H. Sandwichkonstruk-
lime-silica glass. Journal of the American Ce-
tionen – Berechnung, Fertigung, Ausführung.
ramic Society, 78(3):650–656, 1995.
Springer Verlag, 1974.
[302] Sglavo, V. M. and Green, D. J. Indentation fa-
[317] Stavrinidis, B. and Holloway, D. G. Crack heal-
tigue testing of soda-lime silicate glass. Journal
ing in Glass. Physics and Chemistry of Glasses,
of Materials Science, 34(3):579–585, 1999.
24(1):19–25, 1983.
[303] Shand, E. B. Experimental Study of Fracture
[318] Szilard, R. Theory and analysis of plates: classi-
of Glass: II, Experimental Data. Journal of
cal and numerical methods. Prentice Hall, 1974.
the American Ceramic Society, 37(12):559–572,
ISBN 0-13-913426-3.
1954.
[319] Timoshenko, S. P. and Gere, J. M. Theory of
[304] Shand, E. B. Breaking Stress of Glass De-
elastic Stability. Second Edition. McGraw-Hill,
termined from Dimensions of Fracture Mir-
New York, 1961.
rors. Journal of the American Ceramic Society,
42(10):474–477, 1959. [320] todo. todo. 2007.
[321] Tomozawa, M. Stress corrosion reaction of sil-

208 REFERENCES
ica glass and water. Physics and Chemistry of [334] Wellershoff, F. and Sedlacek, G. Stabilization of
Glasses, 39(2):65–69, 1998. Building Envelopes with the use of the Glazing.
[322] TRAV 2003. Technische Regeln für die Ver- In Proceedings of Glass Processing Days 2005,
wendung von absturzsichernden Verglasungen 17-20 June, Tampere, Finland. 2005.
(TRAV). Technical Report, Deutsches Institut [335] Wiederhorn, S., Dretzke, A. and Rödel, J.
für Bautechnik (DIBt), January 2003. Crack growth in soda-lime-silicate glass near
[323] TRLV 1998. Technische Regeln für die Ver- the static fatigue limit. Journal of the American
wendung von linienförmig gelagerten Verglasun- Ceramic Society, 85(9):2287–2292, 2002.
gen (TRLV). Technical Report, Mitteilungen [336] Wiederhorn, S. and Tornsend, P. Crack heal-
des Deutschen Instituts für Bautechnik (DIBt), ing in Glass. Journal of the American Ceramic
Berlin, 1998. Society, 53:486–489, 1970.
[324] Ullner, C. Untersuchungen zum Festigkeitsver- [337] Wiederhorn, S. M. Influence of Water Vapor on
halten von Kalk-Natronsilicatglas nach mecha- Crack Propagation in Soda-Lime Glass. Journal
nischer Vorschädigung durch Korundberieselung. of the American Ceramic Society, 50:407–414,
Technical Report, BAM, Berlin, 1993. 1967.
[325] Ullner, C. and Höhne, L. Untersuchungen zum [338] Wiederhorn, S. M. and Bolz, L. H. Stress cor-
Festigkeitsverhalten und zur Rissalterung von rosion and static fatigue of glass. Journal of
Glas unter dem Einfluss korrosiver Umgebungs- the American Ceramic Society, 53(10):543–548,
bedingungen. Technical Report, BAM, Berlin, 1970.
1993. [339] Wiederhorn, S. M., Dretzke, A. and Rödel, J.
[326] Vallabhan, C. V. G. Iterative Analysis of Non- Near the static fatigue limit in glass. Interna-
linear Glass Plates. Journal of Structural Engi- tional Journal of Fracture, 121(1-2):1–7, 2003.
neering, 109(2):489–502, 1983. [340] Wigginton, M. Glass in Architecture. Phaidon
[327] Vallabhan, C. V. G., Asik, M. Z. and Kandil, K. Press Ltd, London, 1996. ISBN 07-148-2922-6.
Analysis of structural glazing systems. Comput- [341] Wigginton, M. and Harris, J. Intelligent Skins.
ers & Structures, 65(2):231–239, 1997. Architectural Press, 2002. ISBN 0750648473.
[328] Vallabhan, C. V. G., Das, Y. C. and Ramasamu- [342] Wikipedia. Wikipedia – The Free Encyclopedia.
dra, M. Parametric Study of Axisymmetric 2006. URL http://www.wikipedia.org/.
Circular-Glass Plates. Journal of Structural En-
[343] Wörner, J.-D., Schneider, J. and Fink, A. Glas-
gineering, 120, No. 5:1663–1671, 1994.
bau: Grundlagen, Berechnung, Konstruktion.
[329] Van Duser, A., Jagota, A. and Bennison, S. Anal- Springer Verlag, 2001. ISBN 3-540-66881-0.
ysis of Glass/Polyvinyl Butyral Laminates Sub-
[344] www.weibull.com. On-line Reliability Engi-
jected to Uniform Pressure. Journal of engi-
neering Resources. 2006. URL http://www.
neering mechanics, 125:435–442, 1999.
weibull.com/.
[330] Walker, G. R. and Muir, L. M. An Investigation
[345] Young, W. C. and Budynas, R. G. Formulas for
of the Bending Strength of Glass Louvre Blades.
Stress and Strain. McGraw-Hill Publishing Co.,
In Proceedings of the 9th Australian Conference
2002. ISBN 0-071-21059-8.
on the Mechanics of Structures and Materials,
Sydney, Australia. 1984. [346] Zenkert, D. The Handbook of Sandwich Con-
struction. Engineering Materials Advisory Ser-
[331] Weibull, W. A Statistical Theory of the Strength
vice Ltd., United Kingdom, 1997.
of Materials. Ingeniors Vetenskaps Akademien
(Proceedings of the Royal Swedish Academy of [347] Zienkiewicz, O. C. and Taylor, R. L. The Finite
Engineering), 151, 1939. Element Method Set (3 volumes). Butterworth-
Heinemann, 2005. ISBN 0-750-66431-2.
[332] Weibull, W. A Statistical Distribution Function
of Wide Applicability. Journal of Applied Me- [348] ZTV-Lsw 88. Zusätzliche Technische Vorschriften
chanics, 18:293–297, September 1951. und Richtlinien für die Ausführung von Lärm-
schutzwänden an Strassen (Additional technical
[333] Wellershoff, F. Nutzung der Verglasung zur
rules for sound screens near roads). Mit Än-
Aussteifung von Gebäudehüllen. Ph.D. thesis,
derungen und Ergänzungen 1992, Verkehrs-
RWTH Aachen / Shaker Verlag, 2006.
blatt Verlag, Dortmund, 1988.

Index
4PB, 176 ageing tests, 182 biaxial stress correction factor, 96,
aging, 52 106
abhesive, 181 air infiltration, 182 biaxial stress field, 64
abrasion, 17 air side, 182 bifurcation buckling, 107, 182
abrasion (decorative glass), 181 air side (of glass), 2 bite, 182
abrasion (general), 181 alkali, 182 blast-resistant glass, 15
absolute humidity, 181 alkali leaching, 52 blocks, 182
accelerated ageing, 181 allowable stress, 86 body-tinted glass, see tinted glass
accelerated weathering, 181 ambient noise, 182 bolted connection, 145
accepted risk, 29 ambient strength data, 78, 138 bolted connections
acid etching, 16, 181 ambient temperature, 182 performance, 146
acoustical double glazing, 181 ambient testing, 135 recommendations, 146
acrylate resins, 181 ANG, 176 scheme design, 150
acrylic, 181 annealed glass, 10 bolted support, 145
acrylics, 158 annealing, 2, 182 bomb blast, 35, 156
action, 181 antiwalk blocks, 182 bond (noun), 182
action history, 181 art glass, 182 bond (verb), 182
action history effect, 103 artificially induced damage, 182 bond breaker, 183
action intensity, 181 artificially induced surface dam- bond strength, 183
active chromogenics, 19 age, 182 bonding agents, 183
active solar heat gain, 181 as-received glass, 182 borosilicate glass, 4
adduct, 181 aspect ratio, 182 boundary conditions, 109
adhere, 181 ASTM E 1300, 97 bow, 183
adhesion, 181 attenuation, 182 breather tube, 183
adhesion failure, 181 autoclave, 182 bronze glass, 183
adhesive, 152 average refractive index, 7 Brown’s integral, see risk integral,
limit state design, 160 see risk integral
mechanical behaviour, 153 BSG, 176
performance, 158 back-fill, 182 buckling, 183
adhesive connection bait, 182 buckling curve, 120, 126, 183
pretensioned, 164 bandage joint, 182 buckling diagram, 127
rigid, 152 batch, 182 buckling length, 111
soft elastic, 152 bead, 182 bull’s eye, 183
adhesive setting, 181 bent glass, see curved glass, 182 bullet-resistant glass, 15
adsorption, 182 beta distribution, 193 bullet-resistant glazing, 183
ageing, 182 bevel or compound bead, 182 butt glazing, 183
ageing resistance, 182 bevelling, 182 butt joint, 183
209
210 INDEX
butyl rubber, 183 crack tip blunting, 52 elastomer, 152, 184

crack velocity, 51 electrochromic glazing, 21
CAN/CGSB 12.20-M89, 99 crack velocity parameter, 51 elongation, 184
cast glass, 3 creep effects, 111, 112 emissivity, 7, 184
cast process, 3 critical buckling load, 122 emittance, 184
CDF, 176 critical crack depth, 58, 63 empirical cumulative distribution
CDR, 176 critical stress, 58 function, 193
centrifuging process, 3 critical stress intensity factor, see empirical probability of failure,
ceramic frit colour, 17 fracture toughness 193
chain polymerization, 183 cullet, 184 enamel, 184
channel, 183 cure, 184 enamelled glass, 17, 184
channel glazing, 183 curtain walling, 184 energy absorptance, 185
characteristic crack propagation curved glass, 16, 184 energy reflectance (RE), 185
speed, 51 energy release rate, 56
chemical composition, 4, 53 damping, 184 environmental fatigue, 50
chemical resistance, 183 Danner process, 3 EPDM, 142, 146, 185
chemical vapour deposition, 18 decompressed surface, 104, 184 epoxies, 158
chemically strengthened glass, 183 defect, 184 equibiaxial stress field, 75, 106,
chromogenics, 184 deflection, 184 185
clamped fixing, 143 deformation, 184 equivalent t 0 -second uniform
clips, 183 degradation, 184 stress on the unit sur-
coating, 183 dehydration, 184 face area, 67
coaxial double ring test, 75 delaminate, 184 equivalent area, 68
coefficient of expansion, 183 delamination, 184 equivalent bending stiffness, 115
coefficient of thermal expansion, 7 DELR design method, 88 equivalent reference stress, 67
coefficient of variation (CoV), 183 density, 7 equivalent representative stress,
cohesive failure, 183 desiccants, 184 68, 69
cold resistant, 183 design, see structural design equivalent resistance, 61
colour cast glass, 183 design flaw, 131, 133, 138 equivalent stress, 61
column buckling, 108, 110, 183 design life, 184 equivalent thickness, 111
column buckling models, 110 design method of damage equiv- equivalent torsional stiffness, 116
computing time, 183 alent load and resis- equivalent uniformly distributed
concentric ring-on-ring test, see tance, see DELR design stress, 66
coaxial double ring method estimator, 193
test dew point, 184 European design methods, 101
condensation, 183 diamond cutter, 80 expectation value, 193
conduction, 183 dichroic glass, 24 exposed glass elements, 40
consistency, 184 dimensionless stress distribution exposed surface, 133
constant load rate loading, 184 function, 68 exterior glazed, 185
constant load rate testing, 75 dip coating, 18 exterior stop, 185
constant stress rate loading, 184 direct crack growth measurement, extruded, 185
constant stress rate testing, 75 74
convection, 184 discoloration, 184 fabric embeds, 162
corrosive media, 53 double glazing, double-glazed face, 185
countersunk fixing, 163 units, 184 failure probability, 63
crack, 55, 184 drawing tower, 184 fatigue limit, see crack growth
crack branching, 71 dual sealed system, 184 threshold
crack depth, 55 duration-of-load effect, see load du- FE, 176
crack depth at failure, 59 ration effect finite element analysis, 41
crack front, 55 dynamic fatigue test, 75 fire protection glass, 9, 15
crack growth limit, see crack dynamic viscosity, 7 flat glass, 185
growth threshold flaw, 185
crack growth threshold, 52 edge clearance, 184 float glass, 185
crack healing, 52, 104 edge joint, 184 float process, 2
crack length, 55 edge strength, 80 fogged unit, 185
crack opening stress, 57, 68 effective area, see equivalent area forming, 185
crack orientation, 64 effective nominal flaw depth, 184 four point bending test, 75, 76
crack repropagation, 52 elastic critical buckling load, 110 fracture pattern, 10, 125
crack tip, 55 elasticity, 184 fracture strength, 57

211
fracture toughness, 51, 57 IGU, see insulating glass unit linearly supported glazing, 142
friction-grip connection, 143 immersion, 186 liquid crystal glazing, 21
front putty, 185 impact, 186 lite, 186
frost point, 185 impact loads, 35 load duration effect, 103, 104
frosted glass, 16, 185 impact strength, 186 load duration factor, 186
FTG, 176 in-plane loading, 107 load shape, 187
fully tempered glass, 10, 11, 57, in-plane principal stress, see princi- loading rate, 53
185 pal stress loading time, 187
furnace, 2 indentation flaws, 74 log-normal distribution, 105, 192
inert failure probability, 63 long, straight-fronted plane edge
g, 185 inert fatigue, 50 crack, 78
gas-filled units, 185 inert strength, 58 long-term loading, 133
gasket, 185 inert testing, 135 low emissivity coating (low-e coat-
gasochromic glazing, 22 infill panel, 186 ing), 187
geometric non-linearity, 40 inherent strength, 57, 91, 102, low iron glass, 6, 187
geometry factor, 56, 77 104, 186 low-emissivity (low-e) coating, 18
GFPM, see glass failure prediction initial crack depth, 59
model initial deformation, 109 magnetron sputtering, 18
glass, 4, 185 initial imperfection, 125 maximum likelihood method, 194
glass beam, 115, 117 injection mortar, 143 mean rank, 193
glass connections, 141 ink-jet printing, 17 mechanical fixings, 142
glass corner, 143 inner pane, 186 median, 194
glass edge, 80, 143 inspection, 134 median rank, 194
glass edges, 78 insulating glass unit, 9, 15 melting temperature, 4
glass failure prediction model, 96 insulating glass unit (IGU), 186 metal spacers, 187
glass fibres, 8 intaglio, 186 metal-to-glass adhesive, 164
glass fin, 115 integrity, 186 method of moments, 195
glass pane, 9 interior glazed, 186 mode I, 187
glass products, 9 interior muntins, 186 momentary critical crack depth, 65
glass profiles, 3 interior stop, 186 monotonously increasing, 187
glass thickness, 109 interlayer, 186 mullion, 187
glass tubes, 3 intermediate materials, 142 multiple-glazed units, 187
glass type, 11 internal pressure loads, 38 muntin, 187
glass type factor, 97 intumescence, 186
glass unit, 9 IPP, 176 near-inert conditions, 59
glazing, 185 Irwin’s fracture criterion, 57 neoprene, 187
glazing bead, 185 neoprene gasket, 142
glazing beads, 142 joint, 186 nickel sulfide inclusion, 187
glazing channel, 185 non-exposed surfaces, 135
glue, 185 Knoop hardness, 7 non-factored load, 97
glued connection, 151 non-uniform stress field, 64, 187
greenhouse effect, 6 laminated glass, 9, 110, 186 normal distribution, 105, 192
greenhouse glass, 185 lap joint, 186 North American design methods,
guarding, 185 lateral load, 186 101
lateral torsional buckling, 108, numerical stability analysis, 117
hard coatings, 18 115, 186
hardness, 186 least squares method, 194 off-line coating, see sputtered coat-
hazard scenario, 28 LEFM, see linear elastic fracture ing
heat strengthened glass, 10, 12, mechanics, 176 on-line coating, see pyrolytic coat-
57, 186 lehr, 2, 186 ing
heat treated glass, 57, 186 lifetime, 59 one-component silicone, 155
heat-absorbing glass, 186 lifetime prediction model, 49 opaline glass, 187
heat-soak test (HST), 186 light emitting diodes, 23 opaque glass, 187
heel bead, 186 light reducing glass, 186 optical properties, 6
holes, 78 light reflectance, 186 optical quality, 13
homogeneous, 186 light transmittance, 186 ornamental glass, 187
HSG, 176 linear elastic fracture mechanics, Orowan stress, 55
humidity, 53 55 outer pane, 187
hysteresis effect, 52 linear supports, 142 overall heat transfer coefficient, 16

212 INDEX
pane (of glass), 187 residual stress, 104, 188 spall, 189
Pareto distribution, 63, 192 residual surface stress, 57, 81 spandrel, spandrel panel, 189
passive chromogenics, 19 resin laminate, 188 specific thermal capacity, 7
passive solar heat gain, 187 rheology, 188 sputtered coating, 189
patterned glass, 17, 187 rigid adhesive connection, 158 SSF, see single surface flaw, 176
peeling, 187 rigidity, 188 SSG, 189
permanent set, 187 risk analysis, 28 SSGS, 155, 189
permeability, 187 risk integral, 59, 103 stability, 107, 189
permeance, 187 rolled glass, 3 starved joint, 189
pH value, 53 rollerwave, 188 static fatigue, 50
photochromic glazing, 19 RSFP, see random surface flaw pop- static fatigue test, 75
photovoltaic glass, 24 ulation, 176 static long-term tests, 75
physical properties, 6 stepped-edge unit, 189
Pilkington Brothers, 2 safe countersunk fixing, 163 stop, 189
plastics, 187 safety glass, 10 strength, 189
plate buckling, 108, 122, 187 sandblasting, 16, 188 stress corrosion, 50
point estimate, 195 sandpaper scratching, 78 stress corrosion limit, see crack
point supports, 149 sash, 188 growth threshold
points, 187 scale parameter, 63, 76 stress distribution function, see di-
Poisson distribution, 193 SCG, 176 mensionless stress dis-
Poisson’s ratio, 7 score side, 188 tribution function
polyvinyl butyral, see PVB screen printed glass, 17, 188 stress intensity factor, 51, 56
POM, 146, 187 sealant, 188 stress rate, 189
post buckling capacity, 122, 124 sealants (for insulating glass structural design, 66, 189
post-breakage structural capacity, units), 188 structural glazing, 189
168 secondary seal, 188 structural sealant glazing, 189
potash, 187 seismic load, 35 structural silicone sealant connec-
predictive modelling, 187 self cleaning glass, 23 tions, 155
prEN 13474, 90 self-fatigue, 12 subcritical crack growth, 50, 65
primary seal, 187 service situation, 28 sunlight, 189
primer, 187 setting, 188 supercooled, 189
priming, 188 setting blocks, 188 supply rate, 51
profile glass, 188 severe damage, 40, 133 surface condition parameters, 136
protective glazing, 156 shading coefficient, 188 surface crack, 55
purlins, 188 shape parameter, 63, 76 surface damage, 40
PV, see photovoltaic glass Shen, 92 surface damage hazard scenario,
PVB, 109, 176, 188 short-term loading, 134 28, 31
pyrolytic coating, 18, 188 SIF, 176 surface decompression, 58
silica, 188 survival probability, 63
quality control, 134 silicates, 188 suspended particle glazing, 21
quarter circle crack, 78 silicone seal, 188
silvering, 189 tank, 189
R-value, 188 single surface flaw, 131, 133 target failure probability, 64, 66,
R400 test setup, 76 size effect, 64, 104 67
radiation, 188 skylight, 189 temperature, 53
rafters, 188 slenderness ratio, 113, 127, 189 tempered glass, 189
random surface flaw population, sloped glazing, 189 tempering, 9
62, 131, 132 slow crack growth, 50 chemical, 12
random variable, 193 SLSG, 176 thermal, 11
rebate, 188 soda lime silica glass, 4 tensile strength, 8, 189
reduction factor, 120, 126 soft coatings, 18 tensile strength ratio, 70
reference ambient strength, 67 solar control coating, 18, 189 testing, 135
reference inert strength, 64 solar energy absorption, 189 thermal break, 190
reference time period, 61 solar factor g, 189 thermal conductivity, 7
reflection, 6 solar heat gain, 189 thermal expansion coefficient, 4
reflective coating, 188 solidification, 4 thermal movement, 143
relative heat gain, 188 sound reduction index, 189 thermal stress, 38, 190
renucleation, 52 spacer, spacer bar, 189 thermal transmittance, see U-value
representative stress, 67 spacers, 189 thermochromic glazing, 20

213
thermoplastic, 152, 190 total transmittance, see solar factor uniform distribution, 64, 192
thermoset, 153 toughened glass, 190 uniform lateral load, 190
thermotropic glazing, 20 transformation temperature, 4 uniform stress field, 190
threshold stress intensity, 51, see transient analysis, 190 unmitigated risk, 29
crack growth thresh- transient finite element analysis,
old 67 vinyl glazing, 190
through bolt connection, 148 translucent, 190 viscoelastic behaviour, 109
through-thickness crack, 74 transmittance, 190 viscosity, 4, 190
time of loading, 190 transparency, 6 visible light transmittance, 190
transparent, 190 volume crack, 55
time to failure, see lifetime
transverse seam, 190
time-dependent failure probability,
TRAV, 86
65 weep hole, 190
TRLV, 86
time-dependent loading, 65 Weibull distribution, 63, 76, 105,
two-component silicone, 155
tin bath, 2 two-part compound, 190 192
tin side, 190 Weibull parameters, 195
tin side (of glass), 2 U-value, see overall heat transfer wire glass, 190
tinted glass, 17, 190 coefficient, 190 wired glass, 3
total heat gain, 190 ultimate elongation, 190
total heat loss, 190 uniaxial stress field, 75, 190 Young’s modulus, 7

Haldimann Structural Use of Glass Book PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Haldimann Structural Use of Glass Book PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Haldimann Structural Use of Glass Book PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IABSE Structural Engineering Document

Structural use of Glass

2 General Design Guidelines 27

3 Fracture Strength of Glass Elements 49

5 Design for Compressive In-plane Loads 107

6 Design Methods for Improved Accuracy and Flexibility 131

7 Glass Connections 141

8 Special Topics 167

A Notation, Abbreviations 175

B Glossary of Terms 181

C Statistical Fundamentals 192

Benjamin BEER Werner Sobek Engineering & Design, Stuttgart, Ger-

Berne, Basel and Nottingham / November 2007 Dr. Matthias Haldimann

1.1.1 Production of flat glass

Drawing Blowing Pressing Floating

Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling

Hollow glass Window and

Glass tubes, ware, drinking Glasses, facade glasses,

Figure 1.1: Glass production processes and products overview.

Figure 1.2: raw material

melter tin bath annealing lehr

SED ‘Structural use of Glass’ DRAFT (November 11, 2007)

1.1.2 Production of cast glass and glass profiles

raw material Figure 1.3:

melter cooling (annealing) area

1.1.3 Relevant standards

DRAFT (November 11, 2007) SED ‘Structural use of Glass’

1.2 Material properties

1.2.1 Composition and chemical properties

SED ‘Structural use of Glass’ DRAFT (November 11, 2007)

DRAFT (November 11, 2007) SED ‘Structural use of Glass’

1.2.2 Physical properties

SED ‘Structural use of Glass’ DRAFT (November 11, 2007)

Soda lime Borosilicate

100% Figure 1.11:

glass with an anti- glass.

DRAFT (November 11, 2007) SED ‘Structural use of Glass’

SED ‘Structural use of Glass’ DRAFT (November 11, 2007)

1.3 Processing and glass products

u edge working (arrissing, grinding, polishing)

u thermal treatment to get heat strengthened or fully tempered glass (tempering)

u laminating for enhanced post-breakage performance, safety on impact, bullet resis-

tance, fire resistance or acoustic insulation

reduce solar gain and enhance acoustic performance.

1.3.2 Tempering of glass

DRAFT (November 11, 2007) SED ‘Structural use of Glass’

ANNEALED GLASS TEMPERED GLASS

flawless material tensile stress

flaws are closed flaws are closed

breakage no tensile (flaw opening) stress on the surface

Figure 1.14: The principle of glass tempering (adapted from [297]).

SED ‘Structural use of Glass’ DRAFT (November 11, 2007)

Table 1.16: Glass type terminology overview.

Level of residual Terminology in Other frequently

Fully tempered glass

cleaning heating quenching

glass Figure 1.18:

DRAFT (November 11, 2007) SED ‘Structural use of Glass’

Heat strengthened glass